The  Kingdom 
and  the  Nations 


ERIC  M.  NORTH 


LIBRARY  OF  THE  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


^mi 


BV  2090  .N6 

kingdom  and  the  nat i 

North      p 


on 


fon: 


THE  HOPE  OF  JAPAN 
An     educated,    Christian     womanhood. 


The  Kingdom 
and  the  Nations 


ERIC  M.  ^ORTH 


AL  ^i.'- 


"And  this  gospel  of  the  Kingdom 
shall  be  preached  in  all  the  world 
for  a  witness  unto  all    nations/ 


Published  by 

The  Central  Committee  oh  the  United  Study  of  Foreiom  Missions 

West  Medford,  Mass. 


Copyright,  1921,  by 

The  Central  Committee  on  the  United  Study  or 

Foreign  Missions 

West  Medford,  Mass. 


Press  of 

The  Vermont  Printing  Company 

Brattleboro,  Vt.,  U.S.A. 


FOREWORD 

The  Central  Committee  on  the  United  Study 
of  Foreign  Missions  celebrates  this  year  its  twenty- 
first  anniversary. 

Organized  in  1900,  the  Committee  has  published 
a  study  book  each  year  and  has  sent  out  two  million 
books  to  the  constituency  of  women's  boards  of 
foreign  missions. 

The  Committee  begins  its  third  decade  with  this 
volume,  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations^  by  Eric 
M.  North,  Ph.D.  Nothing  could  be  more  timely 
or  more  important  than  this  review  of  spiritual  needs 
and  the  estimate  of  resources  for  the  reconstruction 
of  the  nations. 

The  book  will  be  valuable  to  young  and  old.  Men 
and  women  of  the  Kingdom  should  consider  the 
challenge  and  prepare  to  meet  it. 

Mrs.  Henry  W.  Peabody,  Chairman 
Mrs.  Frank  Mason  North 
Miss  Olivia  H.  Lawrence 
Mrs.  James  A.  Webb,  Jr. 
Miss  Alice  M.  Kyle 
Deaconess  Henrietta  Goodwin 
Mrs.  a.  V.  Pohlman 
Miss  Grace  T.  Colburn. 


"I  have  lived,  sir,  a  long  time,  and  the  longer  I  live 
the  more  convincing  proofs  I  see  of  this  truth,  that  God 
governs  the  affairs  of  men,  and  if  a  sparrow  cannot  fall 
without  His  notice,is  it  probable  that  an  Empire  can  rise 
without  His  assistance?  I  firmly  believe  thatwithout 
His  aid  we  shall  succeed  in  our  political  building  no  bet- 
ter than  the  builders  of  Babel.  We  shall  be  divided  by 
our  little  partial  local  interest;  our  projects  will  be  con- 
founded, and  we  ourselves  shall  become  a  reproach  and 
byword  to  future  ages.  And  what  is  worse,  mankind 
may  hereafter,  from  this  unfortunate  instance,  des- 
pair of  establishing  governments  by  human  wisdom,  and 
leave  it  to  Chance,  War,  and  Conquest." 


— Benjamin  Franklin,  on  moving  that  prayers 
be  offered  at  the  opening  of  each  day's  session  of 
the  Constitutional  Congress  of  the  United  States, 
1787. 


CONTENTS 

Page 

Preface  by  the  Central  Committee 3 

Guide  Posts  to  Study 7 

Introduction.          I.     The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations  13 

Chapter  One         II.     Japan 21 

III.     Korea 45 

Chapter  Two       IV.     China 57 

Chapter  Three     V.     India 91 

VI.     Islam  and  the  Near  East.  .  .  .  121 

Chapter  Four    VII.     Africa 135 

VIII.     Latin  America 154 

Chapter  Five       IX.     What  the  World  Needs 173 

Chapter  Six          X.     What  is  Required  of  Us 201 

A  Brief  Reading    List 231 

Index 236 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

The  Hope  of  Japan Frontispiece 

Facing 
Page 

In  Japan's  Silk  Mills 9 

Poverty 24 

On  the  Shoulders  of  Men 32 

In  China's  Cotton  Mills 41 

"Remember  China's  Humiliation" k^G 

Superstition 73 

Attacking  Poverty  in  India 88 

The    Resurrection    Story    in    an    Indian 

Village 105 

Attacking  Superstition  in  India 120 

A  Mohammedan  Village  School  in  Negro 

Africa 137 

Competing  with  the  Missionary 152 

What  WILL  She  Meet  on  the  Trail  to  Civ- 
ilization?   161 

What  will  Their  New  Home  be  Like? 169 

Imported  from  the  United  States! 184 

A  New  South  American 192 


GUIDE  POSTS 

INTRODUCTION 

I.    The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations.  Page  13 

1.  HOW    THE    KINGDOM    GROWS. 

The  foundations  of  the  church;  the  redemption  of 
men;  the  transformation  of  life. 

2.  POINTS    OF    VIEW    IN    THIS    STUDY. 

Our  method  of  study;  humanize  the  statistics; 
Tessie  Smith  and  world  economics;  Christian 
women  and  public  responsibility. 


CHAPTER  ONE 

II.    Japan.  Page  21 

1.  JAPAN,    NEW    AND    OLD. 

2.  THE    BURDENS    OF   JAPAN. 

Militarism  in  Japan,  Korea,  Shantung;  industrial 
and  economic  conflict;  the  struggle  for  democracy; 
Japan's  effort  at  self-discovery. 

3.  japan's    SOLUTIONS    FOR   JAPAn's    PROBLEMS. 

What  these  solutions  are;  the  limitations  on  their 
success. 

4.  WHAT  JAPAN    NEEDS. 

5.  FOUNDATIONS    OF    CHRISTIANITY. 

The  results  of  missions;  the  unknown  Christian 
movement. 

6.  THE    OPPORTUNITY   OF   AMERICAN    CHRISTIANS. 

The  support  of  the  missionary  enterprise;  Chris- 
tianizing national  issues. 


8  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

III.  KOREA.  Page  45 

i.  the  seeds  of  conflict. 

2.  the  revolution  and  its  results. 

3.  Christianity's  foundation  in  korea. 

4.  Christianity's  task  in  korea. 

CHAPTER  TWO 

IV.  China.  Page  57 

1.  the    CHINESE    PEOPLE. 

A  civilization  without  nationalism;  Chinese  char- 
acter; upsetting  a  civilization. 

2.  THE    burdens    OF    CHINA. 

Poverty,  ignorance,  superstition;  barriers  to  in- 
dustrial wealth;  foreign  aggression  and  China's 
humiliation;  barriers  to  good  government,  extra- 
territoriality, armies  and  parties;  lack  of  national 
spirit. 

3.  SIGNS    OF   china's    NEW   DAY. 

Industrial  and  commercial  expansion;  the  help- 
ing hand  of  foreign  capital;  a  new  A-B-C;  China's 
new  national  consciousness,  students  and  mer- 
chants at  work  for  their  country. 

4.  china's  need  and  Christianity's  gift. 

China's  need  for  Christianity;  Christianity's  con- 
tribution to  China. 

5.  FORWARD    movements    AMONG    CHRISTIAN    FORCES. 

The  missionary  survey;  the  social  service  move- 
ment; Christian  unity;  rising  leadership  of  Chinese 
Christians. 

6.  THE   TASK  OF   CHRISTIANITY   IN    CHINA. 

The  task  in  the  native  church;  unreached  mil- 
lions; the  power  of  China's  women;  Christian 
China's  need  of  America,  missions.  Christian  in- 
ternational leadership. 


IN   JAPAN'S    SILK    MILLS 

All    the   unwholesome   conditions    arising    from   the   employment   of   women 

in  large  numbers   in  factories  are   already   acute  in   the  Orient. 


Guide  Posts  9 

CHAPTER  THREE 

V.    India.  Page  91 

1.  INDIA    THE    MYSTERIOUS. 

2.  India's  evil  trio. 

Ignorance;  poverty;  caste. 

3.  India's  problems  and  India's  solutions. 

India's  religion  and  India's  progress;  India's  at- 
tack on  India's  evils;  striking  at  poverty. 

4.  INDIA    IN    THE    WAR. 

India's  contribution  to  the  war;  what  the  war 
brought  to  India. 

5.  SELF-GOVERNMENT    FOR    INDIA. 

"The  greatest  political  experiment  in  the  world's 
history";  what  Indian  self-government  faces. 

6.  THE    CHRISTIAN    ENTERPRISE    AND    INDIa's    PROBLEMS. 

Christianity's  attack  on  poverty  and  caste;  seek- 
ing church  unity  in  India;  Indian  Christianity 
overflows;  the  unknown  Christian  movement; 
Christianity  and  Indian  national  characteristics. 

7.  THE    OPPORTUNITY    OF   AMERICAN    MISSIONS. 

America's  contribution  to  the  missionary  enter- 
prise; how  we  hinder  the  Kingdom  in  India;  India's 
need  and  our  character. 


VI.     Islam  and  the  Near  East.  Page  121 

I.     worldwide  agitation  in  islam. 

Does  the  Crescent  wax  or  wane;  the  political  col- 
lapse of  Islam;  barriers  to  Islam's  spiritual  revi- 
val. 

a.       CHRISTIANITY   AND    THE    MOSLEM    WORLD. 

What  the  Moslem  world  is  learning  about  Chris- 
tianity; Christianity's  approach  to  the  Moslem 
world. 

3.   THE  NEAR  EAST,  THE  CITADEL  OF  ISLAM. 

"The  crossroads  of  the  world";  Christianity's  task 
in  the  Near  East. 


lo  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 


CHAPTER  FOUR 

VII.     Africa.  Page  135 

1.  AFRICA   TO-DAY. 

The  war  in  Africa;  new  words  on  African  trails. 

2.  THE    RULERS    OF    AFRICA. 

Governments  and  peoples;  watch  the  mandates! 

3.  THE    CONFLICT    OF    RACES. 

Liquor;    immorality;    race    and    labor;    the    new 
slavery;  the  stupidity  of  selfishness, 

4.  WHAT   THE    MISSIONARY    STANDS    FOR. 

Missionary  champions;  the  missionary's  joy- 

5.  MISSIONARY    RESULTS    AND    MISSIONARY    TASKS. 

Foundation  stones  in  place;  the  missionary's  task 
in  Africa. 

6.  OUR    DEBT   AND    OUR    DUTY. 

Our  unrealized  debt  to  Africa;  our  unrealized  duty 
to  Africa. 


VIII.     Latin  America.  Page  154 

1.  THE    ROOMY    CONTINENT. 

The  empty  continent;  the  incoming  tide. 

2.  CLASS    AND    MASS    IN    LATIN    AMERICA. 

In  government;  in  education;  in  industry. 

3.  LATIN  America's  heritage. 

Disdain  for  labor;  irregularity  of  marriage  rela- 
tions; freedom  from  race  prejudice;  friendliness; 
art  and  learning. 

4.  LATIN  AMERICA  AND  THE  WORLD  OUTSIDE. 

Looking  to  Europe;  turning  northward;  American 
neighborliness. 

5.  THE  ISSUES  OF  LIFE  IN  LATIN  AMERICA, 

The  need  of  Christ;  the  mission  of  the  evangelical 
churches. 


Guide  Posts  ii 

CHAPTER  FIVE 

IX.    What  the  World  Needs.  Page  173 

1.  THE    BURDENS    OF    MANKIND:     POVERTY,    IGNORANCE, 
RACE  PREJUDICE. 

Poverty  and  its  sources  (an  unorganized  world; 
the  misuse  of  wealth — profit  seeking,  economic  im- 
perialism, selfishness);  ignorance;  race-prejudice. 

2.  THE   BURDENS   OF  MANKIND  IN   GOVERNMENT  AND  NA- 
TIONALISM. 

The  limitations  of  democracy,  secret  diplomacy; 
the  government  of  subject  nations;  exaggerated 
nationalism. 

3.  THE   SPIRITUAL   BURDENS   OF  MANKIND. 

Anxiety,  hopelessness,  indifference,  sin,  fear  of 
death. 

4.  WHAT  THE  WORLD  NEEDS. 

Character-making  power;  the  supremacy  of  Christ. 

5.  HOW   CAN   THE    WORLD    FIND    CHRIST? 

The  only  way;  the  challenge  to  Christians  in  the 
non-Christian  world;  the  challenge  to  European 
Christians;  their  present  limitations;  the  chal- 
lenge to  the  Christians  of  America. 


12  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

CHAPTER  SIX 

X.    What  is  Required  of  Us.  Page  201 

1.  WHAT  ARE  YOU  GOING  TO  DO  ABOUT  IT? 

2.  FACING  THE  WHOLE  TASK   (a)   IN    THE    NON-CHRISTIAN 
WORLD. 

Illiteracy,  ignorance;  evil  customs  and  evil  spirits; 
Statistics  of  the  task. 

3.  FACING     THE     WHOLE     TASK     (b)     IN     THE     CHRISTIAN 
WORLD. 

Christianizing  international  relations;  Christian- 
izing the  "Christians";  are  we  able? 

4.  OUR  UNRECOGNIZED  ALLIES. 

The  thirst  for  knowledge;  love  of  liberty;  con- 
sciousness of  need;  humanity's  undying  hopes; 
the  power  of  example;  modern  science;  the  accept- 
ance of  Christian  standards;  the  assurance  of  vic- 
tory. 

5.  WHAT  IS  REQUIRED  OF  US. 

The  methods  on  the  foreign  field  and  what  they 
require;  Christianizing  international  affairs. 

Our  personal  service:  the  extension  of  knowledge; 
the  investment  of  life;  making  up  the  budget,  what 
we  are  giving  now;  your  Christian  influence  in  your 
community;  your  influence  in  the  nation. 

Fellowship  with  Christ;  seeing  the  world  through 
Jesus'  eyes;  doing  as  Jesus  did;  the  foundation  of 
His  Kingdom  among  the  nations. 


INTRODUCTION 

I.  THE  KINGDOM  AND  THE  NATIONS 

Just  as  a  group  of  artists,  each  of  whom  is  work- 
ing on  the  details  of  some  great  masterpiece,  must 
from  time  to  time  step  back  from  their  small  sec- 
tions of  the  canvas  to  grasp  the  progress  of  the  whole 
work  and  catch  from  the  gradually  filling  outlines  a 
new  sense  of  the  marvelous  plan  of  the  master  de- 
signer, so  every  one  who  is  seeking  to  bring  the  world 
to  the  knowledge  of  the  glory  of  God  in  Christ  Jesus 
must  from  time  to  time  lift  his  eyes  from  his  portion 
of  the  task  to  behold  the  great  world-wide  founda- 
tions of  the  Kingdom  of  God  taking  form  in  strength 
and  beauty  and  to  see  the  purposes  of  the  Lord  of  that 
Kingdom  increasingly  visible  in  every  land. 

THE  FOUNDATIONS  OF  THE  CHURCH 

In  nearly  every  country  of  the  world  the  mission- 
aries have  been  at  work,  in  some  for  only  a  few  years, 
in  others  for  generations.  In  all  lands  the  Spirit 
of  God  has  been  moving  in  and  upon  the  hearts  of 
men.  Thus  foundations  of  the  Church  have  been 
laid  in  the  non-Christian  world.  At  places  they  are 
deep  and  broad,  at  others  they  are  temporary  and 
needing  permanent  reinforcement.  The  work  of  the 
pioneers  is  still  going  on  in  many  fields  and  is  needed 
in  parts  of  all.  In  several  the  ground  is  hardly 
broken.  Elsewhere  virile  and  earnest  native  church- 
es are  solidly  established  and  are  already  sturdy 
witnesses  for  Christ  in  the  life  of  their  nations. 
Many  of  these  fields  and  several  aspects  of  the  work 
we  have  studied  in  other  books  in  this  series.     In  this 


14  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

we  are  to  make  the  bold  attempt  to  see  these  founda- 
tions as  a  whole,  to  grasp  their  extent  and  condition, 
to  visualize  the  rising  layers  of  stone.  We  shall  do 
this  not  so  much  out  of  interest  in  the  measuring  and 
describing  of  results  as  to  discover  what  it  means  for 
the  future  and  what  the  great  Master-builder  re- 
quires us  in  particular  to  construct  upon  those 
foundations. 

THE  REDEMPTION  OF    MEN 

Yet  the  missionary  enterprise  does  not  have  as  its 
only  or  even  its  primary  purpose  the  establishment  of 
a  church.  Its  chief  purpose  is  to  redeem.  Every- 
where and  continually  men  and  nations  because  of 
ignorance  and  ill-will,  because  of  false  gods  and 
cruel  customs,  because  of  their  own  selfishness  and 
the  selfishness  of  fellow-men  and  fellow-nations  are 
in  agony  and  bondage  to  fear.  With  suspicious  eye 
nation  looks  upon  nation,  class  upon  class,  man  upon 
man.  Great  multitudes,  oppressed  and  confined  by 
barriers  of  caste  and  tradition  and  ignorance,  by  the 
mistaken  ambitions  of  national  leaders,  by  selfish 
control  of  national  and  international  wealth,  literally 
hunger  and  thirst  for  deliverance.  Children  and 
women  suffer  untold  misfortune.  Splendid  talents 
and  marvelous  racial  abilities  are  dulled  and  thwarted 
in  their  needed  service  to  mankind.  Under  and 
through  it  all  is  the  unending  longing  of  human  hearts 
for  the  true  God,  distraught  and  pitiful  because  they 
are  far  from  Him. 

But,  through  the  mercy  and  love  of  Him  to  whom 
the  missionary  enterprise  seeks  to  bring  men,  these 
things  need  not  be.     For  nineteen  hundred  years 


Introduction  15 

multitudes  without  number  of  every  occupation  and 
temperament,  of  every  nationality  and  condition  of 
life  have  applied  Christianity  to  their  personal  lives. 
They  have  met  the  Lord  of  all  life  face  to  face  and 
under  His  searching  look  they  have  found  their  own 
selfishness  and  ill-will  unendurable.  They  have  sur- 
rendered their  lives  to  Him,  their  wills  to  His,  and 
have  found  power  to  attain  ideals  of  unselfishness, 
strength  to  overcome  every  temptation,  faith  to 
triumph  over  all  trials  of  soul  and  circumstance,  and 
the  continuing  and  incomprehensible  peace  of  a 
great  Companionship.  Furthermore,  in  groups  or 
with  individual  boldness,  they  have  sought  to  apply 
to  the  life  of  the  community  or  the  nation  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  Gospel  of  Christ,  to  whom  all  men  are 
brothers — children  of  His  own  Heavenly  Father. 

THE  TRANSFORMATION  OF    LIFE 

And  steadily  and  slowly  great  public  wrongs  have 
been  righted.  In  the  Christian  world  slavery  is  not 
only  abhorred  but  outlawed.  The  profitable  pro- 
duction and  sale  of  alcoholic  liquor,  to  the  damage  of 
men's  bodies  and  the  ruin  of  their  moral  integrity,  is 
being  increasingly  prohibited.  The  equal  basis  of 
opportunity  and  right  for  women  is  recognized  as  a 
mark  of  distinction  of  Christian  lands  and  Christian 
centuries.  The  consciousness  of  the  responsibility 
of  the  strong — whether  men  or  nations — for  the  pro- 
tection and  strfingthening  of  the  weak  is  steadily 
growing.  Whatever  may  have  been  the  ultimate 
causes  of  the  great  war,  the  appeals  of  the  leaders  on 
both  sides  to  what  were  called  "the  moral  aims  of 
the  war"  showed  that  conquest  for  the  sake  of  con- 


i6  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

quest  and  loot  was  no  longer  an  adequate  motive  to 
lead  nations  to  war,  but  that  right  must  come  before 
economic  profit.  All  these  changes  are  the  results 
of  the  possession,  in  greater  or  less  degree,  by  millions 
of  men  and  women  of  the  Christian  outlook  on  Hfe 
and  of  the  leadership  which  they  have  pushed  for- 
ward. Thus  Christianity  builds  the  Kingdom  of 
God  on  earth  not  simply  by  the  close  union  of  be- 
lievers in  a  church,  but  by  its  transforming  influence 
upon  all  of  human  life.  In  this  little  book  we  must 
therefore  also  note  the  leavening  results  of  the  Gospel 
in  its  working  in  non-Christian  lands  and  study  those 
conditions  of  national  and  international  life  which 
imperatively  need  its  revolutionary  power. 

Our  method  of  study  will  be  first  of  all  to  pass 
rapidly  through  the  major  fields  of  missionary  work, 
starting  with  Japan  and  moving  westward.  In  each 
field  we  shall  remind  ourselves  quickly  of  its  out- 
standing characteristics  and  of  the  strength  of  the 
Christian  forces  in  it  and  note  more  particularly 
those  conditions  in  the  life  of  the  people  and  those 
national  problems  that  most  need  the  influence  of 
the  Gospel  of  Christ  and  are  of  the  most  significance 
to  the  permanent  building  of  the  Kingdom.  In  the 
fifth  chapter  the  question  of  how  the  Christian  forces 
of  the  world  are  equipped  to  meet  the  challenge  of 
need  revealed  by  our  rapid  survey  must  be  faced. 
What  can  the  native  churches  do?  What  can  Europe 
do?  What  can  America  do?  The  final  chapter 
comes  even  more  closely  home  in  its  endeavor  to  face 
just  what  is  required  of  us. 

humanize  the  statistics 
If  there  seem  to  be  in  these  chapters  less  considera- 


Introduction  17 

tion  of  native  religions  and  native  customs,  less  of 
missionary  methods  and  achievements  and  more  of 
matters  of  politics  and  economics  than  is  customary 
in  these  texts,  it  will  be  for  several  reasons.  First  of 
all,  the  readers  of  this  series  are  already  familiar  with 
nearly  every  aspect  of  the  missionary's  work  and  with 
much  of  the  daily  life  of  the  people.  They  already 
have  the  resources  with  which  to  enrich  the  statistics 
of  poverty,  the  appraisals  of  illiteracy  and  ignorance 
with  descriptive  incident  and  illuminating  anecdote. 
The  writer  expects  that  those  who  study  the  subjects 
covered  here  will  use  freely  these  resources.  The 
"ones"  and  "tens"  and  "hundreds"  of  the  statistics 
stand  for  something  suffered,  earned,  understood, 
lost  by  Okamoto-San,  by  Li  Feng,  by  Andungo,  wife 
of  Obam  Ze,  or  Ganga  Ram,  Senorita  Jacinto,  and 
Tessie  Smith  and  one  or  ten  or  a  hundred  of  their 
kindred  and  friends.  To  fail  to  reflect  upon  this 
fact  as  one  reads  is  to  miss  the  meaning  of  whatever 
may  be  said  of  politics  and  economics. 

TESSIE  SMITH  AND  WORLD  ECONOMICS 

In  the  second  place,  not  many  of  us  are  really  aware 
of  the  manner  in  which  great  economic  and  political 
forces  affect  the  lives  of  millions  of  Ganga  Rams  and 
Tessie  Smiths.  We  are  stirred  by  the  story  of  Ganga 
Ram's  tithe  of  his  tiny  crop  of  grain,  but  we  rarely 
press  back  to  reasons  why  the  tithe  of  his  crop  was  only 
a  few  handfuls.  The  traffic  in  opium  and  rum  is  in- 
ternational trade  secured  by  international  law.  We 
are  shocked  by  the  effect  of  rum  on  Obam  Ze's 
treatment  of  Andungo,  but  when  some  one  says 
"international  law"  we  blink  and  are  dumb.     We  are 


i8  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

horror-stricken  at  the  narratives  of  the  sufferings  of 
some  Armenian  child,  but  we  are  indifferent  to  the 
political  conditions  that  brought  about  such  suffer- 
ings or  may  prevent  them.  We  are  well  aware  that 
the  decisions  of  statesmen  and  financiers  do  produce 
incalculable  results — witness  the  Great  War.  We 
are  dimly  aware  that  missionary  work  was  inter- 
rupted or  that  new  opportunities  have  come.  We  do 
not  grasp  the  fact  that  the  action  of  a  government  in 
Asia,  of  a  group  of  bankers  in  New  York  or  London 
may  advance  by  decades,  postpone  for  centuries,  or 
utterly  destroy  the  possibility  of  an  enduring  founda- 
tion for  the  Kingdom  of  God  in  some  tribe  or  nation. 
India,  overwhelmingly  Moslem  and  Hindu,  by  vote 
of  the  British  Parliament  undertakes  self-govern- 
ment, with  what  consequences  to  Christianity  no 
man  knows.  Sir  Michael  Sadler,  whose  reputation 
as  an  educator-statesman  is  world-wide,  declared  re- 
cently that  the  form  of  China's  new  system  of  educa- 
tion, as  determined  by  the  decisions  of  the  next  two  or 
three  decades,  is  of  tremendous  importance  to  the 
future  of  the  whole  world.  It  is  just  such  things  as 
these  that  we  who  work  for  Christ's  Kingdom  among 
the  nations  need  to  understand.  Public  opinion  in 
action  is  the  most  powerful  force  in  the  world  today. 
Will  not  the  Lord  call  the  Church — the  community 
of  Christians — the  individual  Christians  to  account 
if  their  part  in  shaping  public  opinion  is  not  actively 
and  intelligently  performed  in  the  fear  of  Him ! 

CHRISTIAN  WOMEN  AN.>  PUBLIC    RESPONSIBILITY 

For,  in  the  democratic  countries  of  the  world  where 
public  opinion  and  the  balkt  have  power  over  nation- 


Introduction  19 

al  policy  and  public  action,  no  one  is  without  influ- 
ence nor  can  any  one  escape  responsibility.  In  the 
United  States  in  addition  to  the  influence  women 
have  been  free  to  exert  upon  public  opinion  they  now 
have  the  ballot  to  express  even  more  directly  their 
convictions.  Within  certain  limits  women  in  Great 
Britain  have  the  same  opportunity.  In  Germany  the 
revolution  has  put  thirty-seven  women  in  as  mem- 
bers of  the  National  Parliament.  Rumania  is  re- 
ported to  have  adopted  woman  suffrage  and  Greece 
to  be  upon  the  point  of  doing  so  for  her  new  man- 
dated territory  in  Asia  Minor  as  well  as  for  Greece 
herself.  These  millions  of  new  voters  may  leave  the 
world  in  its  old  ruts  or  lift  it  out.  The  obligation 
upon  American  women  is  the  more  definite  because 
of  the  strong  hold  America  has  upon  the  idealism  and 
the  aspirations  of  the  peoples  of  the  world.  Yet 
Americans*  understanding  of  the  world-wide  effect 
of  their  actions  is  comparatively  slight.  Misinfor- 
mation and  misrepresentation  are  constantly  present 
as  enemies  of  wise  and  honest  decisions.  Who  then 
among  American  women  will  furnish  the  necessary 
leadership  for  guiding  and  informing  them?  The 
call  is  to  those  who  have  been  studying  the  peoples 
of  the  world  in  the  light  of  Christianity — to  the 
missionary-minded  women  of  America.  This  is  the 
third  reason  for  the  emphases  which  appear  in  these 
chapters. 

May  there  be  fonnd  in  them  what  the  Bulu  Chris- 
tian would  call  ''five  words  of  the  Word  of  God!" 

E.  M.  N. 


CHAPTER  ONE 

II.  JAPAN 

New  Japan.  Mr.  Kipling  in  his  Mandalay  song  has 

the  refrain: 

"An*  the  dawn  comes  up  Hke  thunder 
outer  China  'crost  the  Bay." 

The  Sunrise  Kingdom  has  risen  above  the  horizon 
of  Western  civilization  with  just  such  rapidity  as 
that.  Less  than  seventy  years  ago  foreigners  ap- 
pearing on  her  shores,  even  shipwrecked  sailors,  were 
imprisoned  and  no  inhabitant  was  permitted  to  leave 
for  foreign  lands.  To-day  her  commerce  is  world- 
wide, her  shipping  dominates  the  Pacific  trade,  her 
people  have  travelled  and  settled  in  nearly  every 
land,  and,  as  one  of  the  "Big  Five"  powers  of  the 
world,  she  shared  with  France  and  Great  Britain  and 
Italy  and  the  United  States  the  settlement  of  peace 
at  the  end  of  the  world's  greatest  war.  No  less 
striking  are  the  changes  within.  An  entire  govern- 
ment-controlled educational  system,  comprising  near- 
ly 28,000  schools  and  culminating  in  six  universities, 
is  in  full  operation  and  overcrowded.  Adequate 
railroads  and  telegraphs  extend  the  length  and 
breadth  of  her  territory.  Modern  cities  with  de- 
partment stores,  factories,  slums,  millionaires,  elec- 
tric trolleys,  daily  newspapers  issuing  "extras,"  are 
bustling  with  the  life  of  manufacture  and  trade. 
Osaka  and  Tokyo  have  a  combined  population  of  over 


22  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

three  millions.  Her  territory  has  also  expanded  to 
include  the  lower  half  of  Saghalin,  the  Kingdom  of 
Korea,  the  island  of  Formosa,  with  many  smaller 
islands  in  the  Pacific,  and  "spheres  of  influence" 
more  or  less  definite  in  Manchuria,  Shantung,  and 
Fukien  in  Chinese  territory.  A  powerful,  modern 
army  and  navy,  with  a  victory  over  Russia  already 
to  its  credit,  guards  her  possessions.  Two  Houses  of 
Parliament,  the  lower  one  elective  with  a  cabinet  of 
ministers,  and  many  official  departments  and  bureaus 
represent,  in  form  at  least,  the  modernizing  of  the 
government. 

Old  Japan.  Striking  as  these  changes  are,  Japan 

is  in  important  respects  far  from  modern.  Life  in 
the  rural  districts,  where  more  than  three-fourths  of 
the  population  live,  is  little  changed.  Here  the 
worship  of  primitive  nature  gods  continues  and 
marriages  are  still  made  by  "go-betweens."  The 
general  neglect  of  the  higher  education  of  women,  the 
treatment  of  women  in  industry,  and  the  govern- 
mental and  public  toleration  of  prostitution  as  an 
established  institution  are  signs  that  the  general  posi- 
tion of  women  has  not  radically  altered.  Repre- 
sentative government  and  democracy,  as  they  are 
known  in  such  nations  as  France,  Great  Britain,  and 
the  United  States,  do  not  exist.  The  indifference  of 
the  people  to  their  responsibihties  for  local  and  munic- 
ipal government  is  extreme.  In  national  affairs  the 
electorate  is  not  only  limited  to  about  five  per  cent,  of 
the  population,*  but  the  control  of  the  cabinet  of 


*As  compared  with  47  per  cent,  in  Great  Britain,  27  per  cent,  in  France,  and 
25  per  cent,  in  the  United  States  (the  last  being  previous  to  woman  suffrage  in 
national  elections). 


Japan  23 

ministers,  who  both  direct  government  departments 
and  exercise  great  power  over  legislation,  is  uncon- 
stitutionally in  the  hands  of  five  "Elder  Statesmen," 
who  wield  the  really  autocratic  power  of  the  Em- 
peror. The  will  of  the  people  is  not  only  hindered  in 
this  way,  but  the  government,  by  its  control  of  the 
press,  can  withhold  news  of  importance  from  the  pub- 
lic or  suppress  the  expression  of  opinion. 

The  paternalism  of  the  Japanese  government  has 
its  counterpart  in  the  attitude  of  the  people  toward 
the  government.  The  ancient  feudal  spirit  is  still 
powerful,  emphasizing  obedience  and  dependence 
and  class  spirit  rather  than  initiative  and  democracy. 
For  example,  at  the  signing  of  the  Armistice  in 
November,  1918,  the  people  of  America  and  England 
and  France  broke  out  into  immediate  and  spon- 
taneous celebration.  But  the  Japanese  people 
waited  until  the  Government  gave  the  word  before 
expressing  their  own  ardent  feelings.  Similarly  the 
institution  most  foreign  to  all  the  Westernizing  ex- 
periences of  Japan  is  the  worship  of  the  Emperor, 
before  whose  portrait  all  school  children  are  taught 
to  bow,  of  whom  statesmen  declare,  ''the  Emperor 
is  heaven-descended,  divine  and  sacred,"  and  about 
whom  university  professors  write  theological 
treatises,*  asserting  ''by  obedience  to  that  which 
the  Emperor  commands  we  develop  and  perfect  our 
lives.  .  .  .  The  standard  of  right  and  wrong, 
good  and  evil  is  found  only  in  the  Imperial  Will." 
Thus  Japan  not  only  retains  the  doctrine  of  the  divine 
right  of  kings,  discarded  by  the  West,  b  at  carries  it 
to  the  extent  of  making  the  sovereign  di  fine. 


*Interuational  Review  of  Missions ^  July,  1920. 


24  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

the  burdens  of  japan 
Leading  the  Orient.  With  thesc  and  Other  Strange  con- 
tradictions of  ideals  and  actions  in  mind,  let  us  notice 
some  of  the  major  burdens  and  problems  which  con- 
front the  Japanese  people  to-day.  The  first  of  these 
is  the  burden  of  leadership  in  the  Far  East.  Very- 
soon  after  the  enforced  opening  of  Japan  to  Western 
culture,  her  leaders  saw  that,  if  the  Orient  was  not 
to  be  parceled  out  among  the  nations  of  the  West  for 
their  benefit,  she  herself  must  become  the  dominant 
power  within  the  Far  East  and  must  lead  the  Far 
East  in  confronting  the  West.  By  her  own  remark- 
able adoption  of  Western  material  civilization,  by 
constant  effort  to  force  or  help  China  to  resist  the 
pressure  of  European  nations  for  concessions  and  to 
acknowledge  her  leadership,  by  defeating  Russia  in 
1904,  by  annexing  Korea,  by  driving  Germany  out 
of  the  Shantung  Peninsula  and  the  Pacific  islands, 
and  by  the  collapse  of  Imperial  Russia  and  her  Far 
Eastern  ambitions,  Japan  has  attained  her  coveted 
position.  But  it  entails  great  responsibilities.  She 
must  reckon  with  every  nation  that  is  interested  in 
the  Orient.  Every  issue  between  the  races  of  the 
East  and  the  races  of  the  West  may  require  her  to 
become  a  champion.  Most  serious  of  all,  if  the 
efforts  of  the  peacemakers  fail  and  the  nations  con- 
tinue in  lust  for  wealth  and  territory,  she  must  pre- 
pare the  Orient  for  the  inevitable  war  in  the  Pacific 
and  bear  the  brunt  of  the  attack. 

MILITARISM 

Militarist  Power.  These  international  dangers  have  tight- 
ened upon  the  Japanese  people  the  hold  of  a  military 
and  naval  clique  whose  power  is  often  wielded  in 


POVERTY 

Chinese    famine    sufferers    waiting    behind    a    barrier    for    the    distribution 

of   relief. 


Japan  25 

spite  of  and  frequently  without  knowledge  of  the 
people.  Whenever  the  military  leaders  cannot  se- 
cure the  support  of  the  Cabinet,  they  can  force  its 
disruption  and  dismissal  by  causing  the  resignation 
of  the  Minister  of  War  or  of  the  Navy  and  refusing  to 
appoint  a  successor.  Indeed,  it  is  rumored  that  the 
military  leaders  are  able  to  keep  the  rest  of  the  Cabi- 
net, even  the  Premier,  in  ignorance  of  their  official 
acts.  Moreover,  though  the  Diet  or  Parliament  is 
able  to  prevent  marked  increases  in  military  or  other 
major  expenditures,  it  is  never  able  to  force  a  re- 
duction of  such  expenditures  once  approved.  The 
result  is  to  give  militarist  interests  far  greater  power 
in  national  issues  than  is  the  case  in  the  democratic 
nations  of  the  West,  though  perhaps  not  greater  than 
that  in  pre-war  Germany.  Nearly  every  step  taken 
by  Japan  which  has  been  looked  upon  with  anxiety 
by  Christian  leaders  and  statesmen  has  been  due, 
not  to  popular  agitation,  but  to  the  policies  of  this 
group  and  their  practical  consequences. 

Militarists  in  An  example  of  this  is  seen  in  another 
^°^^^-  serious    problem    for   Japan — Korea. 

Forced  by  the  inability  of  the  old  Korean  Govern- 
ment to  resist  the  schemes  of  the  European  powers 
for  political  and  economic  concessions  and  by  the 
threat  of  Russia  to  take  Korea  for  herself,  Japan 
gradually,  perhaps  not  unwillingly,  obtained  control 
over  Korean  affairs,  until  in  August,  19 10,  the  Land 
of  the  Morning  Calm  was  annexed  by  the  Sunrise 
Kingdom.  Morning  Calm,  however,  hardly  re- 
sulted for  either.  In  spite  of  extended  material  im- 
provements in  railways,  reforestation,  road-making, 
and  of  moderate  extension  of  education  and  agri- 


26  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

cultural  betterment,  the  methods  of  Japan's  colonial 
government  have  been  to  a  great  degree  militaristic 
and  Prussian.  The  Korean  spirit  of  independence, 
kept  thoroughly  alive  by  these  mistaken  methods, 
stirred  profoundly  by  President  Wilson's  proclama- 
tion of  the  rights  of  small  nations  and  by  the 
death  of  the  old  Korean  Emperor,  broke  out  in  the 
spring  of  1919  in  a  remarkable  unarmed  country-wide 
demonstration  in  behalf  of  independence.  The  ex- 
treme brutality  of  the  military  police  in  endeavoring 
to  stop  the  demonstrations  and  in  hunting  out  sup- 
posed conspirators  powerfully  disturbed  the  Christian 
world.  The  Imperial  Japanese  Government,  keenly 
sensitive  to  Western  criticism,  promised  many  re- 
forms, some  of  which  have  been  begun.  But  her 
failure  in  Korea,  confirming  Chinese  and  Western 
suspicion  of  Prussianism  in  Japan  and  producing 
determined  discontent  in  17,000,000  Koreans  for 
whom  she  is  responsible,  hangs  like  a  millstone  about 
the  neck  of  her  ambitious  leadership  in  the  Orient. 

Militarists  in  This  Same  military  influence,  sup- 
Shantung.  ported,  to  be  sure,  by  the  nation's  in- 

creasing sense  of  power  and  her  belief  in  her  imperial 
destiny,  has  been  repeating  in  Shantung,  a  rich  and 
important  province  of  China,  certain  most  distressing 
aspects  of  the  Japanese  performance  in  Korea. 
Justifying  her  demand  as  reparation  for  the  murder 
of  two  German  Catholic  priests  by  brigands,  Ger- 
many, in  1897,  had  forced  from  China  railroad  and 
commercial  privileges  in  Shantung  and  control  of 
the  port  of  Kiaochow.  With  extensive  military  dis- 
play and  as  an  act  of  loyalty  to  the  Allies,  Japan 
drove  the  Germans  out  of  Shantung,  having  pre- 


Japan  27 

viously  secured  by  secret  treaty  with  Russia  and  the 
consent  of  Great  Britain  and  France,  given  for  the 
sake  of  help  in  the  war,  an  agreement  that  Japan 
should  inherit  all  of  Germany's  rights  in  Shantung. 
Japanese  control  in  Shantung  at  once  developed 
rapidly,  soon  going  beyond  the  bounds  of  the  former 
German  concessions.  Mines,  railways,  and  other 
possessions  commercially  valuable  have  been  forced 
into  Japanese  hands  or  Japanese  control  by  adroit 
and  unscrupulous  methods.  Intimidation  and  brib- 
ing of  native  officials,  unscrupulous  and  lying  mis- 
representation of  foreigners  through  a  controlled 
press,  insults  to  missionaries  and  their  workers, 
systematic  extension  and  promotion  of  vice  districts, 
similar  activity  in  the  spreading  of  evil  drugs,  as 
morphine,  among  the  populace,  are  all  credibly  re- 
ported as  accompaniments  of  the  Japanese  possession 
of  Shantung,  nor  can  it  be  imagined  that  such  acts 
are  without  the  knowledge  or  consent  of  the  Japanese 
governmental  administration  in  Shantung.  Thus 
again,  in  another  quarter,  the  imperialistic  activities 
of  Japan's  uncontrolled  military  clique  and  its  com- 
mercial associates  have  sowed  for  Japan  a  crop  of 
hatred  and  ill-will  and  wrongdoing.  If  the  Japanese 
people  condone  or  approve  such  treatment  of  their 
fellow  Asiatics,  they  will  reap  a  harvest  as  evil  as 
Prussia's. 

INDUSTRIAL  AND   ECONOMIC    CONFLICT 

Industrial  Evils.  A  distinctly  different  group  of  prob- 
lems for  Japan  has  also  been  made  more  acute  by 
the  Great  War — the  social  problems  of  the  modern 
factory  systems.  Even  before  the  war  industrial 
expansion  had  been  rapid,  but  in  the  war  period  fac- 


28  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

tories  grew  like  mushrooms.  It  was  estimated  in 
191 9  that  there  were  25,000  factories  and  2,000,000 
employees.*  One  person  in  every  ten  in  Tokyo  is  a 
factory  employee.  An  unusually  large  proportion 
of  Japan's  factory  workers  are  women,  and  of  these 
an  appalling  number  are  very  young.  In  one  in- 
dustrial suburb  reported  in  1919,  out  of  5,672  work- 
ers nearly  3,200  were  young  women  under  twenty 
years  of  age,  more  than  1,000  being  fourteen  or 
younger;  22,000  of  the  28,000  workers  in  the  Govern- 
ment Tobacco  Monopoly  are  women  and  girls.f 
Moreover,  factory  hours  and  factory  conditions  are 
physically  and  morally  destructive  of  the  worker. 
Day  and  night  shifts  with  twelve  to  fourteen  hours 
of  employment  have  been  general.  With  the  indus- 
trial expansion  have  come  slums  in  the  larger  cities, 
many  of  them  fully  equal  in  congestion,  lack  of 
sanitation,  and  vice-breeding  conditions,  to  those 
which  the  Western  world  has  had  to  attack  and 
eradicate.  A  factory  law,  enacted  in  191 1,  and  put 
in  operation  in  191 6,  hardly  touched  the  industrial 
problem,  for  its  main  provisions  permit  the  employ- 
ment of  boys  as  young  as  twelve  and  girls  as  young 
as  fifteen  for  twelve  hours  a  day,  with  exceptions 
granting  longer  hours  and  lower  age  limits  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  Government.  Apparently,  Japan's 
rulers  regard  industrial  expansion  as  more  important 
than  the  conservation  of  youth,  especially  as  the 
population  is  abundant  enough  to  permit  careless- 
ness in  treatment  of  the  workers  without  decreasing 
the  labor  supply  or  the  profits. 

*Christian  Movement  in  the  Japanese  Empire,  191 9,  p.  1 66.  In  1 8 83  there  were 
only  125  factories. 

■\Christian  Movement ,  19^9}  P«  170- 


Japan  29 

Economic  Conflict.  The  war  period  has  also  brought  prob- 
lems of  wealth  and  poverty.  Scores  of  narikin  or 
"mushroom  millionaires"  sprang  up  through  the 
exceptional  profits  of  manufacture  and  speculation. 
The  reckless  spending  of  money  in  extravagant  ways 
by  the  "newly  rich"  on  automobiles,  luxurious  din- 
ners, and  jewelry  has  been  marked.  In  Kobe  the 
attendance  at  houses  of  prostitution  increased  50 
per  cent,  between  1914  and  191 8.*  With  these  un- 
fortunate consequences  of  prosperity  came  another 
well  known  to  the  West — the  familiar  H.  C.  L.  In 
Tokyo  the  increase  has  been  greater  proportionately 
than  in  New  York.  This  has  pressed  heavily  on  the 
laboring  classes  who  have  not  the  same  power  to 
force  wage  adjustments  that  they  have  in  America 
and  the  prosperity  of  their  employers  has  aroused 
resentment.  At  one  time  the  suffering  became  so 
acute  that  "rice-riots"  broke  out  with  destruction  of 
warehouses  and  stores  in  protest.  The  factory 
classes  of  Japan  have  been  discovering  that  the  sense 
of  responsibility  of  employer  for  employee,  which  was 
the  protection  of  the  worker  in  feudal  times,  is  wiped 
out  in  modern  industry  and  that  employees  must 
protect  themselves.  Yet  the  Police  Code  denies  the 
right  of  workers  to  strike  and  courts  and  police  alike 
have  endeavored  to  suppress  such  strikes  as  have 
occurred.  The  immense  demand  for  labor  during 
the  war  boom  gave  the  workers  their  opportunity. 
By  the  formation  of  unions  and  the  many  success- 
ful strikes  the  workers  were  able,  during  the  war  boom, 
to  force  the  better  working  conditions  and  higher 
wages  which   they  desperately  needed.     Unfortun- 

*  Christian  Movement^  I9i9>  P«  'yi* 


30  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ately  they  learned  their  power  only  to  lose  it  in  the 
serious  industrial  depression  in  the  spring  of  1920, 
when  hundreds  of  thousands  were  thrown  out  of 
work  and  strikes  were  easily  broken.  The  conflict 
of  labor  and  capital  is  rapidly  developing  in  Japan. 

THE  STRUGGLE  FOR  DEMOCRACY 

"Demokurashi."  There  is,  however,  a  new  word  in 
Japan,  imported  bodily  from  English,  and  "blazoned 
upon  the  notice  boards  of  countless  public  meetings 
and  on  the  title  page  of  every  prominent  magazine."* 
It  is  "demokurashi."  Even  in  the  early  days  of 
Japan's  opening  to  the  West,  there  had  been  prophets 
and  seers  who  sought  to  establish  in  the  hearts  of 
the  people  the  democratic  ideal.  But  the  hold  of 
the  feudal  spirit  was  strong  and  the  admiration  of 
the  makers  of  new  Japan  for  Germany,  as  it  was 
under  Bismarck,  obscured  the  prophetic  vision.  At 
first  the  Emperor  appointed  cabinets  composed  en- 
tirely of  representatives  of  the  Elder  Statesmen  and 
their  clans,  but  after  a  time  cabinets  composed  in 
part  of  representatives  of  the  political  parties  were 
able  to  alternate  in  power  with  the  bureaucratic 
cabinets.  Democratic  policy  in  the  Philippines,  the 
fall  of  the  Manchu  Imperial  House  in  China  and  of 
imperialism  and  bureaucracy  in  Russia  all  had  their 
influence  on  Japan.  In  September,  191 8,  public 
opinion  became  strong  enough  to  oust  the  mildly 
autocratic  cabinet  of  General  Terauchi  and  to  give 
to  Japan  for  the  first  time  a  party  Cabinet  with  a 
commoner,  Kei  Hara,  as  premier.  In  large  part 
this  development  of  popular  sentiment  was  due  to 

*Missio7iary  Outlook  in  the  Light  of  the  War,  p.  105. 


Japan  31 

the  influence  of  democratic  ideals  among  the  AlHes 
during  the  war,  for,  though  at  first  the  war  was  re- 
garded as  one  of  conquest,  it  was  soon  discovered 
that  the  AlHes  were  fighting  for  a  great  ideal*  and 
the  appeals  to  democratic  aims  which  were  made  by  the 
leaders  of  the  Allies  and  notably  by  President  Wilson 
began  to  filter  into  and  stir  Japanese  public  opinion. 
The  Hara  cabinet  at  once  took  steps  in  the  interest 
of  democracy  by  their  own  democratic  behavior,  by 
relaxing  some  of  the  bureaucratic  checks  upon  free 
speech,  and  by  putting  through  the  Diet  in  March, 
1 91 9,  a  law  which  by  reducing  the  property  qualifica- 
tion for  voting  increased  the  number  of  voters  from 
about  1,460,000  to  about  2,860,000.  The  record  of 
the  Ministry  since  then  has  not  been  so  favorable  to 
democracy. 

The  Attack  on  One  of  the  most  marked  factors  in  the 
Militarism.  growth  of  democratic  feeling  has  been 

the  defeat  of  Germany  in  the  war  and  the  severe 
blow  which  this  has  given  to  the  faith  of  a  large  party 
in  Japan  in  a  Prussian  theory  of  government  and 
Prussian  methods.  The  reliance  of  this  group  has 
been  the  general  political  apathy  of  the  people  and 
especially  of  the  predominant  agricultural  class. 
The  cities,  however,  are  rapidly  becoming  great  cen- 
ters of  democratic  feeling,  in  which  the  labor  move- 
ment is  helping.  The  leaders  of  the  movement  for 
universal  suffrage  and  responsible  government  in- 
clude writers,  professors,  members  of  parliament. 
Two   of  these  are   Professor  S.  Yoshino,   the   Chris- 


*"We  understand  in  Japan  that  it  is  abuse  of  power  that  has  come  into  con- 
flict with  the  true  spirit  of  civilization  and  respect  for  the  rights  of  others." 
Quoted  in  Missionary  Outlook  in  the  Light  of  the  IFar,  45. 


21  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

tian  professor  of  political  science  in  the  Imperial 
University  at  Tokyo,  whose  writings  are  very  in- 
fluential among  the  student  class,  and  the  Hon.  Yukio 
Ozaki,  formerly  Minister  of  Justice,  who  has  cour- 
ageously published  a  book.  The  Voice  of  Japanese 
Democracy^  attacking  clan  and  militarist  govern- 
ment, and  who  gave  notice  in  the  Diet  that  he  would 
abandon  the  parties  which  so  easily  yielded  princi- 
ples for  the  sake  of  patronage  and  power  and  attack 
militarism  independently.  A  number  of  these  men 
have  formed  a  society  to  advocate  "universal  suf- 
frage, the  overthrow  of  bureaucratic  autocracy,  the 
abolition  of  class  distinctions,  the  revision  of  the 
revenue  system,  the  public  recognition  of  labor 
unions,  and  the  reform  of  colonial  administration." 

The  most  hopeful  element  is  the  student  class. 
Many  of  them  are  going  into  the  slums  to  live 
with  the  factory  classes  and  to  study  their  problems; 
others  are  holding  discussion  groups  with  Korean 
and  Chinese  students  (learning  Esperanto,  lest  the 
use  of  Japanese  should  seem  not  to  mean  a  basis  of 
equality)  and  gaining  a  world  vision  and  a  democrat- 
ic ideal,  which  the  conservatives  class  as  "dangerous 
thought"  and  urge  the  police  to  suppress.  Professor 
Yoshino  is  reported  to  have  made  the  following  esti- 
mate: 

If  the  question  was  put  to  the  students  as  to  whether 
or  not  we  should  withdraw  from  Siberia,  ninety  in  one 
hundred  would  stand  for  withdrawal.  If  the  question 
of  giving  Korea  independence  or  complete  autonomy 
was  submitted,  ninety  in  one  hundred  would  give  her 
independence  or  autonomy.  If  it  was  put  to  the  stu- 
dents, "Shall  we  withdraw  from  Shantung  and  give  it 


Japan  22 

back  to  China?"  ninety  in  one  hundred  would  say, 
"Yes."* 

Even  though  this  may  be  over-hopeful,  it  is  tremen- 
dously significant.  "The  battle  between  the  forces 
of  autocracy  and  democracy,  between  reaction  and 
progress  has  been  joined.  It  will  be  fierce  and  pro- 
longed. The  issue  will  be  determined  by  the  events 
of  the  next  few  years.  It  needs  no  argument  to 
prove  that  the  Christian  movement  in  Japan  and 
America  should  strain  every  resource  to  develop  the 
leaders  who  will  keep  the  democratic  movement  in 
Japan  from  degenerating  into  formalism  on  the  one 
hand,  or  into  mob  rule  on  the  other,  and  will  make  it 
take  shape  in  a  stable  structure  of  free  institutions."t 

Japan's  Effort  at  Many  Other  problems  and  burdens, 
Self-Discovery.  indeed,  Japan  has,  but  only  one  more 
can  be  noticed  here.  Japan  is  seeking  to  find  herself. 
Conscious  of  her  ancient  and  highly  developed  her- 
itage of  Eastern  civilization,  she  yet  feels  the  strength 
of  youth  and  pride  of  power  that  have  come  in  the 
rapid  assimilation  of  the  West.  The  latter  breaks 
out  often  in  bombastic  assertiveness  of  word  or 
action.  The  records  of  the  bravery  of  men  in  the 
Allied  Armies  were  upsetting  to  a  belief  that  there 
was  no  bravery  in  the  world  like  Japanese  bravery. 
On  the  other  hand,  a  sense  of  instability  gives  rise 
here  and  there  to  bitter  self-criticism  and  to  unex- 
pected turns  and  reactions  in  political  and  social  life. 
The  whole  land  is  bewildered  and  upset.  What 
"ount  Okuma  wrote  in  1909  still  holds  true:  "To 

*yapan  Review,  June,  1920,  p.  235. 

^Missionary  Outlook  in  the  Light  of  the  War^  p.  107. 


34  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

summarize  the  situation,  Japan  at  present  may  be 
likened  to  a  sea  into  which  a  hundred  currents  of 
Oriental  and  Occidental  thoughts — some  only  con- 
ceived, others  partially  or  wholly  executed,  during  the 
past  century  or  more, — have  poured  in  and,  not 
having  yet  effected  a  fusion,  are  raging  wildly,  toss- 
ing, warring,  and  roaring."* 

Yet  in  all  the  confusion  a  sense  of  mission  is  de- 
veloping.    Listen  again  to  the  venerable  ex-Premier: 

"The  country  has  already  won  a  position  that  entitles  it 
to  represent  the  civihzation  of  the  Orient,  and  now  the 
lot  falls  to  it  to  introduce  the  civilization  of  the  Occident 
to  the  Orient.  This  may  truly  be  regarded  as  Japan's 
heaven-ordained  office,  and  the  Japanese  should  grow 
in  the  belief  that  on  them  alone  devolves  the  mission 
of  harmonizing  the  civilization  of  the  East  and  the  West 
so  as  to  lead  the  world  as  a  whole  to  a  higher  plane. 
Should  our  people,  fully  appreciating  this,  their  heaven- 
ordained  office,  resolve  to  accomplish  the  mission,  the 
effect  will  be  far  if  not  world-reaching.  The  spirit  of  in- 
ternational jealousy  will  gradually  disappear;  petty 
questions  of  race  will  no  longer  find  room  to  exist;  the 
evils  of  anti-alienism,  which  live  on  misguided  tradi- 
tions or  sentiments  will  vanish;  international  relations 
hitherto  heterogeneous  and  militant  will  become  har- 
monious and  peaceful;  and  then  .  .  it  may  cease  to 
be  a  mere  dream  to  look  for  the  day  when  the  nations 
of  the  world  will  federate  under  one  code  of  interna- 
tional law  and  form  one  organic  system,  creating  a  new 
era  of  fellowship  and  goodwill  wherein  distinctions 
of  native  and  alien,  near  and  remote  will  disappear, 
and  all  will  be  linked  together  by  one  uniform  bond  of 
harmonious  cooperation  and  coalition  to  the  glory  of  real 
civilization.  I  do  not  believe  there  is  another  nation  on 
the  face  of  the  earth  better  fitted  than  the  Japanese  to 


*Okutna,  S.,  Fifty  Years  of  New  f  apart ^  II,  p.  568. 


Japan  35 

achieve  this  grand  mission,  for  we  are  a  nation  which 
represents  the  civilization  of  the  Orient  and  has  assimi- 
ilated  the  civilization  of  the  Occident."* 

By  what  magic  will  confused  Japan,  not  yet  having 
united  the  civilizations  of  East  and  West,  but  only 
annexed  the  one  to  the  other,  accomplish  such  a 
mission  ? 

japan's  solutions  for  japan's  problems 

Japan's  Solutions  The  answer  of  the  Japanese  Govern- 
for  Japan's  Prob-  ment  to  this  question  and  to  the  other 
lems.  social  and  political  issues  already  re- 

ferred to,  is  at  some  points  clear.  Adroit  diplomacy, 
an  increasingly  strong  army  and  navy,  great  exten- 
sion of  trade  and  manufacture  and  thus  of  wealth 
through  exploitation  of  an  over-abundant  popula- 
tion, coupled  with  control  over  China's  iron  and  coal, 
are  expected  to  provide  the  material  basis  for  the 
mastery  of  the  Far  East  and  its  protection  against  the 
aggressions  of  the  West.  The  gradual  substitution 
of  civil  for  military  administration  in  colonial  affairs 
will  take  place  where  abuse  of  subject  peoples  be- 
comes sufficiently  notorious.  Slowly  the  franchise 
will  be  extended,  if  and  as  popular  sentiment  really 
makes  it  dangerous  for  the  government  to  ignore  it. 
Furthermore,  the  prime  importance  of  higher  educa- 
tion is  clearly  understood  and  in  191 9  the  govern- 
ment not  only  modified  its  regulations  to  give  greater 
freedom  for  the  development  of  private  high  schools 
and  colleges,  but  followed  the  Emperor's  gift  of 
$5,000,000  by  launching  a  program  involving  the 
expenditure  of  $22,000,000  more  in  five  years  for  es- 
tablishing and  enlarging  high  schools  and  colleges. 

•Okuma,  Fifty  Years  of  New  Japatty  II,  pp.  574,  575. 


26  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Finally,  the  government  sees  clearly  the  need  for 
morality  and  religious  loyalty  to  national  interests. 
But  it  has  its  own  ways  of  developing  those  essentials, 
of  which  the  chief  has  been  the  gradual  instillation  in- 
to the  convictions  of  a  strongly  patriotic  people  of 
the  belief  that  their  Emperor  is  descended  in  unbrok- 
en line  from  the  Goddess  of  the  Sun  and  that  the 
highest  morality  and  the  highest  religion  consist  in 
bowing  before  his  portrait  and  obeying  his  gov- 
ernment.* The  Shinto  cult  which  has  been  histori- 
cally associated  with  ancestor  worship  is  gradually 
being  shorn  by  the  Government  of  its  grosser  nature 
worship  and  its  alliancewith  Buddhism,  to  become  the 
official  vehicle  of  the  state  religious  ceremonies.  The 
Government  no  longer  classes  it  in  the  Department 
of  Religions  along  with  Buddhism  and  Christianity, 
and  thus  asserts  that  Emperor-worship  and  Chris- 
tianity are  not  incompatible  and  claims  that  believers 
in  the  latter  should  comply  with  the  observances  of 
the  former.  It  is  this  exaggerated  patriotism,  the 
belief  in  the  divineness  of  Japan  and  all  things 
Japanese,  that  is  the  real  religion  of  Japan. 

Limitations  -^^^  ^^^  much  Can   these  measures 

to  Japan's  accomplish  for  the  solution  of  Japan's 

Solutions.  problems?     The   more   adroit   diplo- 

macy becomes,  the  greater  menace  it  is  to  peace  and 
prosperity.  The  expansion  of  force  and  of  material 
wealth  for  purposes  of  aggrandisement  and  power 
will  ultimately  bring  aggression,  war,  disaster, — vide 
Germany.  Civil  administration  will  never  in  the 
long  run  atone  for  manifest  injustice  of  possession. 

*The  school  text-books  and  the  press  are  reported  constantly  to  reiterate  the 
fiction  that  Japan  has  never  known  violence  and  rebellion  against  the  Emperor. 
See  R.  M.  Weaver,  "Emperor  Worship"  in  Jsia^  June,  1920. 


Japan  37 

The  extension  of  the  franchise,  tremendously  impor- 
tant as  that  will  be  for  the  peace  of  the  Orient,  will 
bring  confusing  and  perturbing  results  from  the  poli- 
tical inexperience  of  the  people.  Indeed,  before  gen- 
uine government  by  the  people  is  added  to  govern- 
ment of  and  for  them,  the  issue  of  the  autocratic 
character  of  their  constitution  and  of  the  uncon- 
stitutional bodies  which  wield  its  autocratic  power 
must  be  settled  on  the  side  of  democracy.  Again, 
national  education,  however  extended,  is  likely  to 
continue  to  be  markedly  materialistic.  Science, 
pure  and  applied,  has  been  the  major  interest  in  the 
past  and  a  strong  demand  for  commercial  courses  is 
now  being  made.  The  student  class  has  shown  its 
dissatisfaction  with  materialism  by  the  frequent 
suicides  of  those  who  found  in  the  philosophy  and  life 
of  their  instructors  no  lasting  hope  or  joy.  More- 
over, in  all  the  projected  expansion  not  a  sen  is  des- 
ignated for  the  higher  education  of  women.  What 
will  the  Japanese  nation  of  the  future  be  unless  in 
the  homes  of  Japan  the  women  are  the  intellectual 
companions  of  their  husbands,  and  not  simply  polite 
keepers  of  the  household?*  Finally,  the  growth  of 
democracy,  of  critical  science,  and  increasing  inter- 
course with  the  West,  will  go  hard  with  the  fictions 
that  are  attached  to  Emperor-worship,  nor  can  the 
ethical  injunctions  of  a  bureaucracy,  even  when 
attached  to  an  active  patriotism  and  a  sense  of  world 
mission,  be  a  vital  force  in  the  life  of  a  growing  nation. 

Nor  are  there  other  elements  in  Japanese  life — 
save  one — that  can  offer  what  is  needed.     Popular 

*"There  are  well-nigh  twice  as  many  licensed  prostitutes,  geisha  girls,  and 
restaurant  girls  as  there  are  girls  in  high  schools."  Miss  A.  C.  MacDonald, 
Christian  Movement y  191 9,  p.  220, 


38  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

approval  of  the  famous  code  of  patriotic  ethics, 
Bushido,  has  distinctly  waned  with  the  discovery  that 
self-sacrifice  even  to  death  for  one's  country  is  far 
from  being  a  monoply  of  the  Japanese  people.  More- 
over, Bushido  and  the  ethics  taught  in  the  schools  are 
deficient  in  that  almost  the  only  principle  inculcated 
is  loyalty  to  the  Emperor,  with  such  matters  as 
honesty,  purity,  the  spirit  of  service,  far  in  the  back- 
ground. Buddhism,  stirred  by  the  competition  of 
Christianity,  has  started  Buddhist  Sunday  Schools 
and  Young  Men's  Buddhist  Associations,  boldly 
taking  over  Christian  ideas  and  institutions  and  sub- 
stituting Buddha  for  Christ,  as  in  the  hymn,  "Buddha 
loves  me,  this  I  know."  There  can  be  no  better 
evidence  that  Christianity  has  what  the  modern 
world  needs,  and  that  the  other  religions  have  not, 
than  the  widespread  borrowing  of  Christian  ideas  and 
methods  now  going  on.  The  continuance  of  the 
process  will  be  to  de-Buddhize  Buddhism,  even 
though  the  ancient  name  and  associations  be  re- 
tained. "Yet,  when  the  Government,  in  its  attempt 
to  revive  Shinto,  cleared  out  all  Buddhist  belongings 
from  the  Shinto  temples  and  beautiful  Buddhist 
images  were  split  into  kindling  wood  or  sold  for  a 
trifle  to  fortunate  collectors,  no  one  was  greatly  dis- 
turbed."* Moreover,  how  deeply  instrumental  in 
helping  Japan  find  herself  can  a  religion  be  whose 
fundamental  tenet  is  renunciation  and  avoidance  of 
the  real  world  of  pain  and  misery,  even  when  it 
superficially  adds  to  itself  elements  from  a  religion 
which  contrariwise  boldly  faces  that  real  world  of 
pain  and  seeks  to  transform  it  by  overcoming  it  with 

*W.  B.  HxWy  Missionary  Review  of  the  Worlds  May,  1920,  p.  415. 


Japan  39 

love.  The  old  ski-i  of  Buddhism  will  never  hold  the 
new  wine  of  Christianity.  In  the  hour  of  Japan's  need 
it  will  break. 

WHAT  JAPAN"   NEEDS 

What  Japan  Needs.  The  answer  to  Japan's  need,  the  solu- 
tion of  her  problems,  the  lifter  of  burdens  from  her 
people  is  Jesus  Christ  and  He  alone.  Only  the  mar- 
velous spirit  of  human  brotherhood  and  fellow  serv- 
ice which  He  imparts  can  carry  her  safely  through 
the  conflict  of  nations  of  which  she  is  the  centre. 
His  gentleness  and  tact  alone  can  make  her  not  sim- 
ply tolerated,  but  even  approved  by  whatever  peo- 
ples it  may  be  her  portion  to  protect  and  guide.  The 
exploitation  of  labor,  the  perils  and  excesses  of  the 
industrial  conflict  await,  as  in  other  lands,  that  good- 
will between  employer  and  employee,  that  sense  of 
trusteeship  for  wealth  and  skill  which  His  Spirit 
promotes.  The  tides  of  race  prejudice  which  are 
set  against  her  and  which  flow  out  from  her  will  re- 
cede only  through  the  influence  of  Him  in  whom  there 
is  neither  Jew  nor  Gentile,  Greek  nor  barbarian,  but 
all  are  one.  In  no  teaching  but  that  of  Jesus  is  found 
that  recognition  of  the  dignity  and  honor  of  woman- 
hood that  is  the  first  step  toward  eradicating  the  foul 
sores  of  public  and  private  immorality  which  plague 
Japan  and  setting  up  the  Christian  home  which  is  her 
basic  necessity.  That  sense  of  personal  responsibili- 
ty for  public  welfare,  that  loyalty  to  the  principles  of 
the  common  weal  which  mark  the  true  Christian  citi- 
zen, Japan  must  have  for  the  steady  development  of 
her  political  life. 

And  finally  it  must  be  Christ  Himself  that  she 
has  and  not  simply  sections  of  His  teachings  attached 


40  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

to  her  ancient  traditions  or  her  office-made  code  of 
ethics.  No  standard  thus  produced  will  rise  to  the 
level  of  His  standard  nor  can  any  standard  be  of 
avail  without  that  moral  dynamic,  that  power  to  at- 
tain ideals  which  only  His  presence  in  the  hearts 
of  those  who  trust  Him  can  produce.  In  Him  Japan 
will  find  herself.  In  Him  she  will  become  a  thou- 
sandfold more  remarkable  a  nation  than  in  her  wild- 
est moments  of  exaltation  she  ever  dreamed  that  she 
could.  The  potentialities  of  a  Christ-following  Jap- 
an are  glorious  to  meditate  upon. 

foundations  of  CHRISTIANITY 

The  Christian  How  shall  these  things  be?  Already 
Foundation.  the  foundations  are  being  laid.     First 

brought  to  the  shores  of  Japan  in  the  Roman  Catholic 
form  in  1549  by  Francis  Xavier,  Christianity  spread 
until  intense  anti-foreign  feeling  resulted  in  the  vio- 
lent extermination  of  all  known  Christians.  Yet  so 
deep  was  the  hold  of  Christianity  upon  its  adherents 
and  so  finely  loyal  had  they  been  that  two  hundred 
and  fifty  years  after  it  had  been  proscribed  on  pain 
of  death  French  priests  found  as  many  as  eight  thou- 
sand who  still  counted  themselves  Christians.  Now 
for  more  than  fifty  years  Japan  has  been  open  to  mis- 
sionary work.  Forty-one  American  or  European 
missionary  societies  are  engaged  in  the  task.*  There 
are  11 50  organized  Protestant  churches  and  542 
Roman  Catholic  and  Russian  Orthodox  churches  en- 
rolHng  117,000  members  in  the  former  and  112,000 
in  the  latter  two.f     The    Sunday    School   scholars 

*In  two  instances  five  of  these  societies  (the  Anglican  and  the  Presbyterian- 
Reformed  groups)  and  in  one  case  three  (the  Methodist  group)  work  for  the 
benefit  of  a  single  Japanese  denomination. 

tThe  statistics  in  this  pai-agraph  are  from  Christian  Movement,  1919. 


The 


rise    of    new 

strange    problems    of   life 


IN   CHINAS   COTTON   ^IlLl.S 
ndustries    is    bringing    long    hours,     hard 


to    China's    women    and 


labor, 
childen. 


ind 


Japan  4I 

number  over  150,000.  In  addition  there  are  in  mis- 
sionary and  other  distinctively  Christian  week-day 
schools  under  Protestant  auspices'  approximately 
42,000  pupils  and  nearly  one-fourth  as  many  more 
under  Catholic  direction.  More  than  17,000  pupils 
in  the  Protestant  group  are  in  schools  above  elemen- 
tary grade. 

The  Protestant  Christian  community*  is  being 
served  and  extended  by  over  1,100  missionaries 
and  4,200  Japanese  salaried  vi^orkers.  Of  these 
309  missionaries  and  1,040  Japanese  are  ordained 
ministers.  Considering  the  comparatively  brief 
time,  the  sudden  chilling  of  the  Christian  movement 
in  the  "higher  criticism"  controversy  of  the  last  gen- 
eration, and  th2  anti-foreign  reactions  which  sweep 
over  Japan  from  time  to  time,  the  results :- re  excellent. 
It  should  be  noted  that  an  unusual  proportion  of  the 
Japanese  Christians  come  from  the  educated  classes, 
due  to  their  earlier  and  more  enlightened  contact 
with  the  West.  University  professors,  college  presi- 
dents, army  officers,  prominent  business  men  and 
manufacturers,  members  of  the  Imperial  Diet  (at 
one  time  as  many  as  fourteen)  are  to  be  found  in  the 
ranks.  In  one  of  the  Tokyo  churches  the  office- 
holders included  "the  Vice-Mayor  of  the  city,  a 
professor  in  the  Imperial  University,  an  editor  of  one 
of  the  principal  daily  newspapers,  the  head  of  the 
Government  Bureau  of  Agriculture,  a  general  in  the 
army,  a  prominent  broker  and  banker,  and  a  judge 
of  the  Court  of  Appeals."! 

•Figures  for  Roman  Catholic  and  Russian  Orthodox  workers  are  not  recent 
enough  to  include. 

tA.  J.  Brown,  The  Mastery  of  the  Far  East,  p.  635. 


42  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

The  Unknown  ^^^  more  remarkable  than  the  growth 
Christian  Move-  of  the  church  IS  the  Way  in  which 
ment.  Christianity  has  spread  outside  of  the 

church.  "There  are  scores  of  thousands  in  Japan 
who  understand  and  are  guided  by  the  spirit  of  Jesus 
in  their  daily  life,  but  who  for  various  reasons  are  not 
connected  with  any  church.  Some  leaders  in  this 
country  state  that  the  number  of  real  Christians  out- 
side of  church  membership  in  Japan  today  equals  if 
not  exceeds  the  number  of  church  communicants."* 
A  young  Japanese  student,  Kawano  Chofu,  whose 
writings  have  influenced  for  Christian  idealism  tens 
of  thousands,  wrote  that  a  five-sen  Testament  had 
been  his  guide,  but  that  he  had  never  been  inside  a 
church.f  Furthermore,  writer  after  writer  recog- 
nizes the  influence  of  Christianity  in  nearly  every 
aspect  of  Japanese  life.  It  has  been  the  Christians 
who  have  made  the  pioneer  attacks  upon  licensed 
vice,  on  intemperance,  and  the  liquor  traffic,  who 
have  led  the  way  in  establishing  orphanages  and  other 
benevolent  institutions  and  in  visiting  prisons.  They 
have  been  alert  to  the  conditions  in  Korea  and  one 
of  the  most  fearless  and  straightforward  reports  made 
to  the  Japanese  public  was  made  by  the  representa- 
tive whom  the  Japanese  Christians  sent  to  investi- 
gate conditions.f  Their  relation  to  the  spreading  of 
democratic  ideas  has  already  been  indicated.  Again 
some  of  the  most  widely  read  novels  in  Japan  to-day 
have  Christian  ^hemes  or  Christian  characters,  some 
being  translations,  but  others  notabie  products  of 

*T.  Kagawa  and  J,  Merle  Davis,  m  Christian  Movement,  1919,  p.  2ii. 

•fChristian  Monementy  1919,  p.  214- 

^Japanese  Chnstians  gave  J2100  for  the  rebuilding  of  destroyed  churches. 


Japan  43 

Japanese  pens.  One  literary  group,  seeking  to  live 
the  ideal  life  in  a  village  of  their  own,  have  adopted 
the  Lord's  Prayer  as  their  motto.  All  these  are 
signs  of  great  hope  and  are  further  reinforced  by  the 
numerous  widespread  evangelistic  campaigns  by  the 
Japanese  churches  which  have  reached  thousands  of 
hearers  and  helped  to  draw  the  churches  closer  to- 
gether. 

Were  the  organized  forces  of  Christianity  in  Japan 
less  divided  on  more  unessential  matters,  a  united 
Japanese  Christian  Church  might  draw  unto  itself 
hundreds  of  thousands  of  those  whose  hearts  have 
been  stirred,  who  would  bring  into  it  new  strength  and 
power.  As  it  is,  twenty-one  denominations  are  being 
established  in  Tokyo,  and  the  provinces  have  all 
these  and  six  more.  There  is  also  little  tendency 
toward  any  closer  union  or  more  energetic  common 
action  than  in  that  provided  by  a  Federation  of 
Japanese  Churches,  neither  inclusive  nor  strong. 
This  is  the  more  to  be  regretted  because,  though 
Christianity  has  gained  so  remarkable  a  standing, 
the  extent  to  which  the  people  have  really  heard  the 
Gospel  in  such  a  way  as  to  understand  it  is  very 
slight.  If  the  United  States  had  only  as  few  church 
members  proportionately  as  Japan,  it  would  be  as  if 
the  only  Christians  in  the  United  States  were  one- 
third  of  the  Congregationalists  and  all  the  rest  were 
Shintoists,  Buddhists,  agnostics,  or  "indifferentists." 

THE  OPPORTUNITY  OF  AMERICAN    CHRISTIANITY 

America's  What,  then,  is  required  of  the  Chris- 

Opportunity,  tian   forces   of  America   that  Japan 

may  become  the  great  Christian  power  she  should? 


44  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

First  of  all,  the  strengthening  of  all  the  Christian 
forces  of  Japan  by  many  additional  missionaries  of 
unusual  culture,  skill,  and  "spiritual-mindedness." 
Second,  the  keying  up  ofallmissionary  institutions  to 
more  effective  work,  the  combination  of  institutions 
to  gain  strength,*  the  enlargement  of  the  splen- 
did Christian  college  for  women,  and  the  establish- 
ment of  a  Christian  University.  Third,  the  wide- 
spread extension  of  newspaper  evangelism,  already 
proving  a  vital  factor  in  promoting  general  knowledge 
of  Christianity  by  opening  the  way  for  the  mission- 
ary and  Japanese  preachers,  and  even  in  establishing 
Christian  groups  of  believers  almost  without  meeting 
with  Christian  workers.  These  require  increased 
funds  and  personnel. 

The  remaining  measures  of  Christian  service  are 
harder  and  no  less  important.  Every  contact  of 
Japan  with  the  Western  world  and  particularly  with 
America  must  find  America  and  the  West  always 
Christian  in  every  relationship  with  Japan  and  the 
Japanese.  This  applies  to  the  treatment  of  Japanese 
in  America  and  to  the  behavior  of  Americans  in 
Japan.  Then,  in  the  international  relationships 
which  are  carried  on  between  the  Governments  of 
Japan  and  the  United  States  the  latter  must  be  firm 
to  protest  against  actions  of  Japan  that  are  not 
compatible  with  Christian  internationalism,  yet 
quick  to  appreciate  cooperation  in  movements  for 
the  common  weal  of  the  world.  Furthermore, 
America  must  be  swift  to  disapprove  and  check  Amer- 
ican political  and  commercial  action  whenever  that 

*In  this  land  where  distances  are  not  great  and  railroad  transportation  easy 
there  are  eighteen  or  more  theological  schools,  each  with  only  a  few  students. 


Korea  45 

shows  any  un-Christian  tendency.  She  must  also 
be  ready  to  assist  in  every  effort  on  the  part  of  the 
nations  of  the  world  to  take  similar  action  anywhere 
in  the  world.  Finally,  the  Christian  Churches  must 
so  apply  the  simplicity  of  Christian  love  to  the  bar- 
riers between  them  that  they  may  by  example  and 
by  direct  influence  make  out  of  the  multiplicity  of 
denominations  in  Japan  a  single  glorious  Church. 

III.     KOREA 

In  centuries  long  past,  the  Land  of  the  Morn- 
ing Calm  was  the  bridge  over  which  the  ancient  civil- 
ization of  China  crossed  to  the  isolated  islanders  of 
Nippon.  Now  the  direction  has  been  reversed. 
Japan,  absorbing  the  civilization  of  the  West,  is 
moving  back  across  Korea  to  Manchuria  and  China's 
northern  door.  By  the  earlier  movement  Korean 
art,  education,  philosophy,  and  literature  greatly 
profited.  What  permanent  profit  she  will  gain  from 
the  present  movement  only  the  future  can  show. 
Her  ancient  relation  to  China,  politically  speaking, 
was  loose  and  nominal,  her  government  practically 
free.  But,  since  1910,  not  only  has  a  Japanese 
Governor-General  been  sitting  in  the  seat  of  power  at 
Seoul,  but  he  has  been  instructed  to  "unite"  Korea  to 
Japan  "as  equally  integral  parts  of  the  Empire." 
Government  reports  even  refer  to  Japan  as  "the 
mother  country"! 

Inclined  generally  to  take  things  peacefully,  the 
Koreans,  despite  their  ancient  dislike  of  Japan,  might 
have  become  reconciled  to  the  fate  their  military 
weakness  induced  and  gradually  become  an  active 
and  not  subordinate  part  of  a  new  nation  of  both 


46  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Japanese  and  Korean  elements.  Unfortunately  for 
both  Japan  and  Korea,  the  administration  of  Korea 
was  put  under  Japanese  military  authority  with  its 
Prussian  ideas  both  of  the  making  of  war  and  of  the 
keeping  of  peace.  Korean  resentment  and  the  out- 
break of  an  amazing  revolution  have  followed. 

Material  Pros-  The  Japanese  processes  of  amalgama- 
perity.  tion,  however  well  intentioned,  seem 

not  to  have  reckoned  upon  the  need  ofhaving  the  es- 
teem and  confidence  of  the  Koreans.  Koreans  as 
well  as  foreigners  recognize  a  genuine  increase  in 
Korea's  material  welfare  under  Japan's  direction. 
In  1917,  the  area  under  cultivation  had  increased 
fifty  per  cent,  over  that  of  1910.  Crop  reports  show 
m  the  seven  years  I9ii-i9i7an  increase  in  the  pro- 
duction of  rice  of  21  per  cent.,  wheat  and  barley 
30  per  cent.,  cotton  200  per  cent.,  silk  cocoons  300 
per  cent.,  sweet  potatoes  1300  per  cent.  Depositors 
in  postal  savings  banks  increased  in  number  from 
223,000  to  1,253,000.  Railroad  passenger  traffic 
increased  150  per  cent.,  telegraph  messages  75  per 
cent.  Millions  on  millions  of  trees  have  been  planted 
to  reforest  the  bare  mountains.  Land  surveys  are 
being  completed,  agricultural  experiment  stations 
opened.  In  191 7,  a  system  containing  1400  miles  of 
first-  and  second-class  roadways  was  completed  at  a 
cost  of  $5,000,000. 

Korean  Dis-  But,  excellent  as  this  is,  to  the  Korean 

satisfaction.  certain  other  aspects  are  more  promi- 

nent. His  national  pride,  far  stronger  than  the 
world  suspected,  resented  the  summary  treatment 
Korean  history  received  in  Government  controlled 


Korea  47 

schools,  the  excessive  emphasis  on  the  study  of  the 
Japanese  language,  the  enforced  observance  of  Jap- 
anese holidays  and  Emperor  worship.  Discrimina- 
tion against  him  in  wages  and  salaries,  in  educational 
opportunities,  in  treatment  in  the  courts  added  to 
this  feeling.  Customary  privileges  in  the  Crown 
lands  were  put  into  Japanese  hands  or  reduced.  The 
freedom  of  the  press  was  severely  curtailed.  Licens- 
ed prostitution  has  been  openly  introduced  into  the 
larger  towns,  expanding  this  evil  and  offending 
Korean  self-respect.  Often  the  method  has  caused 
more  ill-feeling  than  the  object  sought.  The  liberal 
use  of  spies,  rigid  insistence  on  petty  regulations, 
harshness  and  brutality  on  the  part  of  gendarmes, 
the  officious  wearing  of  swords  by  school  teachers, 
all  represented  to  the  Korean  mind  threats  and  ter- 
rorizing rather  than  genuine  cooperation. 

THE  REVOLUTION  AND  ITS  RESULTS 

A  Revolution  While  all  this  was  simmering  under  a 
without  Arms.  comparatively  peaceful  surface  the 
Great  War  flung  into  the  foreground  the  rights  of 
small  nations  and  hostility  to  militarism  as  its  major 
issues.  To  the  Koreans  their  day  had  come.  The 
civilized  world,  settling  its  affairs  at  the  Peace  Con- 
ference, should  hear  their  case.  Yet  the  usual  ac- 
companiments of  revolution,  the  secret  gathering  of 
arms,  plotting  with  the  oppressor's  enemies,  the  vio- 
lent attack  upon  his  agents  and  their  forcible  expul- 
sion were  not  the  methods  of  this  remarkable  people. 
Their  appeal  was  to  be  to  moral  force,  their  revolu- 
tion to  be  without  bloodshed.  On  March  i,  191 9, 
two  days  before  the  State  funeral  of  the  Emperor, 
the   representative   of   their   ancient   independence. 


48  .  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

thirty-three  Koreans,  seated  In  the  Tai-Wha-Kwan, 
where  their  independence  had  been  signed  away,  read 
to  a  representative  of  the  Japanese  high  officials, 
whom  they  had  invited,  their  Declaration  of  Inde- 
pendence, a  noble  and  restrained  document.  They 
then  notified  the  police  where  they  were  and  awaited 
their  prompt  arrest.  Meanwhile,  in  Pagoda  Park  a 
great  crowd  heard  with  astonishment  the  reading  of 
the  Declaration.  "Mansei!  Mansel!  Independent 
Korea  forever!"  cried  the  young  reader  as  he  finished. 
The  surging  mass  took  up  the  shout.  Swiftly  the 
news  spread  over  the  city.  In  delirious  joy  the  peo- 
ple turned  to  the  Palace  where  the  Emperor  lay  in 
state,  to  the  foreign  legations,  to  the  Government 
offices,  shouting  again  "Mansei!  Mansei!  Tok-rip 
mansei!** 

In  many  other  important  centers  similar  dem- 
onstrations took  place.  At  first  dumbfounded,  the 
poHce  soon  began  to  suppress  the  demonstrations  by 
force.  Crowds  were  fired  upon,  sabred;  men,  women, 
and  children  were  imprisoned,  beaten,  tortured. 
Churches  and  houses  were  burned,  some  with  sup- 
posed ring-leaders  locked  in  them.  The  official 
Japanese  records  up  to  October  31,  191 9,  showed 
631  Koreans  killed,  nearly  29,000  arrested,  10,500 
flogged  by  police  or  court  order;  41  churches  totally 
or  partially  destroyed.  Yet  the  determination  of 
the  Koreans  not  to  be  betrayed  into  violence  was 
such  that  only  9  Japanese  were  killed  and  fewer  than 
200  injured.  Slowly  the  news  filtered  out  to  the 
outside  world,  still  more  slowly  to  Japan  itself. 
The  censorship  was  working.  In  July  a  committee 
of  Japanese  Christians  who  had  been  investigating  in 


Korea  49 

Korea  published  a  stirring  report.  Representations 
to  the  Japanese  Government  through  Japanese  diplo- 
matic channels  were  made  by  the  Commission  on 
Oriental  Relations  of  the  Federal  Council  of  the 
Churches  of  Christ  in  America.  The  Commission's 
printed  digest  of  evidence  was  discussed  in  the  United 
States  Senate.  Japanese  pubhc  opinion  and  many- 
Government  authorities  expressed  their  horror. 

The  New  Regime.  The  result  of  the  agitation  was  a 
fairly  prompt  change  in  Japanese  policy.  Governor- 
General  Hasegawa  was  recalled,  the  administration 
made  responsible  to  the  Diet,  instead  of  only  to  the 
Throne,  and  Baron  Saito,  a  retired  admiral,  "genial, 
democratic,  and  sincere"  was  appointed  with  in- 
structions to  make  suitable  reforms.  Many  of  these 
have  been  initiated.  Military  uniforms  and  swords 
for  civil  officials  have  been  abolished.  New  chiefs 
of  police  have  been  appointed  from  civil  life,  many  of 
the  old  gendarmes  discharged  and  the  force  put  upon 
a  civil  instead  of  a  military  basis.  Several  Japanese 
Christians  have  been  added  to  the  administrative 
staff.  Flogging  has  been  officially  abolished,  though 
instances  have  continued  to  occur.  The  use  of  tor- 
ture has  been  condemned.  Many  changes  have  been 
made  in  irritating  minor  regulations.  Recognition 
is  no  longer  withheld  from  schools  which  teach  reli- 
gion. Restrictions  on  the  press  have  been  relaxed, 
several  independent  Korean  papers  being  licensed 
where  none  existed  before.  The  administration  has 
spent  several  thousand  yen  in  rebuilding  churches. 
For  the  same  purpose  Japanese  Christians  sent  a  gift 
of  |2,ioo.  More  freedom  has  been  given  to  Koreans 
to  share,  by  forming  commercial  and  industrial  or- 


50  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ganizations,  in  the  growing  wealth  of  the  country. 
Measures  even  more  important  looking  to  local  self- 
government  and  consultation  on  reforms,  are  in  pro- 
cess. Nevertheless,  many  abuses  still  continue. 
The  Koreans,  after  their  past  experience,  find  it  hard 
to  believe  in  the  sincerity  of  the  reforms  and,  of 
course,  still  hold  to  their  right  to  independence.  A 
Provisional  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Korea  has 
its  headquarters  in  Shanghai  with  cooperating  com- 
mittees in  the  United  States.  What  the  future  holds 
no  one  can  tell. 

Christianity's  foundation  in  korea 

The  Christian  M^-  Hugh  Cynn  has  characterized 
Church  and  the  the  Independence  Movement  as  "the 
Rebirth  of  Korea,  rebirth  of  Korea."  The  part  which 
the  Christian  Church  played  in  this  rebirth  has  been 
significant.  The  police  were  quick  to  suspect  mis- 
sionaries and  church  organizations  of  having  foment- 
ed the  revolution.  To  be  sure,  fifteen  of  the  signers 
of  the  Declaration  of  Independence  were  Christians. 
Multitudes  of  Christians  took  part  in  the  demon- 
strations. The  Presbyterian  Church  in  Korea  in 
October,  191 9,  reported  that  of  its  65,000  mem- 
bers, 3,804  had  been  arrested,  41  killed,  and 
1,642  were  still  in  prison.  In  Pyeng  Yang  all  the 
Methodist  pastors  in  the  city  were  put  in  jail.  But 
the  missionaries  were  entirely  unaware  of  the  ap- 
proach of  the  movement  and  no  evidence  that  the 
churches  as  such  were  responsible  for  it  has  been 
found.  Students  in  Government  schools,  leaders  in  , 
the  native  Chun-do  Sect,  and  Buddhists  had  as  much 
share  in  it  as  the  Christians.  Yet  Christianity  in 
the  hearts  of  Korean  leaders  and  Korean  patriots  has 


Korea  51 

been,  as  it  inevitably  is,  a  force  for  the  installation 
of  democratic  ideas.  Still  more  it  has  had  much  to 
do  with  the  nature  of  the  Independence  Movement. 
The  marvelous  forbearance  of  the  Koreans  under 
maltreatment  beyond  words  is  not  the  cowering  of  an 
affrighted  people.  This  passage  from  the  Declara- 
tion of  Independence  is  characteristic  of  their  atti- 
tude: 

"In  tune  with  the  dictate  of  a  clear  conscience  our 
duty  is  to  break  up  the  fallow  ground  of  our  new  des- 
tiny, and,  not  for  a  moment,  through  long  smothered 
resentment  or  passing  anger,  spitefully  attack.'* 

A  word  of  caution  from  the  leaders  directed  people 
"not  to  insult  the  Japanese,  or  strike  them  with  their 
fists,  for  these  are  the  acts  of  barbarians."  A  Korean 
peasant  woman  said  to  a  tyrannical  Japanese  official, 
"I  am  sorry  for  you  Japanese.  You  do  not  know  how 
you  must  suffer  before  you  come  to  that  place  of  wide 
and  glad  prosperity."*  An  observer  in  Seoul  de- 
clared, "The  Koreans  are  so  brave  that  the  Japanese 
do  not  understand  it.  The  Koreans,  I  believe,  are 
the  only  people  on  earth  who  are  really  *meek*  in 
the  Scriptural  sense.  The  Japanese  think  their 
meekness  is  cowardice,  whereas  it  is  moral  strength."* 

Such  behaviour  as  this  is  the  fruit  of  the  Spirit. 
The  Korean  Church  has  been  living  very  close  to  the 
New  Testament,  has  learned  the  meaning  of  **the 
other  cheek"  and  "the  second  mile."  Korean  Chris- 
tian leaders  impressed  this  upon  the  independence 
movement.  "Who  is  the  leader  of  this  insurrec- 
tion?" some  arrested  Koreans  were  asked.     "God 


*Cited  by  Mrs.  Robertson  Scott,  AsiUy  August,  1920,  p.  693 


52  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Almighty,"  was  their  answer.  "But  who  are  His 
accomplices?"     "Twenty  million  Koreans!" 

Christianity  in  This  IS  far  from  saying  that  Korea  is  a 
Korea.  Christian    nation    under    oppression. 

The  labors  of  the  missionaries,  now  about  four  hun- 
dred, have  borne  remarkable  fruit.  At  least  one  out 
of  every  seventy-five  Koreans  is  a  Protestant  Chris- 
tian, a  higher  proportion  than  any  of  the  larger  dis- 
tinctively non-Christian  mission  fields  can  show. 
Furthermore,  every  phase  of  mission  work,  now  that 
public  agitation  has  diminished,  is  greatly  stimulated 
by  a  new  sense  of  responsibility  and  the  patriotic 
spirit.  Bishop  Herbert  Welch  writes:  "There  is  a 
new  spirit  of  eagerness  for  everything  that  is  good. 
The  interest  in  higher  education  of  women  is  marked. 
Parents  are  coming  to  believe  that  their  daughters 
cannot  get  good  husbands  unless  the  girls  have  been 
educated."  '  Forty  converts  received  on  probation 
at  once  formed  a  self-supporting  preaching  band. 
"Isn't  it  pretty  hot  in  July?"  asked  the  pastor. 
"Yes,"  they  said,  "but  we  cannot  wait."  Church 
services  are  crowded,  primary  and  Sunday  schools 
are  reported  to  be  "bursting  the  walls"  of  their  old 
rooms.  Bishop  Welch  adds:  "It  may  well  prove  to 
be  the  case  that  the  greatest  movement  since  the 
great  revival  of  more  than  a  dozen  years  ago  has 
already  begun.  Best  of  all,  it  finds  its  chief  origin 
among  the  people." 

Christianity's  Yet  the  Christian  missionary's  task 
Task  in  Korea.  in  Korea  is  by  no  means  done.  Quite 
apart  from  the  great  non-Christian  mass  of  the  popu- 
lation, the  Church  itself  has  not  yet  come  to  the  point 


Korea  ^3 

where  its  financial  strength  and  the  numbers  of 
trained  leaders  are  sufficient  alone  to  maintain  the 
Christian  higher  schools.  Marked  as  are  the  ad- 
vances in  self-support,  foreign  teachers,  foreign  ad- 
ministrators and  evangelists,  foreign  givers  must  still 
stand  by.  Indeed,  the  present  opportunities  re- 
quire that  aid  be  given  now  more  liberally  than  ever 
before.  Though  in  a  sense  the  future  happiness  of 
Korea  depends  on  the  growth  of  democratic  senti- 
ment in  Japan,  the  liberal  group  in  Japan  can  gain 
support  for  their  liberal  policy  only  in  so  far  as  the 
Koreans  respond  favorably  to  it.  The  moderate 
spirit  of  the  Revolution  must  continue  in  spite  of 
disappointment  at  the  failure  to  obtain  immediate 
independence  and  every  point  of  liberty  gained  must 
be  made  secure  by  a  corresponding  advance  in  self- 
governing  ability. 

Moreover,  just  as  rapidly  as  measures  of  self- 
government  come  to  Korea  she  must  be  prepared 
for  them  by  ideals  of  democracy,  citizenship,  and 
fellow-service.  As  many  nations  have  found  out 
in  their  history,  unity  against  foreign  domination 
is  one  thing,  and  unity  in  self-government  is  another. 
To  Korea  also  is  coming  the  disturbing  factor  of 
modern  industrialism,  now  only  slightly,  but  certain 
to  grow  larger  with  the  years.  The  ancient  evil  of 
liquor  is  not  lessened  by  the  transition  from  the  home 
distillery  to  the  factory.  Morphine  and  social  vice 
worm  their  insidious  way  among  the  people.  The 
testing  of  Korean  character  promises  to  be  severe. 
The  faith  that  meets  the  crisis  is  often  inadequate 
for  the  commonplace.  Upon  the  Christianization 
of   Korea   the  genuine  independence  of  Korea  de- 


54  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

pends.     Then    only  will  be  realized  Hugh    Cynn's 
Christian  ambition  for  Korea: 

"In  that  full  justice  (which  the  world  triumph  of  de- 
mocracy will  bring  to  Korea)  Korea  will  become  free 
from  all  bonds  but  the  love  for  humanity,  and  will  en- 
deavor to  bring  spiritual  and  material  blessing,  particu- 
larly the  former,  upon  the  other  peoples  in  the  Orient. 
Her  progress  and  unselfish  service  to  the  other  peoples 
will  spell  true  peace  in  the  Orient  and  the  world. 
Statesmen  may  come  and  statesmen  may  go,  but  the 
ideals  of  the  Korean  people  will  be  realized,  because 
their faiih,  and  hope  are  in  the  'Invisible  King'  and  their 
love  is  for  humanity."* 


EMPEROR   WORSHIP 

"The  Imperial  Family  of  Japan  is  the  parent  not  only  of  her  sixty 
millions  but  of  all  mankind  on  earth.  In  the  eyes  of  the  Imperial 
Family  all  races  are  one  and  the  same.  It  is  above  all  racial  consider- 
ations. All  human  disputes  may  therefore  be  settled  in  accordance  with 
its  immaculate  justice.  The  League  of  Nations*  proposals  to  save  man- 
kind from  the  horrors  of  war  can  only  attain  its  real  object  by  placing 
the  Imperial  Family  of  Japan  at  its  head.  To  attain  its  object  the 
League  must  have  a  strong  punitive  force  of  a  super-national  and  super- 
racial  character,  and  this  force  can  only  be  found  in  the  Imperial  Fam- 
ily of  Japan." — NirokUy  a  Tokyo  daily  newspaper. 

woman's  conscience  in  japan 

As  in  other  lands,  the  race  conscience  of  Japan  is,  in  no  small  meas- 
ure, in  the  keeping  of  the  women.  A  Japanese  woman,  who  had  never 
been  in  Korea,  said  to  a  foreign  friend  who  had  just  returned  from  that 
country:  *'My  heart  has  been  telling  me  that  all  is  not  well  in  Korea. 
I  knew  that  our  press  was  lying,  but  I  had  been  hoping  that  our  foreign 
papers  had  been  exaggerating.  I  want  to  know  the  truth."  Another 
Japanese  woman  said:  "The  story  of  the  great  wrong  done  to  Korea 
by  our  people  must  be  told  to  the  whole  world  if  our  people  are  to  be 
saved." — Jsia^  August,  1920,  p.  701. 

"suicide  curve" 

"Mrs.  Jo  is  a  Christian  Japanese  woman,  converted  through  Chris- 
tian missionaries.  On  a  certain  railroad  near  Kobe,  over  which  the 
writer  recently  rode,  there  is  a  sharp  curve  and  for  many  years  this 
curve  has  been  known  as  'suicide  curve.'     Hundreds  of  Japanese  a  year 


*Hugh  Heungwo  Cynn,  T/ie  Rebirth  of  Korea,  p.  1 87. 


Korea  55 

traveled  as  though  making  a  pilgrimage  to  this  spot  and  threw  them- 
selves in  front  of  the  fast  express  and  committed  suicide.  This  is  a  pre- 
vailing custom  in  Japan  because  theie  isn't  much  hope  of  immortality 
in  their  hearts.  The  old  religions  of  Japan,  Buddhism  and  Shintoism, 
have  lost  their  grip  and  millions  of  human  beings  live  and  die  without 
any  religion  in  their  lives  or  any  hope  in  their  hearts. 

•"Mrs.  Jo  lives  a  long  way  from  'suicide  curve,'  but  she  conceived 
the  idea  of  putting  up  a  sign  at  this  terrible  spot.  Then  she  got  per- 
mission of  the  government  to  put  the  sign  up.  It  is  written  in  Japa- 
nese characters  and  it  reads:  'Wait  a  Minute  before  You  Carry  Out  Your 
Intention!     Come  and  Talk  Things  Over  with  Me!  Vll  'Try  to  Help  You!' 

In  spite  of  the  fact  that  her  house  is  ten  miles  back  from  this  'suicide 
curve'  more  than  seventy  people  came  to  her  door  during  the  first  year 
that  she  put  up  the  sign,  and  through  her  kindly  Christian  admonition 
and  through  the  Christian  hope  that  she  held  out  before  their  eyes  gave 
up  their  intention  of  suicide  and  most  of  them  became  Christians." 
— ^A  Missionary's  Report. 

INDEPENDENT   GIRLS    IN    KOREA 

One  of  the  head  Japanese  teachers  addressed  a  large  class  of  Korean 
girls  at  the  time  of  the  uprising.  He  said:  "We  have  trained  you  in 
this  institution  for  several  years  and  I  hope  you  will  marry  Japanese  hus- 
bands." "We  all  will,"  they  replied  laughing,  and  the  next  day  all  of 
these  girls  were  out  on  the  streets  shouting  "Mansei." — Asia^  August, 
1920,  p.  700. 

PAUL   AND    SILAS    IN    KOREA 

Even  the  men  in  prison  are  not  idle.  One  pastor  reports  that  he 
is  in  a  room  with  nineteen.  At  first  there  were  but  three  Christians. 
Now  they  are  all  Christians  and  have  service  in  their  cell.  One  boy,  a 
student,  said  it  had  meant  more  to  him  than  a  year  of  study. — Mission- 
ary's report  in  Cynn,  Rebirth  of  Korea,  p.  i8o. 

A    KOREAN    CHRISTIAN    GIRL    IN   JAIL 

"After  more  than  a  month  of  sitting  in  an  uncomfortable  position 
with  absolutely  nothing  to  read  and  no  one  to  speak  to  and  nothing  to 
see,  I  received  with  joy  unspeakable  a  copy  of  the  New  Testament  in 
my  own  tongue.  I  read  it  through  in  two  and  a  half  days,  then  read 
it  again  and  memorized  Matt.  5,  I  and  II  Samuel,  and  the  Psalms  I 
read  twice,  memorizing  Psalms  I,  23  and  121,  also  David's  Bow  Song. 

"I  never  knew  before  what  the  Bible  could  mean  to  a  human  being 
and  God  was  my  one  hope,  my  all.  My  constant  prayer:  'Thy  King- 
dom come.  Thy  will  be  done  on  earth  as  it  is  in  Heaven.*  My  first 
Sunday  there,  when  I  heard  some  one  sing,  'Nearer,  my  God,  to  Thee,' 
it  was  like  a  river  of  peace  flowing  into  my  soul,  and  I  knew  all  was  well, 
if  we  only  have  His  presence  and  comfort.  Many  times  every  day  I 
sang,  'I  hear  my  Saviour  calling,'  and  knew  that  He  would  'go  with  m§ 
all  the  way.'  "—Cynn,  Rebirth  of  Kor^a^  p.  181, 


Courtesy  of  Dr.  R.  A.  Ward 

"REMEMBER    CHIXA'S    HUMlLlATlOX" 

A    column    erected    on    a    prominent    Peking    street-corner    by    a    Chinese 

man   of   wealth  to  remind  his  countrymen   of   China's   humiliation   at 

the   hands   of  Japan,    May,    1915. 


CHAPTER   TWO 

IV.     CHINA 

Unity  without        Although  China  is  the  most  ancient 
nationalism.  of  living  empires,  having  been  hoary 

with  age  centuries  before  the  wild  tribesmen  of 
western  Europe  felt  the  culture  of  Greece  and  Rome 
and  India,  China  is  even  yet  hardly  a  nation,  but 
rather  a  people  and  a  civilization.  No  such  loyalty 
to  a  central  government,  no  such  sense  of  the  need 
for  one,  or,  for  that  matter,  of  much  of  any  govern- 
ment exists  in  China  as  in  Western  lands.  Conquer- 
or after  conqueror,  dynasty  after  dynasty  have  as- 
cended the  Yellow  Throne;  their  armies  and  their 
civil  wars  have  come  and  gone,  disturbing,  but  not 
upsetting  the  steady  movement  of  life  in  its  accus- 
tomed ways.  "Heaven  is  high  and  the  Emperor  far 
away."  ^'Throughout  the  country  one  village  com- 
munity after  another  leads  its  life  according  to  the 
traditions  of  its  ancestors,  guided  by  some  leading 
man  who  applies  a  mixture  of  precedent,  Confucian 
ethics,  and  shrewd  sense,  to  the  settlement  of  such 
difficulties  as  arise  among  his  people;  and  such  whole 
communities  live  as  they  have  lived,  undisturbed  by 
any  thought  of  events  in  the  next  province. 
These  people  are,  to  use  a  Chinese  metaphor,  the 
sea;  the  government  is  the  boat."*  Yet  in  spite  of 
the  size  of  the  country,  the  huge  mass  of  the  popu- 
lation, the  great  difficulties  of  travel,  the  multitude 
of  dialects,  the  marked  differences  in  climate  and  crop, 
and  many  other  disintegrating  factors,   there  is  a 

*China  Mission  Year  Booky  1919,  p.  15. 


58  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

remarkable  unity  of  ideas  and  ideals,  of  social  cus- 
tom, of  methods  of  work  and  trade.  New  races,  new 
religions  have  come  in  only  to  be  assimilated  with- 
out assimilating. 

Chinese  Character.  Furthermore,  until  contact  with  the 
West  forced  new  conditions  upon  China,  progress  had 
ceased.  Civilization  had  become  stabilized.  The 
inventiveness  and  initiative  of  those  who  might  have 
brought  improvements  were  destroyed  by  excessive 
devotion  to  the  Chinese  classics.  Because  of  the 
great  density  of  the  population  both  the  educated  and 
the  masses  had  to  learn  how  men  might  with  least 
friction  live  together  in  a  crowd.  The  result  of  this 
terrific  discipline  is  the  splendid  Chinese  character. 
The  power  to  endure  and  survive  physically  under 
conditions  which  would  wreck  a  Westerner  has  had 
its  spiritual  counterpart  in  an  entirely  non- Western 
patience,  in  contentment  with  Httle,  in  a  readiness  to 
ease  the  sore  burdens  of  life  by  good  humor,  in  gen- 
uine friendliness.  The  Chinese  lack  of  concern  for 
public  law  is  mitigated  by  a  sharing  of  moral  respon- 
sibility between  groups  in  the  community  and  a 
readiness  to  find  a  way  out  by  compromise. 

Even  so,  the  importance  of  keeping  out  of  trouble 
in  this  "thick  civilization"*  brings  resistance  to  in- 
novation, lest  it  cause  more  trouble.  There  is  a 
tendency  to  mind  one's  own  business  at  the  risk  of 
being  imposed  upon  rather  than  to  stir  up  a  row.  A 
marked  skill  in  forming  certain  types  of  business 
combinations  and  a  well-recognized  reliability  in 
business  matters  are  Chinese  characteristics.     Fin- 


*The  phrase  is  Professor  Dewey's. 


China  59 

ally,  the  Chinese  are  thoroughly  democratic.  Caste 
is  unknown.  The  ancient  examinations  for  official 
position  were  as  open  to  the  son  of  a  laborer  as  to 
the  son  of  a  high  official.  A  shrewd  observer  is  re- 
ported to  regard  the  Chinese  as  "the  democratic 
man,"  considering  himself  as  good  as  his  neighbor 
without  aggressive  display  of  his  "rights"  and  with- 
out obsequiousness.*  It  is  a  good  augury  for  the 
world  if  human  nature  can  develop  such  a  spirit 
under  such  circumstances,  even  though  it  be  lacking 
in  a  sense  of  responsibility  for  the  common  weal. 

upsetting  a  Unfortunately  or  fortunately  for  Chi- 

Civilization.  na  new  factors  are  coming  in  from  out- 

side to  upset  this  stability.  The  Western  nations 
insist  on  dealing  with  the  Chinese  "nation,"  on  re- 
quiring her  government  to  protect  their  citizens,  to 
pay  indemnities,  to  collect  taxes  to  pay  for  loans. 
More  certain  to  disturb  is  the  incoming  of  modern 
industry  and  foreign  trade  with  their  new  factories 
and  mills  and  mines.  Changing  methods  of  manu- 
facture mean  shifts  in  the  manner  of  living  and  in  turn 
altered  moral  standards.  Habits  of  centuries  may 
suddenly  react  against  progress.  Again,  the  threat- 
ening presence  of  other  nations  may  teach  China  the 
militarism  which  it  taught  Japan.  What  a  terrible 
threat  to  the  world  China's  resources  in  materials 
and  men  would  be,  if  she  became  militarist!  How 
China  shall  change  from  an  ancient  to  a  modern  na- 
tion is  of  tremendous  significance  to  every  people  on 
the  globe. 


•Cited  by  W.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  oj  the  Worlds  May,  1920,  p.  44a. 


ho  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

THE  BURDENS  OF  CHINA 

Poverty,  Igno-  The  first  of  China^s  problems  in  striv- 
rance, Superstition,  in g  to  become  a  nation  are  a  group  of 
three  which  form  a  vicious  circle,  each  contributing 
to  the  continuance  of  the  other.  They  are  poverty, 
ignorance,  superstition.  Chinese  superstition  teaches 
that,  unless  a  man  have  male  descendants  who 
will  perform  the  devotional  rites  before  his  ancestral 
tablets,  his  spirit  will  forever  wander  forlorn  and 
foodless.  Sons  must  be  had.  Accordingly,  early 
marriages,  arranged  by  the  parents,  and  large  families 
are  the  rule.  This  means  a  tremendously  high  birth- 
rate, which  would  soon  cause  the  population  to  burst 
out  of  China  like  a  flood,  were  it  not  for  the  extent 
to  which  the  diseases  of  crowding  and  poverty  de- 
stroy child  life,  and  occasional  famine  and  flood  or 
rebellion  wipe  out  thousands  more.  It  is  this  super- 
stition also  which  makes  daughters  undesirable, 
transferring  them  early  to  the  home  of  the  prospec- 
tive parents-in-law,  to  become  convenient  household 
drudges,  or  disposing  of  them  in  ways  which  the  West 
would  not  approve.  As  it  is,  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  Chinese  migrate  every  year  from  the  South  to  the 
open  areas  of  Malaysia  and  Netherlands  East  Indies. 

But  the  population  still  remains  so  great  that  every 
available  patch  of  land  is  required  for  raising  crops 
and  every  imaginable  animal  and  vegetable  product 
is  used  for  food, — and  many  which  seem  to  the  West 
unimaginable.  In  this  battle  for  existence  human 
life  and  human  exertion  are  cheap.  The  competition 
is  so  strong  that  extreme  physical  labor  is  performed 
for  wages  that  barely  keep  body  and  soul  together 
and  often  do  not.     Only  the  wealthy  few  have  leisure 


China  6i 

to  learn.  Children  cannot  be  kept  in  school  long 
enough  even  to  begin  to  master  the  difficult  ideo- 
graphs. New  ideas  cannot  penetrate,  superstitions 
remain  because  reading  and  writing  alone  require 
years  to  learn.  Great  as  are  the  emphasis  on  learn- 
ing and  the  respect  for  scholars,  the  numbers  who 
have  been  able  to  follow  the  scholarly  path  even  into 
elementary  education  are  but  a  tiny  fraction  of  the 
whole.  It  is  estimated  that  only  one  man  in  ten  can 
read,  one  woman  in  a  thousand.  Under  such  circum- 
stances, intelligent,  effective  citizenship  is  impossible. 

Barriers  to  Indus-  Even  if  more  could  read,  traditional 
trial  Wealth.  Chinese  lore  has  afforded  them  moral 

maxims  leaving  untrained  that  critical  faculty  which 
breaks  down  superstition  and  paves  the  way  for  that 
scientific  deahng  with  facts  that  is  the  foundation  of 
progress.  Necessity  is  the  mother  only  of  a  limited 
amount  of  invention.  Science  and  freedom  to  experi- 
ment are  required  for  those  inventions  that  revolu- 
tionize a  society.  Great  national  resources  which 
might  relieve  the  poverty  of  millions  lie  untapped. 
Profitable  methods  of  working  them  are  unknown,  or, 
the  "earth  demons"  will  take  vengeance  if  they  are 
disturbed.  Facilities  for  transportation  are  un- 
believably primitive.  China  has  7,000  miles  of  rail- 
road. If  she  had  as  many  as  the  United  States  in 
proportion  to  area  she  would  have3 15,000,  if  in  propor- 
tion to  population  1,000,000.  Outside  of  port  cities 
most  roads  are  as  narrow  as  trails,  over  which  the 
great  bulk  of  goods  and  people  are  carried  on  the 
shoulders  of  men.  The  extensive  inland  waterways 
are  often  disorganized  by  the  indifference  of  oliicials 
to  needed  repairs. 


62  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Again,  it  is  reported  that  popular  investment  of 
savings  in  a  stock  company,  to  secure  the  large  capital 
railroads  and  mines  require,  is  a  risky  undertaking 
in  China.  "Highly  honorable  as  merchants  and 
bankers,  they  have  never  worked  out  an  ethics  for 
the  stock  company,  and  in  such  relations  they  are  the 
prey  of  a  mutual  distrust  that  is  only  too  well  found- 
ed."* Too  often  capital  is  consumed  in  "squeeze" 
taken  by  the  officials  and  in  the  payment  of  inefficient 
relatives  of  the  management  who,  by  Chinese  custom, 
demand  places  in  the  company.  Widespread  liter- 
acy, modern  education,  and  a  radical  change  in  the 
basis  of  certain  social  customs  and  morals  are  needed 
to  break  the  vicious  circle,  to  reduce  poverty,  to  put 
that  restraint  on  large  families  which  higher  educa- 
tion and  a  larger  range  of  life  interests  bring,  to  sub- 
stitute knowledge  for  superstition  and  ancient  un- 
reason and  to  lay  the  moral  foundation  for  national 
wealth  and  national  self-government. 

Western  Aggres-  The  second  group  of  problems  for 
sion  in  China.  China  Centers  about  national  govern- 
ment and  foreign  relations.  With  the  weakness  of 
the  one  has  come  the  complexity  and  threat  of  the 
other.  In  order  to  understand  the  latter,  it  must  be 
remembered  that  when  the  European  nations  began 
to  open  up  trade  with  the  new  world  of  the  Americas 
and  the  ancient  world  of  the  Orient  they  had  ideals 
of  conquest  bred  of  their  conflicts  with  one  another  in 
Europe.  It  was  by  such  conquests  and  negotiations 
for  political  control,  the  latter  almost  invariably 
having  behind  them  the  threat  of  force,  that  Spain 
and  Portugal  once  built  up  their  vast  American  Em- 

*E.  A.  Ross,  The  Changing  Chinese ^  p.  124. 


China  6^ 

pireSj  that  Great  Britain  is  now  in  India  and  Malay- 
sia, France  in  North  Africa  and  Indo-China,  Holland 
in  the  Netherlands  East  Indies.  The  motive  was  not 
conquest  for  conquest's  sake,  but  for  the  wealth  to 
be  gained  by  trade  and  exploitation  of  the  natural  re- 
sources of  the  country.  Each  new  possession  has 
made  more  seem  desirable.  Having  India,  Great 
Britain  must  needs  protect  the  trade  route  by  con- 
trolling Egypt,  resist  Russians  approach  to  India  by 
controlling  the  independent  countries  of  Persia  and 
Afghanistan  and  the  Chinese  possession  of  Tibet. 

In  dealing  with  so  huge  and  distant  a  land  as  China, 
actual  conquest  and  possession  were  not  possible; 
there  was  also  the  danger  that  conquest  would  in- 
volve conflict  with  some  competing  European  power. 
But  this  has  not  prevented  the  forcing  of  economic 
privileges  and  political  control.  One  or  two  exam- 
ples will  suffice.  As  a  result  of  the  Opium  War  of 
1840-1842,  Great  Britain  not  only  forced  China  to 
open  five  ports  to  foreign  commerce  and  to  deal  with 
foreigners  on  a  basis  of  equality,  but  took  possession 
of  Hongkong,  fixed  rates  of  duty  for  imports  which 
China  could  not,  without  agreement  of  the  Powers,  in- 
crease, and  collected  a  large  indemnity.  By  aiding 
Russia  to  prevent  Japan  from  taking  the  Liao-tung 
peninsula  from  China,  France  secured  from  China 
additions  to  Indo-China  and  railway  and  mining 
rights  in  two  Southern  provinces.  Great  Britain 
then  objected  that  this  violated  a  previous  under- 
standing with  China,  but,  instead  of  requiring  France 
to  give  way,  required  China  to  yield  more  territory 
to  England  on  the  frontiers  of  Burma.  The  process 
by  which  Germany  obtained  control  of  Kiaochow  and 
Shantung  has  already  been  described. 


64  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Since  1885  China  has  also  lost  Annam,  Burma, 
Formosa,  Korea,  Outer  Mongolia,  Outer  Tibet,  the 
ports  of  Macao,  Port  Arthur,  Wei-hai-wei,  Kwang- 
chow  Wan  and  other  lesser  possessions.  Further- 
more, "spheres  of  influence,"  designed  to  keep  other 
nations  out,  are  claimed  over  large  areas  of  China  by 
Great  Britain,  Japan,  France,  and  Russia.  The  United 
States  alone,  though  approving  action  by  her  citizens 
in  securing  contracts  for  railway  construction  and 
similar  enterprises,  has  never  followed  up  such  con- 
cessions by  eff'orts  to  secure  political  control,  has 
never  taken  possession  of  Chinese  territory,  and  has 
been  the  most  outspoken  champion  of  the  "open 
door"  policy  *  and  the  territorial  integrity  of  China. 

The  Humiliation  The  embarrassment  and  humiliation 
of  China.  of  China  by  this  foreign  aggression 

was  greatly  increased  by  events  during  and  since  the 
War.  Anxious  to  obtain  a  dominant  position  in  rela- 
tion to  China  to  the  exclusion  of  non-Asiatic  nations, 
Japan  seized  the  opportunity  given  by  the  preoccupa- 
tion of  Europe  in  the  war,  to  present  "Twenty-one 
Demands"  upon  China  in  January,  191 5.  These  de- 
mands required  China  to  recognize  special  privileges 
for  Japan  in  Shantung,  Manchuria,  and  elsewhere  and, 
in  the  fifth  group,  to  surrender  completely  China^s 
internal  and  external  affairs  to  Japanese  manipu- 
lation. After  China  had  made  efforts  to  modify, 
negotiate,  and  delay  action,  Japan,  secretly  assured 
that  the  European  powers  would  not  object,  so  long 
as  their  interests  were  not  injured,  suddenly  threaten- 
ed China  with  war  unless  the  first  four  groups  were 


*By  which  the  Powers  agreed  not  to  discriminate  against  one  another's  com- 
merce in  territory  under  their  influence . 


China  65 

accepted.  The  ultimatum  was  delivered  May  7th, 
to  expire  on  May  9th.  Too  weak  to  fight  and  with- 
out support  from  any  nation,  except  a  note  of  protest 
from  the  United  States,  China  succumbed.  May 
7th  and  May  9tK  are  her  days  of  national  humiliation. 

Other  humiliating  experiences  came  in  the  making  of 
the  final  Treaty  of  Peace  between  the  Allies  and  Ger- 
many. Stirred  by  President  Wilson's  declaration 
of  the  aims  of  the  war  as  the  protection  of  the  rights 
of  weak  nations  to  self-government  and  freedom, 
China  followed  America  into  the  war,  hoping  that  in 
the  settlement  some  of  her  wrongs  could  be  righted. 
But  Japan's  insistence  that,  though  she  would  return 
to  China  political  sovereignty  over  Shantung,  she 
must  first  become  successor  to  the  German  rights, 
coupled  with  France's  and  Great  Britain's  determi- 
nation to  adhere  to  their  secret  war-time  agreements 
with  Japan,  resulted  in  the  incorporation  in  the 
Treaty  of  Versailles  of  the  Japanese  desire.  With  a 
boldness  new  for  China,  her  representatives  refused 
to  sign  the  Treaty  and,  strangely  enough,  the  Treaty 
terms  reached  China  on  the  anniversary  of  the  humil- 
iating May  seventh.  Only  the  development  of  na- 
tional strength  can  prevent  China  from  being  bullied 
and  maltreated  as  long  as  other  nations  seek  to  profit 
by  her  weakness. 

BARRIERS  TO  GOOD  GOVERNMENT 

Barriers  to  Good  The  difficulties  in  the  way  of  China's 
Government:  Ex-  efforts  to  develop  a  Strong  govern- 
traterritoriaiity.  ment,  apart  from  those  due  to  nations 
who  seek  to  keep  her  weak,  are  many.  Her  law 
codes  and  law  practice  must  be  so  revised  that  foreign 


66  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

nations  will  no  longer  require  foreign  courts  (or  for- 
eign consuls  with  judicial  authority)  and  foreign 
laws.  Such  a  court  is  the  U.  S.  District  Court  in 
Shanghai.  Similarly  many  nations  have  their  own 
post  offices  for  foreign  mail  in  spite  of  the  remarkably 
efficient     and     extensive     Chinese    postal     system. 

Though  in  part  necessary,  these  provisions  may  be 
greatly  abused.  Reputable  authorities  assert  that 
enormous  quantities  of  morphine  are  smuggled  into 
China  through  Japanese  post  offices  and  that  the 
itinerant  vendors  of  the  drug  are  protected  by  the 
Japanese  consuls.  The  amount  smuggled  by  this 
and  other  methods  in  191 9  is  estimated  at  28  tons. 
(A  pound  will  provide  28,000  doses!)  Unfortunately 
Great  Britain  and  the  United  States  are  also  in- 
volved. Basil  Mathews,  writing  in  the  Methodist 
Times  o(  hondon,  declares:  "The  immense  manufac- 
ture in  Great  Britain  .  .  of  morphine,  made 
from  the  opium  grown  in  our  plantations  in  India, 
and  shipped  out  through  America  to  Japan,  where  it 
is — by  the  most  amazingly  brilliant  diabolical  in- 
genuity— smuggled  along  a  thousand  channels  into 
China,  is  an  outstanding  Imperial  and  inter-racial 
moral  issue." 

Firms  in  the  United  States  have  been  manufac- 
turing vast  quantities  of  opiates  for  export  and  un- 
known amounts  have  been  shipped  in  bond  across 
the  country  to  Japan.  The  Harrison  Act  of  1914 
prohibits  the  export  of  these  deadly  drugs  to  coun- 
tries not  having  protective  laws.  A  special  order  of 
the  Treasury  Department  in  1920  added  the  Japa- 
nese Empire  to  this  list!  Even  better  is  the  bill 
(H.R.  145C0)  put  before  Congress  in  December, 
1920,  which  prohibits  all  export  of  such  drugs  from 


China  67 

the  United  States,  all  transit  in  bond,  and  permits 
the  import  of  such  drugs  only  in  quantities  deter- 
mined by  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service.  What  a 
shame  that  China,  after  throwing  off  the  opium  curse 
so  valiantly  with  such  indifferent  cooperation  from 
the  West,  should  again  be  threatened  with  it  through 
the  greed  and  carelessness  of  foreign  nations!  The 
abolition  of  "extraterritoriality,''  as  the  principle 
covering  the  foreign  courts  and  post  offices  is  called, 
is  one  of  the  ambitions  of  the  new  China. 

Barriers  to  Good  A  second  barrier  to  good  government 
Government:  Ar-  in  China  is  found  in  the  armies  and 
mies  and  Parties,  commanders  left  over  after  the  ex- 
pulsion of  the  Manchu  and  the  death  of  China's 
strong  man,  Yuan  Shi  Kai.  These  forces  speedily 
became  the  weapons  of  personal  and  clique  ambitions. 
On  occasion  failure  to  pay  the  soldiers  led  to  rioting 
and  brigandage.  For  a  time  a  cabal,  called  the  Anfu 
Club,  and  led  by  the  able  Tuan  Chi  Jui,  reputed  tool 
of  the  Japanese,  blocked  progressive  measures  in  the 
Peking  Parliament  and  precipitated  a  brief  civil  war 
near  Peking.  The  need  of  keeping  the  army  paid 
has  forced  the  government  to  mortgage  Chinese  re- 
sources more  and  more  deeply  to  foreign  powers. 
Meanwhile  South  and  North  have  long  been  at  odds. 
Two  Parliaments  sit,  one  at  Peking  and  one  at  Can- 
ton; neither  is  willing  to  lose  face  by  surrendering  to 
the  contentions  of  the  other;  each  struggles  with  dis- 
affected provinces.  The  South  demands  repudiation 
of  the  Northern  government's  secret  agreements  with 
Japan;  the  North  refuses  to  humiliate  itself.  Confer- 
ences to  settle  the  differences  have  so  far  failed. 
Final    adoption    of    the    constitution    and    orderly 


68  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

government  await  their  union,  made  more  difficult 
by  militarist  intriguing  and  private  ambition. 

Lack  of  Na-  The  most  deep-seated  difficulty  and 

tional  Spirit.  one  which  to  a  large  degree  makes  the 
others  harder  to  remove  is  that  long-inherited  at- 
tachment to  clan  and  village,  that  indifference  to 
national  interests  which  has  already  been  described. 
This  is  a  tremendous  obstacle.  A  soldier  in  one  of 
the  armies  was  asked  how  he  liked  it.  He  replied 
that  it  was  very  comfortable.  "But  how  will  you 
like  it  when  fighting  begins?"  "Oh,  my  friends  will 
let  me  know  when  that's  going  to  happen  and  Fll  get 
out."  The  indifference  is  far-reaching  in  its  effect. 
The  best  insurance  against  misuse  of  pui)lic  office  is 
the  watchfulness  of  the  public  and  when  that  is 
lacking  the  clan  and  the  family  win  out. 

"For  a  president  of  a  company  or  a  high  official  to  refuse 
a  profitable  post  to  a  relative  merely  on  the  ground  of 
his  incompetence  would  seem  heartless  and  indicate  the 
lack  of  proper  family  feeling.  He  would  frequently 
like  to  refuse,  but  does  not  know  how  to  avoid  the 
family  pressure  especially  since  he  knows  that  in  case 
of  refusal  he  will  have  to  support  the  poor  relatives 
from  his  own  pocket."* 

Similarly  the  ancient  practice  of  "squeeze,''  which  is 
due,  in  part,  to  the  low  salaries  paid,  permeates  all 
classes  of  society  and  public  funds  dwindle  rapidly  en 
route  to  the  purpose  for  which  they  were  intended. 
It  is  small  wonder  that  the  taxes  collected  never 
provide  the  revenue  sought  and  that  projected  rail- 
ways exhaust  their  capital  before  the  ties  are  laid. 
The  words  of  an  experienced  American  resident  in 
China  are  significant: 

•"Americus,"  in  Asia,  August,  1919,  p.  758. 


China  69 

"When  all  is  said  and  done,  a  real  moral  weakness, 
and  the  lack  of  mutual  confidence  which  results, 
effectively  blocking  every  attempt  at  cooperation  and 
the  consolidation  of  the  various  factions,  is  probably 
the  fundamental  cause  of  China's  unfortunate  position 
today  vis-a-vis  Japan  and  the  world.  It  is  a  moral 
weakness  which  is  regarded  by  believers  in  China  not 
as  an  intrinsic  part  of  Chinese  character,  but  as  the 
creation  of  centuries  of  pressure,  of  poverty  and  the 
rigid  domination  of  an  inherited  system  of  thought 
and  philosophy — a  weakness  that  is  possible  of  eradi- 
cation with  the  rise  of  new  generations  trained  in  other 
standards."* 

SIGNS  OF  china's    NEW  DAY 

Industrial  and  Strong  as  are  these  habits  and  deep 
Commercial  Ex-  as  their  hold  is  upon  the  people,  the 
pansion.  influences  of  the  latter  years  of  the 

war  have  had  such  an  effect  that  the  words  "new 
China"  no  longer  refer  to  China  since  the  Revolution 
of  1911-12,  which  overthrew  the  Manchu,  but  to 
the  changed  China  of  the  last  five  years.  Several 
of  these  changes,  requiring  generations  for  their  com- 
pletion, we  need  to  understand.  The  first  concern 
great  forward  strides  in  industrial  and  commercial 
development.  The  markets  of  the  world,  drained  of 
their  raw  materials  and  manufactured  goods  by  the 
war,  have  demanded  goods  of  China's  foreign  trade 
to  the  extent  of  more  than  three  times  her  foreign 
trade  of  1910  and  two  and  a  half  times  that  of  1913.! 

This  splendid  increase,  accompanied  by  the  rise  of 
Chinese  antipathy  to  Japanese  goods  and  the  growing 
alertness  of  Chinese  manufacturers  to  the  advantages 

•"Americus,"  in  Asiuy  August,  1919,  p.  760. 
tFtfr  Eastern  Fortnightly y  Vol.  VII,  No.  17. 


70  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

of  modern  machinery  production  have  led  to  the  ex- 
pansion of  many  industries  and  the  opening  of  new 
ones.  The  investment  of  $25,000,000  in  American  cot- 
ton machinery  in  a  year,  and  the  taking  of  enormous 
profits  from  Chinese  grown  and  Chinese  manufac- 
tured cotton  are  reported.  In  part  by  the  coopera- 
tion of  Chinese  cotton  and  silk  manufacturers  with 
the  missionary  University  of  Nanking,  and  in  part 
by  independent  firms,  widespread  experiments  in 
improving  the  quality  of  cotton  and  silk  fibre  are 
being  made  and  farmers  and  silk  growers  are  being 
induced  to  use  the  new  seed  and  new  cocoons.  By 
these  improvements  it  is  believed  that  the  cotton 
crop  alone  can  be  trebled  in  value  without  planting 
any  additional  acres.  In  the  port  cities  there  has 
been  a  notable  development  of  large  department 
stores  owned,  managed,  and  patronized  by  Chinese, 
such  as  those  of  the  Sincere  Company  in  Canton, 
Hongkong,  and  Shanghai.  More  than  eighty  cities 
have  their  own  electric  light  plants.  A  recent  state- 
ment* reports  brick,  glass,  and  pottery  works  and 
rice,  oil,  flour,  and  paper  mills  steadily  increasing  in 
number  and  productivity. 

A  significant  step  has  been  taken  in  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  motor  car  route  between  the  northern 
city  of  Kalgan  and  Urga  far  across  Mongolia,  reduc- 
ing to  two  days  the  trip  for  which  a  camel  caravan 
requires  a  month.  If  roads  can  be  constructed,  the 
motor  truck  will  do  wonders  for  China  while  the  need- 
ed railways  are  slowly  being  built.  Practical  arts  are 
being  included  in  the  curriculum  of  several  colleges, 
both   missionary   and  government,   and   vocational 

*Norman  R.  Shaw  in  China  Mission  Year  Book,  1919,  p.  34. 


China  71 

schools  have  been  set  up.  The  French  government  is 
preparing  to  train  large  numbers  of  Chinese  workmen 
in  factories  in  France  and  then  to  return  them  to  China 
as  foremen  and  skilled  mechanics  in  industries  which 
the  French  hope  to  develop  there.  In  the  words  of 
Sir  John  Jordan,  late  British  minister  to  China, 
"China  is  soon  to  embark  upon  a  great  industrial 
career,  for  which  her  raw  materials  and  the  genius  of 
her  people  are  admirably  suited."* 

The  Helping  Hand  As  has  been  indicated,  the  great  pro- 
of Foreign  Capital,  jects  of  railway  and  road  building,  the 
expansion  of  the  iron  and  steel  industries,  and  the 
unification  of  the  confusing  local  currency  systems, 
upon  which  the  drawing  of  the  people  together  as  a 
nation  depends,  require  large  amounts  of  capital, 
such  as  are  only  secured  even  in  the  Western  world  by 
the  combination  of  thousands  upon  thousands  of  in- 
vestors. For  the  reasons  already  noted  the  Chinese 
are  not  yet  prepared  to  do  business  in  this  way  and 
foreign  capital  has  stepped  in.  Unfortunately  the 
investment  of  foreign  capital  has  too  often  put  into 
foreign  hands  invaluable  commercial  and  industrial 
rights  and  given  a  fulcrum  for  exerting  improper 
pressure  on  the  Government.  With  remarkable  suc- 
cess in  overcoming  many  difficulties,  such  as  Japanese 
insistence  on  special  rights  in  Manchuria,  American 
diplomats  and  bankers  have  secured  the  formation  of 
a  ''Consortium"  or  pooling  of  financial  power  by 
Great  Britain,  France,  Japan,  and  the  United  States 
in  all  future  loans  to  China.  This  Consortium  will 
supply  funds  for  such  major  enterprises  as  railroad 
and  highway  construction  and  the  reorganization  of 

*Quoted  in  China  Mission  Year  Book,  1919,  p.  36. 


72  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

the  currency,  while  preventing  any  one  nation  from 
claiming  any  one  enterprise  or  area  as  its  exclusive 
"sphere  of  influence."  It  may  well  be  that  no  single 
international  agreement  will  go  further  toward  se- 
curing the  peace  of  the  Orient  than  this. 

A  New  A-B-c.  Probably  even  more  significant  than 
any  of  the  industrial  or  commercial  changes  of  the 
present  generation  in  China  is  that  being  caused  by 
"the  newest  thing  in  A-B-Cs" — the  Chu  Yin  Tzu 
Mu  system  of  phonetic  writing  and  the  writing  of 
the  spoken  rather  than  the  literary  dialect.  Not  only 
the  knowledge  which  is  gained  in  school  days,  but  also 
that  tremendous  supply  of  up-to-date  information 
and  of  stimulus  to  thought  which  comes  to  modern 
men  in  the  West  from  newspapers,  magazines,  and 
books,  has  been  lacking  because  of  the  well-nigh  im- 
penetrable barriers  of  the  classic  script.  The  Min- 
istry of  Education  in  the  first  year  of  the  Republic 
(191 2),  sought  a  method  of  standardizing  pronuncia- 
tion and  the  Chu  Yin  Tzu  Mu  was  recommended. 
In  November,  1919,  the  phonetic  symbols  were  for- 
mally published  by  the  Ministry  of  Education. 

It  was  soon  found  that  the  system  was  remark- 
ably suited  to  a  simple  written  form  of  Chinese  which 
could  be  readily  learned  by  illiterates.  The  move- 
ment for  such  a  use  of  it,  in  which  the  missionaries 
have  been  active,  has  been  well  under  way  since  the 
fall  of  191 8.  The  literate  have  found  that  they  could 
learn  it  in  a  few  hours,  while  a  few  weeks  have  been 
long  enough  for  intelligent,  but  entirely  illiterate 
adults  to  master  it.  Now  many  Chinese  newspapers 
publish  part  of  their  news  in  the  phonetic  character; 
text-books  are  being  rapidly  produced;  advertising 


SUPERSTITION 
Ganesh,    India's   gluttonous    elephant-headed    god    of   wisdom. 


China  73 

and  political  campaign  circulars  are  beginning  to 
appear  in  it.  The  labor  of  teaching  it,  however,  is 
vast,  because  of  the  huge  masses.  For  a  long  time 
to  come,  much  will  depend  upon  the  activity  of  local 
officials,  many  of  whom  are  prejudiced  against  it. 

What  a  progressive  governor  can  do  is  illustrat- 
ed by  Governor  Yen  of  Shansi,  who  plastered  his 
province  with  posters  urging  the  people  to  study  it, 
and  ordered  2,500,000  copies  of  a  simple  primer.  He 
then  gave  the  various  classes  of  the  population  a 
month  or  two  each  in  which  to  learn  it.  Other  in- 
teresting steps  are  being  taken,  such  as  the  fitting  of 
American  typewriters  (by  a  missionary!)  with  the 
new  characters,  investigations  to  find  the  best  mate- 
rial in  China  and  abroad  to  put  into  book  and  maga- 
zine form,  requirements  of  knowledge  of  the  phonetic 
system  for  admission  to  colleges  and  lower  schools; 
active  promotion  of  phonetics  by  students,  as  a 
patriotic  task.  Upon  it,  indeed,  not  only  the  future 
of  politics  and  nationalism  in  China,  but  also  the 
future  of  Christianity  depends.  ''Cannot  Christian 
schools  and  the  Christian  Church  unite  in  one  great 
effort  to  use  the  new  weapon,  which  has  been  pro- 
vided, surely  by  God  Himself,  at  this  critical  moment, 
to  spread  amongst  the  illiterate  masses,  with  a  full- 
ness and  clearness  never  before  possible,  the  knowl- 
edge of  the  Truth  which  alone  can  make  men  and 
nations  really  free?"* 

China's  New  Na-  The  change  which  really  has  made  the 
tionai  Conscious-  difference  between  China  of  five  years 
ness.  ago  and  China  today  is  described  as 

"a   change   of  heart — a   new   spirit."!     A   national 

*Miss  S.  J.  Garland  in  China  Mission  Year  Book,  1920,  p.  182, 
■tFar  Eastern  Fortnightly,  July  19,  1920,  p.  2. 


74  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

consciousness  is  actually  coming  into  being.  To  the 
students  of  China  should  go  the  credit  for  the  first 
step  and  to  them  and  the  merchants  the  credit  for 
the  continued  progress  of  the  new  Chinese  patriotism. 
The  foundation  was  laid  in  the  **days  of  national 
humiliation,"  May  seventh  and  ninth,  1915,  when 
China  was  forced  to  accede  to  a  large  part  of  the 
"Twenty-one  Demands"  of  the  Japanese.  No  group 
has  been  so  conscious  of  ^'China's  shame"  as  the  stu- 
dents who  were  alert  to  the  victories  of  democratic 
countries  in  the  war,  who  were  in  contact  with  liberal 
ideas,  and  sensitive  to  the  corruption  of  the  Peking 
and  the  Canton  governments.  The  sudden  news  in 
May,  1 91 9,  that  the  Supreme  Council  in  Paris  had 
awarded  to  Japan  the  German  rights  in  Shantung, 
"the  cradle  of  the  nation,"  her  "Holy  Land,"  in 
which  are  the  grave  of  Confucius  and  the  sacred  moun- 
tain of  Taishan,  stirred  the  whole  country  to  wrath. 
Tv/o  members  of  the  Cabinet  and  the  Chinese  Minis- 
ter to  Japan  were  blamed  as  the  "traitors"  responsi- 
ble for  the  pro-Japanese  tendencies  of  the  govern- 
ment. On  May  fourth,  fifteen  thousand  students 
in  Peking  marched  out  on  strike  as  a  protest.  Sever- 
al thousand  went  to  the  house  of  Chao  Ju-lin,  one  of 
the  two  cabinet  officials,  to  demand  explanations. 
On  his  refusal  to  appear,  the  crowd  broke  into  the 
palatial  residence.  The  "traitors"  escaped,  though 
one  was  very  severely  beaten.  Public  opinion  rapid- 
ly showed  itself  in  sympathy  with  the  students. 

The  government's  next  step  was  to  cause  the  resig- 
nations of  the  Minister  of  Education  and  the  Chan- 
cellor of  the  National  University  on  May  19.  The 
response  of  the  students  in  Peking  was  to  proclaim 


China 


75 


another  strike  and  to  begin  lecturing  in  the  streets 
on  the  sins  of  the  Government  and  the  responsibility 
of  the  people.  Sympathetic  strikes  followed  in  the 
next  ten  days  in  city  after  city,  notably  in  Shanghai, 
Tsinan,  Tientsin,  Nanking,  and  Wuchang.  The 
Peking  Government  foolishly  arrested  a  thousand 
students  and  imprisoned  them  in  the  National  Uni- 
versity. The  Shanghai  students  then  successfully 
requested  the  merchants  to  join  the  strike  by  shutting 
their  shops.  An  emphatic  evidence  of  the  strength 
of  the  merchants'  convictions  is  the  fact  that  their 
estimated  loss  in  Shanghai  alone  was  a  million  taels 
a  day!*  Merchants  in  many  other  cities  also  re- 
sponded and  the  demand  for  the  dismissal  of  the 
three  officials  became  so  widespread  that  the  govern- 
ment on  June  loth  was  forced  to  accede,  and  dis- 
missed them. 

Students  at  Work  The  Students  had  won  a  genuine 
for  their  Country,  patriotic  victory  over  the  Govern- 
ment. More  than  that,  all  China  was  stirred  with  a 
sense  of  national  patriotism  that  has  steadily  main- 
tained itself.  ''In  great  characters  plastered  on  city 
walls  and  houses,  in  characters  of  gold  engraved  on 
rings  or  painted  on  fans,  one  constantly  is  seeing  the 
words:  'Remember  China's  shame.'  "j  The  stu- 
dents have  organized  a  National  Alliance,  federating 
student  alliances  all  over  the  country  and  in  sympa- 
thetic relations  with  similar  organizations  of  other 
classes  of  the  population.  The  students  are  also 
turning  their  energies  to  social  service,  establishing 
schools  for  the  poor  and  teaching  in  them,  extending 

*  China  Mission  Year  Book,  191 9,  p.  57.     A  tael  is  approximately  ^1.20. 
^Far  Eastern  Fortnightly ,  July  19,  1920,  p.  3. 


76  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

theknowledge  of  the  newphonetic  script.  Hundreds 
are  lecturing  in  the  streets  and  spreading  the  doctrine 
of  patriotism  in  shops  and  across  the  countryside. 
Others  are  teaching  Chinese  artisans  how  to  make 
goods  to  displace  foreign  productions.  They  have 
also  inaugurated  a  new  movement  known  as  the 
"New  Culture  Movement,"  designed  to  promote 
criticism  of  old  customs  and  traditions  and  the  pro- 
vision of  a  "new  basis  for  the  life  of  the  nation  in  the 
future."  Says  Mr.  K.  S.  Liu: 

"There  is  need  for  more  than  freedom  from  autocracy. 
There  is  need  for  a  higher  form  of  freedom — freedom 
from  one's  narrow  life  and  the  enthrallment  of  custom. 
Such  freedom  will  be  secured  by  devotion  to  common 
ends  or  ideals.  It  is  this  like-mindedness,  this  work- 
ing for  social  ends,  the  spirit  of  the  'we'  as  opposed  to 
the  T  that  China  needs  more  than  anything  else.  And 
it  is  here  that  Christianity  can  make  its  greatest  con- 
tribution to  this  new  Culture  Movement."* 

The  Merchants'  The  patriotic  action  of  the  merchants 
Patriotism.  has  taken  a  different  form, — the  boy- 

cott of  Japanese  goods  and  Japanese  firms  and  a  gen- 
eral effort  to  sell  Chinese-made  rather  than  foreign- 
made  goods.  "We  sell  National  Goods"  is  reported 
to  be  the  most  familiar  shop  sign  in  China  now.  The 
effect  on  Japanese  trade  has  been  very  strongly 
marked.  The  freight  between  Hankow  and  Shang- 
hai, handled  by  the  Nisshin  Kisen  Kaisha,  a  Japanese 
river  steamship  company,  dropped  from  15,846  tons 
for  the  first  five  months  of  1919  to  521  tons  for  the 
second  five  months.  The  sales  of  umbrellas  fell  from 
343,000  in  May  to  49,000  in  June  and  6,000  in  Sep- 
tember, while  in  the  same  period  sales  of  cotton  yarn 

*China  Mission  Year  Book,  191 9,  p.  43* 


China  77 

fell  68  percent.,  and  of  cotton  cloth  eighty  per  cent.* 

Every  effort  of  Japan's  consuls  and  diplomats  and 
pro-Japanese  Chinese  officials  to  interfere  has  only 
served  to  fan  the  flame.  The  merchants  stand  firm. 
In  Tientsin,  at  the  Chinese  New  Year  in  1920,  the 
Chinese  Yarn,  Piece-goods,  and  Silk  Merchants  Guild, 
followed  by  others,  notified  the  Japanese  merchants 
that,  pending  the  proper  settlement  of  the  Shantung 
and  Fukien  issues,  they  severed  all  business  relations 
with  them,  and  held  up  orders  already  placed, 
amounting  to  some  four  million  dollars.f  A  char- 
acteristic statement  by  Chinese  organizations,  wheth- 
er replying  to  Japanese  protests  or  urging  the  Chinese 
government  to  stand  fast,  is  the  following: 

"We  must  clearly  point  out  that  there  is  only  one  way 
open  to  the  Japanese  government,  if  it  wants  to  stop  the 
boycott  .  .  .  that  is  to  remove  the  cause  of  the 
boycott  by  reversing  her  policy  of  aggression  and  in- 
justice to  that  of  moderation  and  fair  play,  by  giving 
up  all  pretensions  over  Tsingtau  and  Shantung,  and 
by  ceasing  all  further  support  to  the  corrupt  militarists 
and  politicians,  whom  the  Chinese  people  have  repudiat- 
ed and  would  have  eliminated  long  ago  but  for  the  Japa- 
nese support  they  have.  If  Japan  would  do  all  this,  the 
boycott  movement  would  stop  of  itself  and  Japan  would 
win  the  lasting  friendship  of  the  Chinese  people.  If 
Japan  will  not  do  so,  the  whole  nation  is  determined 
to  carry  out  her  plan  at  any  cost  till  justice  is  accorded 
her."t 

The  readiness  of  the  students  to  go  to  jail  and  to  en- 
dure rough  treatment  by  the  police  and  the  persist- 

*MiUard's  RevieWy  Jan.  3,  1920,  p.  210. 
■^Millard's  Review,  Jan.  24,  1920,  p.  392. 
XMHlard's  Review,  Feb.  7,  1920,  p.  462. 


78  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ence  of  the  merchants  in  agreeing  to  and  maintaining 
the  boycott  are  symptoms  of  a  new  spirit  of  de- 
votion to  country — a  determination  to  "save  China" 
— that  will  go  far  toward  forging  the  bonds  of  unity 
by  setting  up  the  standards  of  sacrificial  service  that 
are  necessary  to  give  China  a  noble  national  con- 
sciousness. 

china's  need  and  Christianity's  gift 
China's  Need  for    Promising  as   this  new  spirit  is  for 
Christianity.  China's  future,  there  is  yet  another 

factor  that  is  going  even  deeper  to  the  root  of  China's 
need — the  increasing  recognition  that  China  needs 
Christianity.  The  answer  more  and  more  often 
given  to  the  problem  of  the  hour,  **How  can  China 
be  saved?"  is  "By  Christianity."  A  correspondent  of 
the  Far  Eastern  Fortnightly  writes: 

A  leading  official  of  the  South  was  asked  by  your  cor- 
respondent, "Why  don't  the  North  and  South  get  to- 
gether? Can't  you  see  that  this  division  is  injuring 
China  in  the  world  relations?" 

"I  can  tell  you  in  one  word:  Selfishness,"  he  replied." 
"It  is  selfishness  in  the  North  and  selfishness  in  the 
South!" 

"What  is  your  solution?" 

The  official  answered:  "I  am  convinced  nothing  can 
save  China  but  religion."* 

Mrs.  F.  D.  Gamewell  writes:  "A  southern  Parlia- 
mentary leader,  and  vice-speaker  of  the  first  Senate, 
said  before  a  large  gathering  of  foreigners  and  Chi- 
nese, 'China  needs  Christ,  and  the  best  contribution 
we  can  give  to  the  rebirth  of  the  nation  is  to  bring 
Jesus  Christ  to  the  people.     There  is  a  growing  sense 

*Far  Eastern  Fortnightly^  July  19,  1920,  p.  1. 


China  79 

among  our  leaders  all  over  the  country  of  their  power- 
lessness  to  make  the  country  stronger  and  better/  "* 
Here  and  there  some  representatives  of  the  old  re- 
ligions or  some  opponent  of  Christianity  rises  to  stir 
and  agitate,  but  in  the  main  the  ancient  faiths  of 
China,  Hke  the  great  statue  of  Buddha  at  Wofossu, 
are  asleep  or  drowsing.  The  doors  in  China  are  wide 
open  to  Christianity. 

"The  old  Mandarin   self-satisfaction  and  disdain  of 
all  other  wisdom,  which  was  the  Gibraltar  of  heathen- 
dom in  China,  has  crumbled;  and  the  Confucian  scholar 
is  sitting  in  its  dust  (the  sight  almost  arouses  our  pity), 
as  the  pupil  of  the  lad  who  has  had  a  few  years  in  a 
mission  school.     .     .     .     All  classes  are  friendly  to 
the  Christian  Church;   the  opportunities  for  direct 
evangelism  were  never  greater, — and  the  only  limit 
to  missionary  labors,  is  the  number  and  strength  of 
the  laborers."! 
Christianity's  Con-  The  Contribution  which  the  Christian 
tribution  to  China.  Church  has  already  made  to  the  *'Sav- 
ing  of  China"  pohtically  is  no  small  one.     Many  of 
the  most   highly   trusted   and   patriotic   leaders   in 
China, — so  recognized  by  North  and  South  alike, — 
have  come  up   through  missionary   schools.     Such 
men  are  V.  Wellington  Koo,  Ambassador  to  Great 
Britain  and  Peace  Commissioner  in  Paris,  and  three 
of  his  four  associates.     C.  T.  Wang,  formerly  Vice- 
President  of  the  Senate  and  Peace  Commissioner, 
Chang  Po-ling,  head  of  a  school  of  a  thousand  boys 
and  an  outstanding  educator,  and  General  Feng  Yu- 
Siang  are  known  far  and  wide  as  Christians.      The 
managers    of   the    two    largest    Chinese   publishing 

*New  Life  Currents  in  China,  p.  1 94. 

tW.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  of  the  World ,  May,  1920,  p.  437. 


8o  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

houses,  turning  out  hundreds  of  thousands  of  text 
books  and  periodicals  and  other  publications,  learned 
the  business  in  missionary  publishing  houses.  Many 
such  men  are  in  positions  of  leadership  primarily  be- 
cause of  their  Christian  training;  few  of  them  be- 
longed originally   to   the  official   groups. 

The  bases  of  operations  for  the  advance  of  Chris- 
tianity are  also  well-established,  though  in  view  of 
the  hugeness  of  the  task  they  are  scarcely  more  than 
bases.  More  than  fifty  missionary  societies  belong- 
ing to  the  Anglican,  Baptist,  Congregational,  Luther- 
an, Methodist,  and  Presbyterian  groups,  nine  other 
comparatively  strong  agencies,  and  sixty  or  more 
smaller  agencies  or  missions  are  at  work  in  this  vast 
field.  The  total  Protestant  missionary  force  num- 
bers 6,554  with  24,096  Chinese  workers  and  the 
Protestant  membership  is  344,117.  The  Roman 
Catholic  missions  in  1920  reported  1,424  foreign  bish- 
ops and  priests,  936  Chinese  priests  and  1,9545693 
baptized  adherents.  At  many  points  where  the 
missionaries  have  been  at  work  for  long  years,  the 
Christian  community  is  visible  to  the  traveler  in  large 
well-filled  churches  and  schools.  In  others,  good  be- 
ginnings have  been  made;  in  still  more,  the  work  is 
in  the  pioneer  stage.  The  days  of  harvest  are  only 
now  at  hand. 

The  lines  of  the  educational  work  of  the  missions 
are  also  well  marked  out.  At  the  most  strategic 
and  central  points  in  the  Republic  are  steadily 
growing  strong  mission  universities,  in  whose 
support  and  direction  several  missionary  agencies 
unite;  others  have  some  broad  non-denominational 
foundation.     Nearly  every  missionary  agency  has  a 


China  8i 

more  or  less  systematic  distribution  of  primary  and 
secondary  schools.  Normal  schools,  Bible  training 
schools,  and  theological  schools  are  also  well  started. 
More  than  two  hundred  missionary  hospitals  af- 
ford unusual  means  for  reaching  the  physical  and 
spiritual  needs  of  the  people.  As  a  general  agency 
serving  all  the  missions,  the  China  Continua- 
tion Committee  at  its  offices  in  Shanghai  collects  and 
distributes  valuable  information  and  affords  a  base 
for  cooperative  work  on  special  lines.  There  is  as 
yet  no  body  corresponding  to  the  Conference  of 
Federated  Missions  in  Japan  because  of  the  slow 
travel  and  great  distances  in  China,  but  a  general 
missionary  conference  is  planned  for  1921. 

FORWARD  MOVEMENTS  AMONG  CHRISTIAN  FORCES 

China's  Missionary  Four  new  movements  among  China's 
Survey.  Christian  forces  are  of  great  import- 

ance. The  first  is  the  "General  Missionary  Sur- 
vey," by  a  special  committee  of  the  Continuation 
Committee,  which  is  to  be  completed  in  1920  and  will 
be  epoch-making  in  China's  missionary  history.  The 
intensive  study  of  the  occupied  and  unoccupied 
areas,  of  the  location  and  quality  of  the  work  will 
show  the  churches  and  missions  of  China,  as  never 
before,  just  where  the  weak  spots  are,  just  where  new 
or  different  forces  are  needed,  how  most  wisely  to  go 
forward. 

Social  Service  and  Another  development  is  the  increasing 
Moral  Welfare.  emphasis  Upon  community  and  social 
service.  The  agencies  for  promoting  moral  welfare, 
such  as  theW.  C.  T.  U.  of  China,  of  which  Dr.  Mary 
Stone    is    president,    and    the    International    Anti- 


82  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Opium  Association  and  its  several  branches,  are  at 
work.  The  Y.  M.  C.  A.,  the  Medical  Missionary- 
Association,  and  the  National  Medical  Association 
have  been  promoting  a  widespread  public  health 
campaign.  Many  missionaries  are  finding  Boy 
Scout  work  helpful  in  reaching  the  boys.  Institu- 
tional churches  are  becoming  more  and  more  common 
in  the  large  cities  and  their  manifold  methods  of 
service  are  proving  invaluable.  Many  village 
churches  even  have  a  reading  room  attached.  There 
is  an  increasing  conviction  on  the  part  of  the  mis- 
sionaries that  the  social  applications  of  Christianity 
are  particularly  adapted  to  opening  the  practical 
mind  of  China  to  the  Gospel  as  well  as  of  unmeasured 
importance  to  the  limitless  needs  of  the  people. 

Christian  Unity  in  The  third  movement  is  the  steady 
China.  progress  toward  union  of  churches  and 

denominations  in  building  up  the  native  church. 
Local  churches  of  different  denominations  in  many 
cities,  such  as  Hangchow,  Tientsin,  and  Nanking,  al- 
ready have  adopted  common  programs  for  city  evan- 
gelization campaigns  and  reform  work.  Even  more 
significant  are  the  broader  movements  of  which  Pro- 
fessor Hill  writes  that  today  Christian  unity  is  "perhaps 
the  foremost  subject  before  missionaries  and  native 
Christians."  The  Anglican  churches  are  now  one 
body.  The  Lutherans,  though  having  missions  from 
several  European  countries  and  America,  are  pre- 
paring to  unite.  Furthermore,  "in  January  of  last 
year  (19 19)  representatives  of  all  the  different  Con- 
gregational churches  springing  from  English  and 
American  missions,  met  with  the  Presbyterians  and 
drafted  a  plan  of  union,  a  plan  that  has  been  since 


China  83 

approved  also  by  several  Baptist  bodies,  and  is  being 
considered  by  other  denominations/'* 

Rising  Leadership  No  small  part  of  this  movement  to- 
of  Chinese  ward  union  has  been  due  to  the  wishes 

Christians.  ^^^  convictions  of  the  Chinese  Chris- 

tians themselves.  The  Chinese  are  now  coming 
forward  into  the  councils  of  the  Christian  churches 
and  the  missionary  agencies  and  undertaking  larger 
responsibilities  for  leadership  and  activity.  This  is 
a  splendid  sign  and  will  mean  much  in  the  stability 
of  the  Church  and  the  adaptation  of  it  to  Chinese 
character  and  Chinese  needs.  A  striking  example 
of  this,  the  fourth  development,  is  seen  in  a  move- 
ment begun  at  a  Conference  at  Lily  Valley,  the 
"Northfield  of  China,"  in  the  summer  of  191 8.  Here 
at  a  Personal  Workers  Conference  "a  little  group  of 
Chinese  women  were  one  afternoon  praying  together 
when  it  suddenly  came  to  them,  as  if  it  were  the  voice 
of  God  speaking,  that,  while  trying  to  save  the  souls 
of  those  in  their  immediate  vicinity,  they  must  not 
forget  the  unevangelized  provinces  in  the  distant 
part  of  China. "t  The  approval  of  the  Conference 
was  immediate  and  agreement  was  reached  to  under- 
take work  in  the  province  of  Yunnan,  "an  enormous 
territory  without  one  ordained  Chinese  preacher  or  a 
single  foreign-trained  Chinese  doctor." 

The  response  from  the  Chinese  churches  has 
been  immediate  and  generous.  Churches  and  indi- 
viduals all  over  China  began  sending  contributions 
and  asking  for  information.  "A  woman  who  is  in- 
terested in  Christianity,  but  whose  husband  will  not 

*W.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  of  the  World,  May,  1920,  p.  435. 
tMary  Niiide  Gamewell,  New  Life  Currents  in  China,  p.  212. 


84  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

allow  her  to  go  inside  a  church,  brought  two  dollars 
to  one  of  the  collections;  soon  she  returned  with  all 
her  carefully  hoarded  savings,  one  hundred  dollars. 
Several  government  school  teachers,  earning  sixty 
dollars  a  month,  plan  to  live  on  ten  and  give  the 
rest."  Some  of  the  denominations  are  setting  aside 
part  of  their  income,  to  support  the  work.  When  the 
investigating  committee  completes  its  task  and  re- 
ports, a  "National  Missionary  Society  of  China"  will 
be  organized.  It  is  significant  that  this  movement 
is  Chinese  and  interdenominational.  Several  denom- 
inational "home  missionary  agencies"  also  exist. 
Even  more  striking  is  the  "China  for  Christ"  move- 
ment in  which  Chinese  Christians  have  definitely  as- 
sumed the  leadership  and  the  responsibility. 

THE  TASK  OF  CHRISTIANITY  IN    CHINA 

The  Task  of  Sound  and  strong  as  are  the  achieve- 

Christianity  in  ments  of  missionary  work  in  China 
^^^"^'  and  fine   as   is   the   promise   of  the 

Chinese  churches,  the  task  that  lies  ahead  is  prodi- 
gious. Even  within  the  Church  Chinese  find  it  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  overcome  the  ancient  customs 
from  which  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  intends  that  they  shall 
be  free.  Chinese  Christian  men  often  continue  their 
prejudice  against  the  education  of  their  wives  and 
daughters.  Again,  though  the  Christian  popula- 
tion is  many  times  more  literate  than  the  non-Chris- 
tian, hundreds  on  hundreds  of  churches  in  country- 
side and  town  have  but  one  or  two  members  who  can 
read  at  all,  and  they  with  difficulty.  The  new  phonet- 
ic puts  a  magnificent  opportunity  before  the  Chris- 
tian forces,  but  one  which  requires  great  labors  to 


China  85 

grasp.  Trained  leadership  for  local  churches  and  for 
Christian  schools  is  a  crying  need  to  meet  which  will 
require  years.  In  school  and  college  Chinese  young 
men  and  women  are  learning  a  new  freedom,  which  has 
its  dangers  as  well  as  its  glories  and  the  most  careful 
guidance  is  required. 

And  how  vast  is  the  need  outside  of  the  Christian 
community!  If  the  United  States  had  only  as  many 
Protestant  Christians  as  China  in  proportion  to  the 
population  there  would  be  only  about  110,000  or  as 
many  as  are  in  all  the  Societies  of  Friends  (Quakers). 
The  measurement  of  this  vastness,  however,  is  not 
simply  in  terms  of  numbers.  We  have  seen  how 
tremendously  China  needs  Christianity  to  erad- 
icate superstition  by  supplanting  the  fear  of  evil 
demons  and  hostile  spirit  forces,  the  tortures  of  ani- 
mistic medicine,  the  terror  of  the  unknown  world  be- 
yond the  grave,  by  trust  in  Him  who  is  at  one  and  the 
same  time  Lord  of  the  Living  and  the  Dead  and  the 
All-wise,  All-loving  Father.  We  have  seen,  too,  how 
greatly  if  China  is  to  Hve  as  a  nation  in  the  modern 
world,  if  her  merchants  and  students,  her  statesmen 
and  common  people  are  to  live  with  one  another  and 
with  other  men  and  nations  in  trust  and  good  will, 
in  the  spirit  of  public  service,  she  must  have  those 
ever-advancing  moral  standards  of  the  Gospel  of 
Christ  and  that  personal  power  which  the  Spirit  of 
Christ  brings,  that  spiritual  quality  which  Chris- 
tianity has  and  the  religions  of  China  lack.  There  is 
no  place  where  Christianity  is  more  a  necessity  or 
more  powerful  for  the  individual  and  the  common 
weal  than  in  the  home,  and  it  is  just  here  that  it  must 
come  into  closest  grips  with  the  sorrows  and  fears  and 


86  The  Kingdom   and  the  Nations 

ills  of  China.  In  the  homes  the  roots  of  custom  have 
fast  hold,  here  superstition  clings  most  tightly,  and 
ignorance  and  poverty  bind  men  closest. 

Thus  into  the  hands  of  China's  women — illiterate, 
tradition-bound,  socially  powerful,  of  great  native 
ability — have  been  placed  potentialities  of  good 
unmeasured.  Professor  Hill  reports  the  case  of  a 
man  thirty-eight  years  old,  financially  independ- 
ent, who  was  held  back  from  becoming  a  Christian 
because  his  mother  threatened  to  throw  him  out  of 
the  house  on  hearing  of  it.  Dr.  Hill  adds;  "Exam- 
ples could  be  multiplied  of  the  power  of  the  Chinese 
women;  it  has  been  ultraconservative  because,  lack- 
ing education,  they  cling  to  old  ideas  and  customs."* 
May  this  not  mean  that  the  word  of  the  veteran  mis- 
sionary. Dr.  W.  A.  P.  Martin,  will  turn  out  to  be 
true?  He  said:  "Woman,  ignorant,  has  made  China 
Buddhist;  will  not  woman,  educated,  make  China 
Christian?'*! 

Christian  China's  If  the  prophecics  of  a  Christian  China 
Need  of  America,  are  to  be  fulfilled,  every  force  that  is 
potential  for  China's  good  and  Christianity's  advance 
must  be  stimulated  and  reinforced  and  these  rein- 
forcements must  be  given  while  the  doors  are  open. 

"The  tremendous  task  before  the  missionary  just  now  is 
to  place  Christianity  before  China  so  clearly  and  so 
fully  that  if  the  world  rulers  refuse  to  deal  justly  with 
her  she  will  cling  to  the  Gospel  because  she  has  learned 
to  prize  it  for  its  own  sake,  and  has  grown  able  to  dis- 
tinguish between  the  selfishness  of  politicians  and  the 
Spirit  of  Christ/'J 


*Missionary  Review  of  the  World,  May,  1920,  p.  436. 

tCited  by  Mary  Ninde  Gamewell,  New  Life  Currents  in  China,  p.  I44. 

JW.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  oj  the  World,  May,  1920,  p. 438. 


China  87 

Thus,  here,  as  in  the  case  of  Japan,  the  duty  of  those 
who  in  America  work  for  Christ's  world-wide  King- 
dom is  twofold.  First,  there  must  be  the  reinforcement, 
with  staff  and  equipment  and  funds,  of  the  mission- 
ary enterprise.  Every  missionary  and  every  insti- 
tution should  be  so  equipped  and  so  supported  in 
prayer  that  every  action  may  make  for  permanent, 
thorough,  and  widespread  effectiveness.  Special 
provision  must  be  secured  in  funds  and  personnel,  to 
make  possible  the  literacy  of  every  Christian  in  the 
shortest  possible  time,  and  for  the  creation  of  abun- 
dant good  literature  in  phonetic  and  colloquial 
Mandarin.  No  single  thing  will  do  more  for  the 
whole  mass  of  Christians  and  for  their  pov/er  to  in- 
fluence non-Christians.  The  educational  program 
must  also  be  increased  in  equipment  and  personnel  to 
give  more  vocational  work  that  the  industrial  and 
commercial  leaders  of  the  coming  day  may  be  men 
of  the  highest  Christian  calibre,  both  for  the  benefit 
of  the  nation  and  the  Church. 

Secondly,  every  possible  step  must  be  taken  to 
prevent  avaricious  treatment  of  China  by  any  foreign 
powers  or  agencies  and  to  teach  her  politicians  that 
the  nations  of  the  world  have  more  genuine  and 
honorable  interest  in  China  than  supplying  them  with 
bribes  for  concessions.  The  efforts  of  American  liquor 
interests  to  transfer  outlawed  breweries  to  China,  of 
American  tobacco  corporations  to  put  "a  cigarette  in 
the  mouth  of  every  man,  woman,  and  child  in  China," 
the  unregulated  and  evil  energies  of  the  opium  trade, 
— such  activities  as  these  must  become  uncivilized  and 
wicked  in  the  eyes  of  all  governments  and  all  peoples. 
The  spirit  in  which  America  returned  the  indemnity 


68  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

money  to  China,  in  which  John  Davis  and  Gladys 
Williams  and  Horace  Pitkin,  children  of  the  martyrs 
of  1900,  are  returning  to  China  to  serve  and  help, 
must  be  the  spirit  of  Americans  dealing  with  China 
and  the  spirit  for  which  America  must  continue  to 
stand  among  the  nations  of  the  world.  When 
Christianity  shall  have  been  firmly  and  powerfully 
established  far  and  wide  in  China,  we  may  be  sure 
that  the  future  of  Christianity  in  Asia  can  never  be 
shaken  and  that  a  great  foundation  stone  for  the 
Kingdom  of  God  on  earth  has  been  set  in  place. 


CHINA  S    HUMILIATION 

*'When  Bishop  Birney  came  to  preside  over  his  first  Conference, 
there  was  one  of  the  inevitable  receptions.  There  were  all  the  usual 
formalities,  and  then  the  tea  and  cakes,  and  the  cakes  bore  the  legend: 
'Never  forget  the  day  upon  which  Japan  served  the  twenty-one  demands!* 
That  China  celebrates  that  day  each  year  as  a  national  day  of  humilia- 
tion bodes  evil  for  the  peace  of  the  Orient." — Christian  Advocate,  Dec. 
16,  1920,  p.  1679. 


PERILS    OF    PROGRESS 

"In  the  city  of  Pingyangfu,  I  sometimes  call  on  wives  of  the  officers 
of  the  new  Chinese  army.  In  their  houses  you  see  nothing  like  a  door- 
god  or  a  kitchen-god.  Even  the  ancestral  tablet  may  not  be  there. 
They  will  tell  you  proudly:  'Yes,  my  husband  belongs  to  the  No-god 
Society.  We  are  enlightened  people.  See  my  shoes!  I  no  longer 
cramp  my  feet  in  the  old  degraded  Chinese  way.  We  understand  that 
men  and  women  are  on  an  equality.  We  understand  freedom  in  mar- 
riage. Everything  is  changed.  We  belong  to  the  No-god  Society.'  " 
— A  correspondent  in  China's  Millions. 


NOTES    ON    NEW    READERS 

"You  will  rejoice  that  another  servant  has  told  Miss  E.  in  a  Pho- 
netic Script  letter  that  he  is  the  Lord's.  Isn't  it  lovely?  He  has  been 
asking  our  teacher  and  others  about  points  that  were  not  clear.  And 
now  he  has  taken  a  stand!  It  is  worth  while  to  teach  script  with  such 
results,  isn't  it?"  ,  ,  .  .  "Six  Bible  women  in  the  Spring  have  taught 
thirty-one  who  could  not  read  to  read  readily  in  the  script.    These 


China  89 

people,  mostly  women,  were  from  20  to  60  years  of  age  .  .  ,  Of  these 
31,  13  were  Christians  but  unable  to  read.  Of  the  non-Christians  nearly 
all  have  already  applied  for  baptism.  It  took  from  one  to  four  weeks, 
generally  three."  .  .  .  "It  is  the  first  letter  of  any  kind  that  Mrs.  Ting 
has  ever  written  .  ,  .  The  old  lady  of  70,  of  whom  I  have  told  you  be- 
fore, has  been  her  only  teacher;  Mrs.  Ting  herself  is  about  40  years  old." 
...  "A  young  girl  from  a  heathen  house,  who  learned  the  script  here 
three  or  four  months  ago,  has  now  been  in  for  a  ten  days'  Bible  class, 
several  people  in  her  house  have  become  quite  interested  in  the  truth, 
and  I  am  going  to  her  village  to-morrow  for  a  week's  visit." — Phonetic 
Promotion  Committee  Bulletins. 

ivi  china's  new  factories 

It  sounded  quite  familiar  to  be  told  again  and  again,  "These  workers 
are  better  off  in  the  factory  than  at  home."  The  factory  is  warm,  their 
homes  are  cold.  This  was  a  strong  argument  for  the  twelve-hour  day 
and  night  shifts  in  cotton  mills  and  the  fourteen  and  even  longer  hours 
in  silk  filatures.  Over  against  this  one  sees  the  women  and  children 
huddled  together  walking  through  the  dark  at  4.30  and  5  o'clock  in  the 
morning  to  reach  the  factory  from  their  far-distant  home  by  6  o'clock. 
The  crying  of  the  children  rouses  many  a  missionary  who  lives  by  the 
side  of  such  roads  ...  I  discussed  the  hours  with  several  groups  of 
workers — always  mothers  with  children.  The  mothers  said,  with  sad 
fatalism,  the  mill  always  meant  death  after  six  or  ten  years  at  the  most 
and  that  it  gave  no  time  for  the  home,  children,  or  other  interests  .  .  . 
Nowhere  in  the  world  are  there  sadder,  thinner-looking  children  than 
in  the  cotton  mills  or  silk  filatures  of  Shanghai,  China  ...  In  several 
more  or  less  casual  studies  it  is  said  that  in  China  a  family  of  father, 
mother,  and  five  children  begin  to  save  if  they  have  an  income  of  more 
than  ^200  a  year.  This,  at  least,  gives  some  notion  of  the  standard  of 
life  among  the  masses.  This  includes  no  education,  a  rice  and  curry 
diet,  etc.  No  one  has  established  a  minimum  requisite  for  decent  liv- 
ing. This  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  services  that  can  be  rendered 
China.  Today  the  workers  in  industry  earn  a  minimum  of  ten  cents 
and  a  maximum  of  thirty-five  or  forty  cents  a  day.  Within  the  last 
two  years  wages  have  been  raised  twenty-five  per  cent.  In  the  silk 
filatures  the  children  stand.  Often  they  are  so  small  they  have  to 
raise  their  arms  and  stir  the  cocoons  in  hot  water  at  about  a  level  with 
their  shoulders.  When  the  cocoons  begin  to  "open"  they  lift  them  out 
and  keep  supplied  for  spinning  two  women  seated  on  the  other  side  of 
the  table.  The  water  is  kept  boiling  at  180°  and  the  room  is,  therefore, 
hot  and  moist  with  steam.  The  children  in  many  places  have  to  go 
outside  into  a  cold  room  for  a  new  supply  of  cocoons.  In  the  cotton 
mills  the  children  of  twelve  to  sixteen,  rather  than  the  older  women,  are 
found  watching  the  spinning  frames,  tying  the  broken  threads,  and 
keeping  the  spools  of  full  thread  supplied.  In  the  match  factories  the 
children  receive  one  cent  a  hundred  for  filling  the  boxes.  In  both  the 
cotton  and  silk  mills  there  were  in  evidence  the  foremen  going  about 
with  bamboo  switches  to  keep  the  children  at  their  work. — Report  of 
the  Deputation  from  the  Federation  of  Women  s  Boards  of  Foreign  Missions  j 
1920,  pp.  44-45. 


CHAPTER  THREE 

V.     INDIA 

Of  all  the  great  lands  of  the  Orient  there  is  none  so 
inscrutable  to  the  Westerner,  none  whose  thoughts 
and  ideals  are  so  far  from  Western  thoughts,  as 
India.  Vast,  mysterious,  crowded,  at  times  drab,  at 
times  colorful,  bejeweled,  yet  poverty-stricken,  filled 
with  Oriental  wisdom,  yet  pitifully  illiterate,  now 
amazingly  cruel  and  indifferent,  now  rising  to  en- 
viable heights  of  religious  devotion,  India  seems  to 
baffle  understanding.  India  is  more  unlike  China 
and  Japan  than  they  are  unlike  America.  Professor 
W.  B.  Hill  skillfully  contrasts  Japan,  China,  and 
India  thus: 

"Japan  Is  picturesque,  dainty,  toy-like, — Its  tre- 
mendous strength  and  seriousness  can  with  difficulty 
be  realized;  China  Is  overpowering,  externally  unat- 
tractive, problematic;  India  is  mysterious,  religious, 
sad.  In  Japan  everybody  smiles  as  a  matter  of  polite- 
ness, an  empty  form;  In  China  many  smile  from  good 
nature  and  good  feeling;  in  India  nobody  smiles — life 
is  too  hard  and  man  too  Insignificant.  In  Japan  the 
dominant  Impulse  Is  patriotism,  concentrated  in  adora- 
tion of  Mikado  as  divine  head  of  the  Empire;  In  China 
It  Is  humanity,  a  recognition  of  a  neighbor's  rights,  a 
comradeship  in  his  joys  and  sorrows;  in  India  It  is  re- 
ligion, the  dwelling  on  things  unseen  and  eternal,  the 
devotion  of  oneself  to  powers  divine.  Japan  Is  a  child 
in  a  new  school — curious,  elated,  self-confident;  China 
is  a  child  In  the  old,  dull  home,  toiling  patiently,  good- 
naturedly  at  familiar  tasks;  India  is  an  orphaned  child — 
lonely,  hungry,  full  of  fear,  lifting  Its  hands  In  prayer 
to  the  vast  sky."* 


*Missionary  Review  of  the  JVorld,  May,  1920,  p.  445. 


92  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

India  the  One    element    in    Indian    life    which 

Kaleidoscopic.  makes  it  hard  to  grasp  is  its  com- 
plexity. Its  vast  population  of  three  hundred  and 
fifteen  millions — nearly  three  times  the  population 
of  the  United  States  in  less  than  half  the  area — is  sub- 
divided to  an  unrealized  degree  by  religion,  language, 
race,  caste,  social  condition,  government,  occupation. 
There  are  twelve  languages,  each  spoken  by  at  least 
five  million  people,  and  more  than  two  hundred  lesser 
languages  and  dialects.  Across  these  language  bar- 
riers stretch  the  great  walls  of  caste;  at  the  top  the 
upper  castes,  containing  eighteen  million  people,  be- 
low them  the  great  bulk  of  the  population  in  the  mid- 
dle castes,  and  at  the  bottom  fifty-three  million 
"untouchables."  These  great  caste  divisions  are 
subdivided  into  more  than  three  thousand  castes  and 
sub-castes  who  may  not  intermarry  nor  even  eat 
together.  There  are  also  special  classes  of  people, 
such  as  the  five  and  a  half  million  ''holy  men,"  who 
live  on  the  rest  of  the  population  by  begging,  and 
more  than  twenty-five  million  widows,  millions  of 
whom  are  to  Western  thought  hardly  more  than 
children. 

More  than  one-fifth  of  the  population  of  India 
recognize  Allah  as  the  one  God  and  Mohammed  as 
his  prophet.  Three  and  a  half  million  own  Christ 
the  Lord  of  All.  But  to  the  rest,  Parsees,  Jains, 
Buddhists,  Sikhs,  Hindus,  and  unclassifiable  wor- 
shippers of  nature  spirits,  the  gods  are  almost  with- 
out number  from  Krishna  and  Shiv  and  Vishnu, 
worshipped  by  tens  of  millions,  to  the  local  idols  of  a 
village  of  a  hundred  people.  Again,  though  the 
final  power  is  the  British  Government,  which  rules 


India  93 

directly  more  than  244,000,000  of  India's  inhabitants, 
the  remaining  millions  are  under  the  administration 
of  native  princes,  such  as  the  Gaekwar  of  Baroda  and 
the  Nizam  of  Hyderabad. 

India's  evil  trio 
India's  Evil  Trio:  Over  all  the  teeming  life  of  this  com- 
ignorance.  plex  India,  a  trio  of  evils,  as  in  China, 

holds  direful  sway,  and,  as  in  China,  each  serves  to 
keep  the  others  on  the  throne.  Poverty,  ignorance, 
and  caste  are  the  masters  of  India.  Not  even  yet, 
in  spite  of  all  the  assaults  of  modern  Occidental  life, 
is  their  hold  loosened  upon  the  great  masses  of  peo- 
ple. How  strong  is  the  hold  of  ignorance  when  of  the 
entire  population  only  eleven  men  in  every  hundred 
can  read,  out  of  every  hundred  women  but  one! 
Among  the  Christian  population  with  all  its  empha- 
sis on  education  only  twenty-nine  in  a  hundred  men, 
twelve  in  a  hundred  women  are  literate. 

"The  uneducated  laborer  is  at  the  mercy  of  his  em- 
ployer. He  cannot  read  the  document  he  is  asked  to 
sign — by  touching  the  pen  of  one  who  writes  his  name 
for  him — and  finds  too  late  that  he  has  signed  away  his 
property  or  his  liberty.  Being  unable  to  count,  he 
cannot  refute  his  master's  statement  that  the  debt  which 
has  brought  him  to  serfdom  has  not  been  worked  off. 
Through  ignorance  he  is  at  the  mercy  of  blackmailing 
constables  and  village  officials.  When  he  goes  to  a 
distant  place  as  a  sepoy  or  a  coolie,  he  has  to  pay  some 
one  to  write  a  letter  to  his  father.  In  other  words,  he 
has  no  real  independence."* 

Several    influences    combine    to    make    the    over- 
throw of  this  condition  tremendously  difficult.     Dif- 


*ViUage  Education  in  India,  p.  22. 


94  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ferent  tongues  are  in  common  use  in  some  localities. 
Some  are  dying  out, — which  shall  be  learned? 
There  are  as  many  different  script  forms  or  written 
alphabets  as  in  all  the  rest  of  the  world  put  together, 
most  of  them  having  from  two  hundred  to  five  hundred 
letters,  extremely  hard  for  common  people  in  an  illit- 
erate environment  to  master.  India  needs  what 
China  is  securing — a  simplified  written  alphabet. 
Moreover,  perhaps  eighty  per  cent,  of  the  population 
live  in  agricultural  villages  averaging  three  hundred 
and  sixty  inhabitants.  There  are  over  half  a  million 
such  villages  without  schools  of  any  kind.  Less  than 
3  per  cent,  of  British  India's  population  are  in  ele- 
mentary schools  and  lo  per  cent,  of  these  drop  out 
before  learning  to  read.  The  caste  lines  make  it  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  gather  into  one  school  the  sixty 
children  of  school  age  who  live  in  an  average  village. 

Where  so  few  are  literate,  public  opinion  cares 
little  for  schooling  and  the  villagers  are  generally  too 
poor  to  pay  for  it.  It  has  also  been  the  policy  of  the 
British  Government  to  go  very  slowly  with  the  edu- 
cation of  the  masses  lest  eventually  unrest  make 
government  even  more  difficult  than  it  now  is.  Still 
more  appalling  is  the  estimate  that  at  least  thirty- 
nine  per  cent,  of  those  who  have  taken  the  average 
course  of  three  years  at  school  fall  back  in  a  few  years 
to  the  illiterate  level  of  the  mass.  Interesting  and 
profitable  literature  is  practically  unavailable  at  the 
price  which  they  could  afford  to  pay, — and  almost  so 
at  any  price. 

India's  Evil  Trio:    As  in  China,  this  ignorance,  maintain- 
Poverty.  ed  by  poverty,  is  the  barrier  to  pov- 

erty's destruction.     Better  methods  of  agriculture, 


India  95 

greater  skill  in  the  production  of  more  effective  tools, 
the  diversification  of  industries  and  the  lessening  of 
dependence  on  the  land  and  the  rains,  all  factors  in 
reduction  of  poverty,  depend  on  educational  pro- 
cesses. The  estimates  that  seventy  million  people 
continually  go  hungry,  that  the  daily  per  capita  in- 
come is  about  one  and  a  half  cents,  are  familiar. 

"India  is  the  farmer  with  the  wretchedest  of  imple- 
ments and  the  most  primitive  forms  of  agriculture, 
struggling  to  win  a  scanty  harvest  from  an  exhausted 
soil.  India  is  the  craftsman  toiling  long  hours  for  the 
smallest  of  wages;  it  is  the  vender  of  the  cheapest  wares 
for  a  pittance  of  prices;  it  is  the  timid  woman  bending 
over  her  cooking  pot  in  a  hovel  destitute  of  every  com- 
fort, almost  of  everything.  India  is  the  land  where  the 
average  income  of  the  masses  is  ten  dollars  a  year,  where 
one-half  the  people  never  know  a  full  meal  and  usually 
go  to  bed  hungry,  where  famine  sweeps  away  thousands 
if  the  rains  of  a  single  season  fail."* 

Many  causes  in  addition  to  those  indicated  above 
contribute  to  it.  British  commentators  on  the  Brit- 
ish administration  of  India  point  out  that  the  opera- 
tion of  export  and  import  duties  in  favor  of  British 
manufacturers  destroyed  Indian  industries  and  that 
much  of  the  profit  on  those  which  remain  go  out  of 
India  into  the  hands  of  British  stockholders.!  It  is 
even  asserted  that  the  extreme  poverty  of  India 
"did  not  exist  before  England  started  to  drain  India 
of  her  wealth"  and  that  such  poverty  "does  not  exist 
in  neighboring  equally  densely  populated  countries 
that  are  not  directly  under  British  rule.*'{   However 

•W.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  of  the  World,  May,  1920,  p.  455. 
tSee  citations  in  F.  B.  Fisher,  India's  Silent  Revolution,  pp.  35-37,  56. 
jHerbert  Adams  Gibbons,  The  New  Map  of  Asia,  p.  55. 


g6  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

this  may  be,  local  conditions  have  contributed  great- 
ly to  the  intensifying  of  poverty.  The  investiga- 
tions of  the  Commission  on  Inquiry  into  Village  Edu- 
cation in  India  showed  that  the  most  common  causes 
of  poverty  are  "debt  with  high  interest,  laziness,  ex- 
ploitation, ignorance  and  lack  of  skill,  drink,  extrav- 
agance, and  conditions  resulting  from  famines,  epi- 
demics, and  sickness."  Debts  have  in  many  cases 
been  contracted  for  dowries  for  daughters  who  must 
be  married  off,  to  pay  the  land  tax,  or  to  get  the  tools 
and  seed  for  working  the  land.  Exorbitant  interest 
rates  exacted  by  native  usurers  not  only  eat  up  any 
possible  profit,  but  so  roll  up  the  debt  that  it  is  some- 
times carried  from  one  generation  to  another  or  the 
land  is  surrendered  to  the  usurer.  Insurance  com- 
panies calculate  the  average  expectation  of  life  at 
birth  in  India  as  twenty-two  years,  in  England,  forty- 
six.  The  record  of  nearly  fifty  thousand  deaths  in 
India  showed  that  in  over  thirty  thousand  of  these 
cases  there  had  been  no  medical  attention  whatever. 
In  the  province  of  Bengal,  outside  of  Calcutta,  there 
is  only  one  physician  to  each  38,000  people.  We 
know  in  America  how  swiftly  sickness  brings  the  poor 
below  the  line  of  self-support.  How  terrific  must  be 
its  burden  on  the  people  of  India  under  such  condi- 
tions as  these!  Small  wonder  that  when  the  rain- 
bringing  winds  come  empty-handed  or  not  at  all,  the 
Government  must  speedily  seek  measures  of  famine 
relief  and  that  orphans  are  so  numerous! 

India's  Evil  Trio:  Superstition  plays  much  the  part  in 
Caste.  India  that  it  plays  in  China.     Mil- 

lions believe  that  the  world  is  in  control  of  evil  de- 
mons, against  which  amulets  must  be  worn,  to  whom 


India  97 

sacrifices  must  be  offered,  to  appease  their  wrath  and 
avert  evil.  Caste,  the  outstanding  effect  of  super- 
stition, and  the  greatest  cause  of  misfortune,  is 
wrought  into  the  very  texture  of  common  thought. 
It  is  so  completely  sanctioned  by  the  religious  beliefs 
of  this  most  religious  land  that  to  oppose  it  approach^ 
es  sacrilege.  Every  man  must  live  and  die  in  the 
caste  in  which  he  was  born.  When  death  comes,  the 
wheel  of  life  carries  him  on  to  rebirth  m  a  higher  caste, 
if  perchance  he  has  gained  merit;  if  not,  to  a  lower, 
even  to  rebirth  as  a  dog  or  a  woman;  to  revolt  is  to 
endanger  one's  eternal  future.  The  masses  live  un- 
der a  life-sentence  of  degradation.  Initiative  brings 
sorrow  and  persecution . 

And  it  is  not  only  that  these  masses  are  robbedof  de- 
cent human  treatment  and  deprived  of  hope.  India 
herself  is  robbed  of  her  strength.  "There  are  no  un- 
developed resources  in  India  comparable  to  the  neg- 
lected and  uncultivated  powers  of  the  masses." 
Suppose  that  a  laborer  "is  a  member  of  the  sweep- 
er caste,  so  that  all  he  is  allowed  to  do  is  to 
sweep;  then  though  there  may  be  a  surplus  of 
sweepers  and  a  lack  of  other  laborers,  he  cannot 
accept  any  work  except  that  of  his  caste,  and, 
if  there  is  no  demand  for  a  sweeper,  he  must  fold  his 
arms  and  starve.  He  cannot  even  appeal  to  mem- 
bers of  a  more  prosperous  caste  for  charity;  to  give 
it  would  bring  pollution  upon  both  donor  and  re- 
cipient."* Moreover,  since  marriage  is  only  permit- 
ted between  members  of  the  same  caste,  and  the  an- 
cient Indian  law  declares  that  parents  sin  who  do 
not  secure  husbands  for  their  daughters  before  the 

•W.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  of  the  Worlds  May,  1920,  p.  455. 


98  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

latter  reach  the  age  of  puberty,  the  demand  for  hus- 
bands has  forced  the  extension  of  dowries  to  figures 
far  beyond  the  means  of  the  parent.  There  is  re- 
corded the  story  of  a  fourteen-year-old  bride  who 
committed  suicide  that  her  father  might  not  mort- 
gage his  house  and  put  his  life  in  pawn  to  secure  the 
800  rupees  cash  and  1200  rupees  in  jewelry  demanded 
by  the  prospective  son-in-law.*  What  these  condi- 
tions of  poverty,  ignorance,  and  caste  mean  to  the 
womanhood  of  India,  the  readers  of  these  text-books 
already  know. 

India's  problems  and  India's  solutions 
India's  Religion     Though  to  a  few  in  the  educated  upper 
and  India's  classcs,  particularly   to   those  whose 

Progress.  ancestral  beliefs  have  been  upset  by 

Western  education,  religion  is  a  matter  of  indiffer- 
ence, India  is  still  more  deeply  stirred  by  the  things 
of  religion,  feels  them  more  universally  powerful  in 
daily  life  than  the  people  of  any  other  non-Christian 
land  in  the  world.  A  missionary,  writing  of  the 
great  middle  classes  of  South  India  in  particular, 
says: 

"He  (the  middle-class  man)  takes  a  real  interest  in  re- 
ligious practices  and  knows  by  heart  many  of  the  old 
vernacular  religious  poems.  To  him  the  temple  is  the 
place  where  God  may  be  met  and  the  ceremonies  of 
the  temple  the  way  to  divine  blessings.  Millions  of  the 
people  of  the  middle  classes  go  to  sacred  places,  make 
long  pilgrimages  and  spend  much  money  in  order  to 
get  something  extra  which  they  believe  they  can  obtain 
in  this  way.  ...  In  many  a  middle-class  home 
daily  worship  is  practiced  with  sincere  reverence.    The 


^Indian  Social  Reformer ^  Feb.,  1914,  p.  aio. 


India  99 

idol  is  bathed  daily  and  smeared  with  sandalwood 
paste.  .  .  In  the  north  of  India  .  .  the  peo- 
ple will  listen  for  hours  to  the  singing  of  devotional 
songs  and  to  the  teaching  of  religious  truth  in  the  form 
of  Harikatha."* 

This  emphasis  on  religion  runs  through  every  aspect 
of  life.  The  Bishop  of  Bombay  writes:  **So  far  as 
I  am  aware,  Indian  opinion  is  all  but  unanimous  that 
education  is  a  religious  work,  should  be  imparted  by 
religious  persons,  and  should  have  religion  at  its 
center.  The  only  exceptions  to  such  views  would  be 
found  here  and  there  in  men  whose  minds  have  been 
strongly  Europeanized.  The  failure  of  government 
education  in  India  to  command  respect  or  to  attract 
the  hearts  of  students  is  due  mainly  to  the  fact  that 
it  is  secular."t  We  have  already  seen  how  powerful 
a  factor  religion  is  in  maintaining  caste. 

India's  religious  intensity  is  thus  the  great  bar- 
rier to  her  progress  and,  at  the  same  time,  a  great 
potential  influence  for  it.  It  is  a  striking  fact  that 
the  movements  for  social  reform  and  for  political 
liberty  have  a  definite  religious  connection.  The 
most  aggressive  reform  sect,  the  Arya  Samaj,  with 
its  many  schools,  its  orphanages,  its  work  in  famine 
relief,  its  hostility  to  caste  and  superstition,  its  vio- 
lent nationalism,  is  bitterly  opposed  to  Christianity 
and  lays  great  stress  on  the  revival  of  the  ancient 
Hindu  religion.  The  Servants  of  India,  a  remark- 
able society  of  genuine  promoters  of  India's  welfare, 
require  a  consecration  to  the  society's  aims  which  is 
distinctly  religious.     The  Brahma  Samaj,  also  active 

•H.  A.  Popley,  International  Review  of  Missions,  July,  191 8,  pp.  296-8. 
^International  Review  oj  Missions y  Jan.,  1920,  p.  39. 


loo  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

in  social  reform,  is  primarily  a  religious  society,  seek- 
ing the  purification  of  India's  religion. 

India's  Attack  on  Many  Other  elements  in  Indian  life 
India's  Evils.  are  working  to  loosen  the  hold  of  the 
evil  trio.  A  very  definite  attack  on  caste  is  being 
made  both  from  below  and  from  above.  The  Arya 
Samaj  has  developed  a  ritual  by  which  outcastes  may 
be  "cleansed"  and  made  "touchable"  and  has  put 
it  into  effect  among  tens  of  thousands.  Strangely 
enough,  orthodox  Hindus,  who  are  hostile  to  such 
procedure,  nevertheless  accept  the  purified  outcastes 
as  touchable.  The  upper  and  middle  castes  are  be- 
ginning to  recognize  a  responsibility  for  the  welfare 
of  the  lower.  A  man  of  high  social  position  recently 
declared  to  a  mass  meeting  of  Panchamas  (outcastes) : 

"You  must  assert  your  position  and  claim  equality  with 
any  other  man  in  the  country.  If  you  as  a  community 
will  raise  yourself  and  try  your  best  to  improve  your 
position,  and  shake  off  this  habit  of  social  inferiority 
and  think  you  are  equal  to  the  highest  caste  in  the 
land,  your  position  is  assured."* 

While  the  British  Government  has  never  undertaken 
to  interfere  with  caste,  some  of  the  native  states  have 
taken  advanced  positions  in  this  matter.  In  the  en- 
lightened state  of  Baroda  a  person  is  protected  from 
fine  or  excommunication  from  his  caste  for  violation 
of  a  caste  rule,  if  he  can  prove  to  the  court  that  the 
rule  is  opposed  to  public  morals,  restricts  intermar- 
riage, is  ruinously  expensive,  needlessly  checks  travel, 
hinders  the  welfare  of  members  of  the  caste,  or  is  dis- 
approved by  at  least  one-fourth  the  adult  members 
of  the  caste.     Meanwhile  some  of  the  depressed  class- 

*International  Review  of  Missions^  July,  191 8,  p.  302. 


India  ioi 

es  themselves  have  been  active  in  their  own  behalf. 

"A  conference  of  two  thousand  of  the  most  advanced 
and  prosperous  members  of  the  outcaste  community, 
in  Bombay  in  the  spring  of  191 8,  passed  resolution  that 
they  would  not  permit  their  girls  to  marry  before  puber- 
ty, nor  the  boys  until  they  were  able  to  support  their 
wives  and  themselves;  that  they  v/ould  not  give  nor  ac- 
cept dowries,  and  limiting  their  outlay  on  marriages  in 
proportion  to  their  means.  They  pledged  themselves 
not  to  use  liquor,  demanded  government  aid  for  univer- 
sal primary  education,  endorsed  the  extension  of  co- 
operative saving  societies,  and  vowed  that  they  would 
live  on  terms  of  friendship  with  each  other,  ignoring  all 
caste  differences."* 

Striking  at  Indian  leaders  have  been  attacking 

Poverty.  the  drink  problem  and  here,  too,  re- 

ligion has  its  bearing,  for  the  use  of  intoxicating 
liquor  is  forbidden  to  followers  of  Mohammed. 
However,  the  vast  increase  in  the  consumption  of 
liquor  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  the  tax  revenue  from 
spirits,  beer  and  drugs  other  than  opium  increased 
from  ^14,000,000  in  1 897-1 898  to  $40,000,000  in 
1917-1918.  Many  of  India's  leaders  are  convinced 
prohibitionists.  Some  years  ago  the  Indian  repre- 
sentatives on  the  Viceroy's  Imperial  Legislative 
Council  presented  a  measure  looking  to  prohibition. 
The  measure  was  lost  with  every  British  member 
voting  against  it  and  every  Indian  member  for  it. 
Excise  is  one  of  the  subjects  transferred  to  the  Indian 
legislatures  by  the  Home  Rule  Bill  and  the  earnest- 
ness of  Indian  sentiment  will  no  doubt  soon  be  tested. 
An  attack  on  poverty  from  another  angle  is  being 
given  by  the  promotion  of  cooperative  societies,  a 
movement  initiated  by  the  British  authorities.     The 

•F.  B.  Fisher,  India  s  Silent  Revolution^  p.  no. 


I02  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

operations  of  these  societies  are  like  those  of  building 
and  loan  associations  in  this  country.  Their  effect 
has  been  so  wholesome  as  to  reduce  interest  charges 
generally  from  the  old  range  of  20  to  75  per  cent,  to 
9  to  18  per  cent.  These  societies  also  teach  thrift, 
promote  improved  agricultural  methods  and  com- 
munity betterment. 

INDIA  IN  THE  WAR 

India's  Contribu-  As  in  the  case  of  China,  the  results  of 
tion  to  the  War.  the  war  have  had  and  will  have  vastly 
more  effect  upon  India  than  the  war  itself.  India's 
activity  in  the  war,  however,  was  far  greater  than 
that  of  China.  The  princes  of  the  native  states 
quickly  responded  with  gifts  of  money,  of  troops,  of 
ambulances  and  guns;  the  Maharajah  of  Gwalior 
outfitted  an  entire  hospital  ship.  A  million  and  a 
quarter  Indian  troops  took  part  in  the  War.  Seven- 
ty thousand  fought  in  Flanders  in  the  first  few  weeks. 
At  Ypres  and  Gallipoh  and  Saloniki,  Punjabis  and 
Gurkhas,  Mara  this,  Sikhs  and  Rajputs  carried  their 
share  of  fighting  and  of  labor.  The  troops  for  the 
protection  of  the  Suez  Canal,  the  expeditions  into 
Mesopotamia  and  Palestine  were  largely  composed 
of  Indian  soldiers.  Mrs.  Sarojini  Naidu,  the  gifted 
Indian  poetess,  wrote: 

"Gathered  like  pearls  in  their  alien  graves. 
Silent  they  sleep  by  the  Persian  waves. 
Scattered  by  shells  on  Egyptian  sands. 
They  lie  with  pale  brows  and  brave,  broken  hands; 
They   are  scattered   like   blossoms   mown   down   by 

chance 
On    the    blood-brown    meadows     of    Flanders    and 

France." 


India  ioj 

Several  hundred  miles  of  Indian,  railway  track  were 
torn  up  to  be  relaid  in  Palestine.  Announcement 
was  made  of  a  gift  by  the  people  of  India  of  £100,000- 
000  to  the  British  War  Treasury.  In  spite  of  this 
extensive  contribution  of  the  British  administration 
in  India,  the  Hon.  E.  S.  Montagu,  Secretary  of 
State  for  India,  declared  to  the  British  Parliament 
that  "the  share  of  the  Indian  people  in  this  war  from 
the  beginning  to  the  end  had  always  been  greater 
and  more  willing  than  that  of  the  Indian 
government"  (the  British  administration).  India 
also  contributed  to  the  war  equipment  by  the  exten- 
sive production  of  cloth  for  uniforms  and  tents,  an 
industry  encouraged  by  the  British  because  manu- 
facturers in  England  were  unable  to  meet  the  prodi- 
gious war  demand. 

What  the  War  Mr.  Kipling  has  characterized  the 
Brought  to  India.  Indian  troops  in  France  as  the  "Eyes 
of  Asia,"  seeing  intimately  as  never  before  the  civil- 
ization of  Europe.  With  this  wider  vision  have  been 
acquired  many  new  ideas  revolutionary  to  ancient 
customs.  It  would  be  easy  to  overemphasize  the 
influence  of  the  home-coming  Indian  soldiers,  just 
as  the  expected  influence  of  returned  American  sol- 
diers has  been  found  to  be  greatly  exaggerated.  In 
restricted  localities  the  soldiers  have  contributed  to 
the  sifting  in  of  new  thoughts  and  some  of  them  have 
made  a  practice  of  traveling  from  village  to  village, 
describing  what  they  have  seen. 

Yet  the  war  broke  down  Indians  isolation.  More 
than  ever  before  the  tides  of  world  movements  roll  in 
upon  her  shores.  *  The  war  made  masses  of  men  realize. 


I04  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

as  they  had  never  done  before,  that  India  was  only 
part  of  a  larger  world,  whilst  the  fact  that  Indians 
were  taking  a  share  in  a  world  struggle  quickened 
their  sense  of  dignity  and  their  idea  of  what  India 
might  be,  if  its  powers  were  developed  or  allowed 
free  play/'*  Dumb  and  ignorant  as  the  masses  are, 
struggling  on  in  their  pitiful  ways,  they  are  on  the 
verge  of  experiences  that  will  eventually  bring  far- 
reaching  changes.  The  new  measures  in  British 
policy  concerning  manufactures  have  given  a  new  im- 
petus to  industry.  Factories  are  beginning  to  mul- 
tiply and  with  them  the  old  story  of  the  exploitation 
of  the  worker,  of  excessive  hours  and  scanty  pay  for 
the  labor  of  women  and  children  has  begun.  With 
these  conditions  have  come  crowded  slums  in  factory 
cities  and  rising  death  rates.  The  word  ^'strike"  has 
been  translated  into  action  again  and  again  and  the 
word  itself  has  been  taken  over  into  the  vernaculars 
without  translation. 

SELF-GOVERNMENT  FOR  INDIA 

"The  Greatest  Po-  The  war  has  also  brought  to  India  the 
liticai  Experiment  beginnings  of  a  vast  and  significant 
in  the  World's  political  change.  The  number  of 
History."  those  in  India  who  seek  self-govern- 

ment for  India,  free  from  British  rule,  has  greatly  in- 
creased. Agitation  is  more  and  more  marked  and  re- 
pression of  it  more  and  more  widely  resented.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  British  Parliament  has  been 
stirred  by  the  loyal  cooperation  of  Indian  troops  and 
Indian  princes  during  the  war.  The  Parliament  has 
realized  that,  if  the  war  was  fought  to  establish  the 

*Edwyn  Bevan,  International  Review  of  Missions ^  July,  1920,  p.  329. 


India  105 

principle  of  national  self-determination,  there  were 
applications  of  the  principle  to  consider  in  the  British 
Empire.  The  result  is  a  new  declaration  of  British 
poHcy,  promulgated  August  20, 1917, — namely,  *'that 
of  increasing  the  association  of  Indians  in  every 
branch  of  the  administration,  and  the  gradual  devel- 
opment of  self-governing  institutions,  with  a  view  to 
the  progressive  realization  of  responsible  government 
of  India  as  an  integral  part  of  the  British  Empire." 
This  establishes  the  hope  that  India  may  eventually 
become  as  independent  and  free  a  component  of  the 
British  Empire  as  Canada  or  New  Zealand.  But 
Parliament  realized  that  there  were  prodigious  diffi- 
culties in  the  way,  that  to  give  India  entire  self- 
government  now  would  be  to  throw  it  into  the  hands 
of  a  very  small  minority — an  oligarchy.  Never- 
theless, In  1 91 9  an  Indian  reform  bill  was  passed, 
taking  the  first  step  In  carrying  out  the  new  policy. 

This  grants  Home  Rule  government  to  India  with 
certain  limitations.  The  government  departments 
of  Education,  Excise,  Forests,  Railv/ays,  Industries, 
Municipalities  are  transferred  to  the  administration 
of  Indian  ministers  responsible  solely  to  directly 
elected  provincial  legislative  councils,  which  will 
have  full  legislative  authority.  An  imperial  legisla- 
ture for  the  whole  of  India  will  have  a  majority  of 
Indians  in  it.  By  retaining  certain  important  de- 
partments, such  as  Finance,  the  British  Government 
will  be  able  to  steady  India  while  the  prodigious  ex- 
periment is  being  made.  Already  the  new  list  of 
voters  has  been  made  out,  extending  the  suffrage 
from  37,000  to  6,000,000. 


io6  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

What  Indian  Self-  Yet  what  tremendous  obstacles  are  in 
Government  Faces,  the  way  of  success!  Even  observers 
friendly  to  the  reform  look  with  gravity  upon  the 
prospect.  Of  self-governing  experience  India  has 
had  almost  none — save  within  the  close  confines  of 
caste  or  village.  Trained  and  responsible  public 
servants  are  comparatively  few  in  number,.  The 
sectional  interests  within  the  electorate  will  be  nu- 
merous and  intense  in  feeling.  The  greatest  of  these 
will  have  a  religious  basis.  The  Hindus  could  out- 
vote the  Mohammedans  by  three  or  four  to  one  in  a 
general  election  and  thus  leave  one  of  the  most  power- 
ful and  active  components  of  India  entirely  unrepre- 
sented. In  fact,  up  to  very  recent  years  the  Moham- 
medans have  been  willing  to  have  the  British  rule 
India,  lest  they  find  themselves  under  Hindu  mas- 
ters! The  inexperience  of  the  Indian  voters  will  also 
be  likely  to  make  them  a  prey  to  extremist  agitators 
who  seek  the  immediate  expulsion  of  the  British  or 
to  the  radical  nationalists  who  include  the  larger 
number  of  Mohammedan  and  Hindu  leaders  and 
who  will  be  likely  to  struggle  for  political  power  with- 
out serious  efforts  to  give  to  the  masses  the  education 
and  the  social  reforms  which  they  need,  both  to  better 
their  condition  and  to  make  them  competent  citizens. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  most  of  the  nationalist  agitation 
has  come  from  a  few  at  the  top,  to  most  of  whom  self- 
government  for  India  means  least  of  all  democracy. 
Swift  as  these  high-ranking  natives  are  to  criticise 
and  resent  their  treatment  as  social  inferiors  by  the 
British,  and  justified  as  they  may  be  in  their  resent- 
ment,  they  do  not  hesitate  to  treat  those  below  them 
in  a  similar  fashion. 

Yet  the  future  for  India,  as  for  all  the  Orient,  lies  on 


India  107 

the  road  to  democracy.  Only  by  the  experience  of 
being  responsible  can  responsibility  be  learned. 
Only  by  use  can  the  incomparable  resources  of  the 
"neglected  and  uncultivated  powers  of  the  masses" 
be  made  useful.  And  again  India's  evil  trio  rises 
threateningly  before  us.  Hosts  of  teachers  must  be 
trained  with  a  superlatively  skillful  training  if  even 
the  first  generation  of  the  masses  is  to  become  liter- 
ate, intelligent,  and  devoted  to  the  entire  common 
weal.  Remedy  must  be  sought  by  all  possible  means 
for  bitter  poverty,  and  every  cause  contributory  to 
it  must  be  diminished  or  eradicated.  Not  simply 
the  rules  of  caste,  but  the  very  spirit  of  caste  itself 
must  yield  to  the  spirit  of  cooperation,  to  the  convic- 
tion that  men  indeed  are  all  brothers  and  that — for 
this  India,  the  religious,  could  not  leave  out — God 
Himself  is  Father  of  all. 

THE  CHRISTIAN  ENTERPRISE  AND  INDIANS  PROBLEMS 

The  Christian  En-  It  is  just  here  that  Christianity  stands 
terprise  and  India's  out  as  vital  to  India's  immediate 
Problems.  needs.     "Hinduism  teaches  that  ten- 

ure of  authority  and  all  other  privilege  is  the  reward 
of  an  unremembered  past.  Christ  teaches  that 
authority  is  permissible  only  as  a  means  to  service, 
and  is  real  in  and  through  service.  Is  it  not  self- 
evident,  then,  that  the  enterprise  of  developing  re- 
sponsible government  in  India  is  vitally  involved 
with  the  enterprise  of  Christian  Missions?"*  It  is 
just  because  Christianity  provides  unparalleled  ideals 
of  service  and  unlimited  character-making  power 
that  it  is  indispensable  to  government  and  to  the 
world's  life. 


*Cited  by  W.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Review  of  the  World.^  May,  1920,  p.  456. 


io8  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

And  Christianity  has  long  been  at  work  in 
India.  The  evil  trio  is  being  faced  and  valiantly 
fought.  The  comparatively  high  literacy  of  the 
Christian  community  in  India  has  already  been 
pointed  out.  Scarcely  anything  in  the  condition  of 
the  Christian  Church  in  India  to-day  gives  its  leaders 
and  the  missionaries  more  concern  than  the  fact  that 
the  masses  are  not  only  ready  to  come  into  the  Church 
faster  than  they  can  be  taught,  but  that  more  illiter- 
ate members  are  in  the  Church  than  it  can  supply 
with  schooling.  The  Christian  enterprise  is  conspicu- 
ous also  for  its  leadership  in  the  higher  education  of 
women.  It  has  pioneered  in  medical  training  for 
women,  a  conspicuous  necessity  where  the  custom  of 
the  purdah  prevents  treatment  by  men  doctors,  even 
if  they  were  numerous  enough  to  meet  the  need. 

Christianity's  Poverty  is  also  being  attacked  by 
attack  on  Poverty  Christian  forces.  Cooperative  socie- 
and  Caste.  ^-jgg  ^j^^^  farm  loan  banks  are  being 

fostered.  In  two  provinces  there  are  "Christian 
Central  Banks,"  under  missionary  direction,  for  the 
assistance  of  these  cooperative  societies.  Institu- 
tions such  as  the  Agricultural  Institute  at  Allahabad 
under  Sam  Higginbottom  are  blazing  the  trail  both 
for  education  and  the  reduction  of  poverty.  Mr. 
Higginbottom  writes: 

"The  Indian  farmer  has  gone  as  far  as  it  is  possible 
for  him  to  go  with  his  present  tools  and  implements. 
If  all  the  improvements  that  the  Indian  Agri- 
cultural Department  has  made  could  be  carried  to  every 
village  in  India  production  could  be  increased  by  the 
present  cultivators  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  per  cent. 
In  this  increase  is  the  means  to  pay  for  whatever  educa- 


I 


India  109 

tion  India  gets.  .  .  .  The  teachers  who  can  trans- 
form village  life  must  be  men  inspired  and  sustained  by- 
high  ideals  of  service.  As  Christians  we  believe  that 
the  Christian  motive  is  more  powerful  than  any  other 
to  raise  up  such  a  body  of  men.  Therefore,  by  setting 
ourselves  to  train  teachers  and  demonstrators  capable 
of  improving  agricultural  methods  and  inspired  by  the 
spirit  of  serving  the  community,  Christian  missions  can 
make  an  indispensable  contribution  to  the  solution  of 
India's  most  vital  problem  and  can  thereby  bear  wit- 
ness to  Christ,  perhaps  more  powerfully  than  in  any 
other  way."* 

Since  caste  is  of  the  very  essence  of  India's  faith 
system,  Christianity's  attack  upon  caste  is  inevitable 
and  must  be  relentless.  In  the  eyes  of  even  an  ortho- 
dox Hindu,  when  an  "untouchable"  is  baptized  a 
Christian,  though  he  is  still  despised,  he  has  been 
lifted  out  of  the  polluting  castes.  By  whole  villages 
some  of  these  depressed  classes  are  moving  toward 
Christianity, — moving  faster  then  workers  can  be 
supplied  to  give  them  the  necessary  training.  The 
missionaries  have  had  to  say  to  hundreds  of  thou- 
sands— "Not  yet!" — "Not  yet!"  and  to  say  it  year 
after  year.  Moreover,  it  is  not  always  easy  for  new 
Christians  to  overcome  the  feelings  and  the  practices 
of  caste  and  thus  there  is  danger  that  the  Christian 
Church  itself  might  come  to  be  a  caste.  Yet  the  in- 
fluence of  Christ,  felt  through  Bible  and  school, 
through  native  worker  and  missionary,  and,  more 
than  all  else,  through  the  brotherliness  toward  all 
men  which  the  spirit  of  Christ  implants  in  the  heart, 
is  steadily  wearing  away  India's  heaviest  shackle. 


*  International  Review  of  Missions  y  April,  1920,  p.  253,  254. 


no  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Seeking  Church  Just  as  in  Other  lands  missionary 
Unity  in  India.  forccs  have  gradually  been  developing 
the  machinery  for  conference  and  cooperation,  so  in 
India  the  National  Missionary  Council  with  a  system 
of  provincial  councils  has  recently  come  into  being 
and  promises  to  be  of  very  great  service.  Special 
enterprises  of  a  union  character  in  which  many  mis- 
sions share  are  well  established,  although  not  so  nu- 
merous as  in  China.  Strikingly  enough,  one  of  the 
outstanding  movements  for  Christian  unity  on  the 
mission  field,  and  in  some  respects  the  most  notable 
one,  is  the  product  of  native  Indian  Christianity. 
There  is  very  little  of  that  strong  denominational 
feeling  among  the  native  Christians  in  India  that 
marks  Japanese  Christianity.  At  a  conference  on 
church  union  in  South  India  between  Indian  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Anglican  churches  and  of  the  South 
India  United  Church  the  following  paragraph  was 
part  of  a  statement  adopted: 

"We  face  together  the  gigantic  task  of  the  winning  of 
India  for  Christ — one-fifth  of  the  human  race.  Yet 
confronted  by  such  an  overwhelming  responsibility,  we 
find  ourselves  rendered  weak  and  relatively  impotent 
by  our  unhappy  divisions — divisions  for  which  we  were 
not  responsible  and  which  have  been,  as  it  were,  imposed 
upon  us  from  without;  divisions  which  we  did  not 
create  and  which  we  do  not  desire  to  perpetuate."* 

The  conference  proposed  a  remarkable  basis  of  or- 
ganization for  uniting  several  churches,  which  seeks 
to  include  Congregational,  Presbyterial,  and  Epis- 
copal elements.  One  of  the  significant  facts  concern- 
ing the  proposals  is  that  the  South  India  United 

^International  Review  of  Missions y  January,  1920,  pp.  1 45-1 50. 


India  hi 

Church  is  a  union  of  native  Christians  from  the  mis- 
sions of  the  Reformed  Church  of  America,  the 
Basel  Reformed  Church,  the  American  Board  of 
Commissioners  for  Foreign  Missions,  the  London 
Missionary  Society,  the  Free  Church  of  Scotland,  and 
the  Established  C^iurch  of  Scotland,  all  working  in- 
dependently of  one  another.  Furthermore,  there  is 
the  possibility  that  the  converts  of  the  Wesleyans, 
the  Lutherans,  and  the  Church  of  England  may  be 
added.  Expressions  of  great  sympathy  have  been 
received  from  the  Malabar  Suffragan  of  the  Mar 
Thoma  Syrian  Church,  the  most  ancient  Christian 
communion  in  India.  Should  this  church  accept  the 
proposals,  "it  would  be,"  the  Suffragan  points  out, 
"the  first  instance  in  history  where  union  has  been 
effected  between  episcopal  and  non-episcopal  bod- 
ies." Who  knows  but  that  the  churches  of  China 
and  India  and  Africa  with  their  opportunity  for  a 
new  start  may  yet  put  their  Western  fellow-Christians 
to  shame  by  finding  through  the  spirit  of  Christ  a 
complete  "unity  of  believers." 

Indian  Chris-  Another  evidence  of  the  spiritual 
tianity  Overflows,  vitality  of  Indian  Christianity  lies  in 
the  fact  that  already  some  parts  of  it  are  looking  to 
undertaking  missionary  responsibility  in  lands  be- 
yond India's  boundaries.  The  restless  "apostle  of 
the  bleeding  feet,"  Sadhu  Sundar  Singh,  living  the 
wandering  life  of  an  Indian  holy  man,  but  flaming 
with  devotion  to  Christ,  has  already  penetrated  into 
Thibet  and  Afghanistan  in  the  face  of  persecution  and 
"perils  of  the  way."  What  is  perhaps  more  signifi- 
cant, India's  first  foreign  missionary  society  has  been 
organized  and,  like  some  of  the  missionary  societies 


112  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

of  America,  it  came  into  being  in  part  through  the 
consecration  of  a  group  of  students.  Dr.  Badley 
refers  to  its  beginning  as  "the  greatest  single  hour  of 
the  greatest  week  of  Methodist  history  in  India." 
It  was  at  the  Southern  Asia  Central  Conference  of 
the  Methodist  EpiscopalChurchon  January  25, 1920; 

"after  a  service  of  intercession  lasting  two  hours,  nine 
young  Indian  Methodists  faced  the  gathered  repre- 
sentatives of  Southern  Asia  Methodism  and  challeng- 
ed the  Church  to  let  them  cross  India's  confines  with 
the  glorious  Gospel  of  our  Christ.  William  Butler's  de- 
votion, William  Taylor's  fervor.  Bishop  Thoburn's  faith, 
and  the  labors  of  a  host  of  men  and  women  of  God  were 
rewarded  in  that  hour!  .  .  .  It  was  a  great  thing  to  look 
on  the  faces  of  young  men  who  had  seen  visions  of  India's 
spiritual  mission  to  distant  lands  and  stood  there,  con- 
secrating their  lives  to  the  great  undertaking.  Till  that 
moment  no  one  in  India  had  ever  seen  the  sight.  .  .  . 
Why  should  they  not  reproduce  the  zeal  of  the  Buddhist 
missionaries  of  ancient  India,  not  to  win  Asia  for  a  heath- 
en philosophy,  but  for  the  Christian  faith  .f*"* 

The  Unknown  Quite  apart  from  the  surgings  toward 
Christian  Move-  Christianity  in  the  great  mass  move- 
ment, ments  of  some  of  the  lower  castes  and 
the  less  spectacular  additions  to  the  church  from  the 
upper  classes,  there  is  a  movement  toward  Christ 
traceable  only  here  and  there,  impossible  to  measure, 
yet  deep  and  genuine.  In  part  it  appears  in  the 
desperate  effort  of  Hindu  nationalists  to  reform  Hin- 
duism so  that  it  may  withstand  the  inevitable  com- 
parison between  it  and  Christianity.  In  their  eyes 
Christianity  is  a  Western  cult,  the  faith  of  their 
rulers;  for  a  Hindu  to  accept  it  is  to  be  false  to  his 


*B.  T.  Badley  in  The  Christian  Advocate^  April  22,  1919,  p.  559. 


India  113 

fellow-Hindus,  to  enter  the  camp  of  the  enemy.  Yet 
in  their  very  efforts  to  modify  Hinduism,  they  con- 
sciously or  unconsciously  take  Christianity  as  their 
model. 

"Christianity  has  been,  as  it  were,  a  great  searchlight 
flung  across  the  expanse  of  the  religions;  and  in  its  blaze 
all  thecoarse,  unclean,  and  superstitious  elements  of  the 
old  faiths  stood  out  quite  clearly,  in  painful  vividness."* 

The  effort  to  find  a  monotheism  or  to  explain  away 
the  prolific  polytheism,  the  allegorizing  of  the  in- 
decent myths  to  remove  the  moral  taint  they  carry, 
the  "purifying"  of  polluting  depressed  classes,  the 
frank  repudiation  of  temple-prostitution  and  fraud- 
ulent deceit  of  the  worshipping  multitudes,  the 
introduction  of  social  reform  are  all  indications  of  the 
pressure  of  the  Christian  ideal.  Even  the  methods 
of  Christian  missions  are  being  imitated  by  the  re- 
forming sects.  Yet  in  spite  of  all  their  efforts  and 
their  unlimited  self-confidence  the  heart  of  Hinduism 
is  decaying.  The  ancient  books  cannot  stand  the 
searching  tests  of  historical  criticism  or  Christian 
moral  appraisal.  The  central  doctrines  of  transmi- 
gration and  karma  weaken  before  the  scientific  spirit 
and  the  sense  of  human  brotherhood  and  the  Father- 
hood of  God.  Meanwhile,  under  the  surface  and 
apart  from  the  records  of  missionary  or  church,  Christ 
Himself  is  coming  to  the  men  and  women  of  India. 
In  educated  homes  ^  Kempis's  Imitation  of  Christ  is 
a  frequently  found  book.  A  missionary  writes  of  a 
conversation  with  a  Hindu  ascetic: 


*J.  N.  Farquhar,  Modern  Religious  Movements  in  India^  p.  433. 


ll4  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

They  talked  in  the  Hindi  language  of  the  things  that  are 
eternal.  Their  words  became  a  bond  of  sympathy  be- 
tween them.  Then  the  Hindu  surprised  the  mission- 
ary by  dropping  his  Hindi  and  speaking  in  fluent 
English.  He  put  aside  the  Sanskrit  volume  and  from  a 
bag  took  out  a  bundle  carefully  wrapped  in  cloth.  This 
he  undid,  and  produced  a  copy  of  the  New  Testament. 
Listen  to  his  words — he  seems  to  speak  for  India: 
"There  is  this  difference  between  Christ  and  all  the 
religions  of  India;  all  the  others  are  passing  away. 
Christ  alone  will  remain."* 

The  historian  Green  wrote  that  "the  Methodists 
themselves  were  the  least  result  of  the  Methodist 
revival."  May  it  not  be  that  in  India  organized 
Christianity  may  be  the  least  result  of  the  coming  of 
the  missionaries  and  that  India's  religious  intensity, 
once  it  is  avowedly  submissive  to  Jesus,  may  become 
in  Him  "a  new  creation"? 

National  Char-  Within  the  Indian  church  there  is  a 
acteristics  and  the  movement,  paralleling  that  in  China, 
Indian  Christian,  ^hic^  is  seeking  to  make  more  and 
more  prominent  within  the  church  Indian  leadership 
and  Indian  characteristics.  "There  has  arisen  a  new 
national  consciousness  in  India,  a  reaction  against  all 
things  foreign  and  a  desire  for  everything  to  be  In- 
dian. We  not  only  rejoice  in  a  national  awakening, 
but  also  in  the  fact  that,  with  the  rest  of  the  nation, 
the  Indian  church  is  awakening.^f  In  part  this  is 
due  to  the  stirrings  of  national  feeling,  in  part  to  the 
recognition  that  under  missionary  leadership  alone 
the  church  would  become  so  Westernized  as  to  lose 
some  of  the  most  worth-while  elements   in   Indian 


*B.  T.  Badley,  World  Outlook,  July,  1920,  p.  20. 

tEpiscopal  address.  Southern  Asia  Central  ConjerencCy  M.  E.  Church,  1920. 


India  115 

character  and  tradition.  It  would  tend  also  to  place 
a  barrier  between  the  Christian  and  his  fellow  In- 
dians. The  mission  of  Christianity  is  to  transform 
civilizations,  not  to  transfer  them.  It  would  be  an 
incalculable  loss  to  the  world  if  all  Christianity  of  the 
future  were  to  be  of  the  exact  pattern  of  Christianity 
in  Europe  and  America.  The  nations  are  to  bring 
their  glory  into  the  heavenly  city. 

Nay,  more,  India  will  bring  to  Christianity  elements 
which  the  West  greatly  needs.  That  conscious- 
ness of  a  spiritual  meaning  in  all  the  acts  of  life, 
which  regards  business  success,  physical  well-being, 
attainment  of  learning,  political  power  never  as 
ends  in  themselves,  but  always  as  means  to  the  things 
of  the  spirit,  is  not  a  mark  of  the  Western  world. 

"Yet  there  is  in  the  Indian,  whether  Moslem  or  Hindu, 
and  whatever  his  sect,  a  real  abiding  sense  of  the  spiritual 
within  and  behind  all  things  and  acts  of  sense.  It  is 
not  when  the  moral  sense  is  awakened  that  the  Indian 
seeks  God.  He  has  never  been  without  God.  If  his 
ethics  have  been  low,  it  is  merely  because  his  light  did  not 
go  farther,  or  because  the  conception  of  his  sect  did  not 
rise  to  a  God  who  insists  on  personal  morality,  as  some 
communities  in  western  lands  have  not  to  this  day  the 
idea  of  a  God  who  insists  on  business  morality.  The 
point  is  that  all  the  time  the  Indian  lives  and  moves,  is 
good  and  is  bad,  in  the  ever-present  consciousness  of 
God." 

Again, "the  Western  individual  is  born  with  certain 
rights;  the  Indian  is  born  with  certain  obligations  or 
responsibilities.  This  again  is  a  conception  common 
to  the  whole,  land  irrespective  of  creed  or  sect  or 
social  position.  .  .  .  Such  a  thing  as  individual 
right  is  really  almost  absent,  and  every  privilege 


Ii6  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

which  in  the  West  would  be  claimed  on  the  individual 
basis  is  in  India  conceived  of  in  terms  of  the  group  of 
which  the  person  concerned  is  member.  .  .  The 
Western  view  of  ^rights*  is  so  acceptable  to  selfishness 
and  pride  that  it  insidiously  grips  the  mind  and  be- 
comes a  most  disturbing  element  in  society."*  Sure- 
ly these  are  elements  which  must  not  only  be  pre- 
served in  the  Christian  Church  in  India,  but  which 
must  be  increased  also  in  the  Church  of  the  West  for 
its  highest  service  to  humanity. 

THE  opportunity  OF  AMERICAN  MISSIONS 

The  Opportunity  When  the  Indian  young  men  in  Luck- 
of  American  now  Volunteered  for  the  foreign  serv- 

Missions.  i^Q  Qf  ^j^gjj.  church,  they  began  their 

statement  with  the  words:  "In  grateful  recognition 
of  what  India  has  received  through  Christ."  What 
can  we  do  for  India  in  recognition  of  what  America 
has  received  through  Christ?  And  how  may  we  ex- 
press our  gratitude  for  the  gifts  which  India  is  bring- 
ing to  the  Kingdom  of  Christ  in  the  world?  In  two 
respects  American  missionary  enterprise  has  ad- 
vantages which  it  can  bring  to  the  task.  Even 
though  the  mass  of  the  people  are  apt  to  class  all 
foreigners  together,  the  American  often  finds  a  some- 
what more  ready  hearing  and  a  greater  confidence  in 
his  disinterestedness  from  the  fact  that  he  is  not  re- 
lated to  the  ruling  power.  Furthermore,  the  edu- 
cational experience  of  the  United  States  is  of  value 
to  India.  Industrial  education  for  untrained  com- 
munities has  reached  a  high  degree  of  success  in  such 
American  schools  as  Hampton  and  Tuskegee.     In 


*Kanakarayan  T.  Paul,  International  Review  of  Missions^  Oct.,  1919,  p.  515. 


INDIA  117 

the  Philippines  the  rapid  development  of  an  entire 
educational  system  for  a  large  illiterate  population 
has  been  achieved  on  a  scale  perhaps  not  paralleled 
elsewhere.  The  use  of  the  school  for  community 
welfare  has  also  been  widely  experimented  with  in  the 
United  States.  Each  one  of  these  aspects  of  Ameri- 
can education  is  extremely  suggestive  for  the  Indian 
problem.  American  teachers  and  educators  who  feel 
the  call  to  Christian  service  will  find  here  an  unlimit- 
ed field  of  highest  usefulness.  Sir  Michael  Sadler,  one 
of  the  most  eminent  educational  leaders  in  the  British 
Empire,  writes: 

"It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  the  question  of  introduc- 
ing universal  elementary  education  into  India  is  one  of 
the  gravest  and  most  inspiring  of  the  problems  which 
con  front  her  statesmen.  Momentous  issues  turn  upon 
the  way  in  which  it  is  handled.  India  will  be  revolu- 
tionized for  good  or  evil  by  her  elementary  schools."* 

Moreover,  having  brought  so  many  to  the  accept- 
ance of  Christianity,  we  have  the  very  serious  responsi- 
bility of  keeping  them  Christian.  This  involves  the 
extension  of  Christian  education  andof  Christian  liter- 
ature far  beyond  the  present  limits.  Because  of  India's 
poverty  and  the  poverty  of  her  Christians  more  aid 
must  be  given  her  than  ever  before.  Some  day  the 
eradication  of  ignorance  and  poverty  will  be  re- 
garded as  essential  for  the  insurance  of  the  world's 
peace  and  prosperity  as  the  eradication  of  yellow 
fever  and  typhus  and  influenza  is  to  its  health. 
America's  investments  of  missionary  teachers  and 
agriculturists  and  doctors  and  supervisors  and  funds 
might  rightly  be  charged  up  to  world  insurance  with 

*InternationaI  Review  of  Missions ,  October,  1920,  p.  504. 


Ii8  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

a  certainty  of  return  in  proportion  to  the  investment. 

How  We  Hinder  The  missionary  enterprise  of  America 
the  Kingdom  in  has  Other  contributions  to  make  be- 
^^^^^'  sides  men  and  women  and  money  and 

educational  experience.  The  greatest  evidence  of  the 
truth  of  the  Gospel  is  the  life  of  the  Christian.  To 
the  Indian  who  goes  straight  to  Christ  in  the  New 
Testament  and  finds  no  ground  for  sect  or  denomina- 
tion there,  but  one  Lord,  one  bond  of  love,  one 
brotherhood,  the  multiple  divisions  of  Christianity 
are  not  only  a  perplexity,  but  a  stumbling  block  in 
his  path  to  the  church.  He  looks  further  and  tests 
the  advocates  of  the  Christian  faith  by  their  Lord. 
Mr.  K.  T.  Paul  remarks:  "The  caste  system  is  the 
curse  of  India.  We  are  hoping  and  working  that  it 
may  dissolve  quickly  and  disappear  from  the  face 
of  the  land.  But  the  caste  system  has  many  good 
features,  and  I  should  certainly  cling  to  it,  if  it  is  to 
be  replaced  by  the  unchristian  and  inhuman  class 
system  of  the  West."*  An  experienced  missionary 
in  South  India  writes: 

"There  is  ample  evidence  from  every  part  of  India 
that  the  greatest  obstacle  to  the  winning  of  men  to 
Christ  lies  in  the  Christian  Church  itself  and  in  mis- 
sionaries themselves,  such  as  the  un-Christian  example 
of  many  in  the  church  and  the  disparity  between  preach- 
ing and  practice,  the  lack  of  vital  and  persistent  per- 
sonal evangelism,  the  lack  of  sympathy  with  Indian  as- 
pirations, the  prejudice  that  warps  the  judgment  and 
stems  the  life  of  many  workers."t 

If  this  be  true  on  the  mission  field,  how  much  more 


*International  Review  of  Missions,  October,  1919,  p.  520. 

tH.  A.  Popley  in  Missionary  Review  0/  the  fFor/d,  June,  1920,  p.  546. 


«  India  119 

evidence  of  such  inconsistency  and  imperfection  can 
be  found  at  home!  **We  have  that  same  sharp  sep- 
aration between  the  colored  man  and  other  citizens 
in  America;  it  is  a  caste  distinction.  And  there  are 
other  caste  distinctions  recognized  among  us,  arising 
from  the  same  causes  as  in  India.  .  .  There  are 
people  here,  just  as  in  caste-ridden  India,  who  will 
not  worship  together,  will  not  trade  with  one  an- 
other, will  not  intermarry,  will  not  eat  at  the  same 
table,  will  not  lie  side  by  side  in  the  grave."*  Or 
again,  "Take  away  the  distinctively  Indian  setting, 
and  the  problem  of  inter-racial  fellowship  in  India  is 
identical  with  that  of  fellowship  between  capitalist 
and  manual  laborer,  university  man  and  small  clerk. 
Socialist-minded  artisan  and  landed  aristocrat  in  our 
own  land.  The  dangers  of  paternalism  and  im- 
personality in  religion  are  as  real  at  home  as  abroad 
— perhaps  they  are  more  real."t 

How  shall  we  interpret  Christ  to  India,  how  shall 
we  give  honest  moral  as  well  as  honest  material  sup- 
port to  those  who  are  carrying  His  Gospel  to  foreign 
lands,  unless  our  caste,  our  pride  of  station,  our  un- 
brotherliness  be  done  away? 

"To  make  great  experiments  in  exploring  the  depths  ot 
Christian  love  is  the  task  to  which  we  are  called,  and 
only  the  love  which  is  utterly  human  because  it  is  ut- 
terly divine,  the  love  of  Christ,  is  adequate  to  the  need 
before  us.  Whether  in  missions  or  government  there 
is  need  today  for  men  and  A'omen  in  India  who  have 
got  past  the  point  of  caring  about  themselves  and  can 
approach  the  life  of  India  and  the  hearts  of  Indians 
with  that  self-effacing  and  yet  utterly  simple  and  nat- 
ural attitude  ot  brotherly  equality  and  love  which  is 


*W.  B.  Hill,  Missionary  Reniew  oj  the  Vy\:ld^  May,  1920,  p.  451. 

tWlIllam  Paton  in  International  Review  of  Missions y  October,  1919,  p.  530. 


I20  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

the  gift  throughout   the  ages  of  Christ  to  those  who 
look  for  strength  to  Him."* 

Whence  shall  these  come,  unless  the  Christian 
churches  of  America  are  filled  with  such  a  spirit,  un- 
less we  who  bear  His  name  show  in  our  daily  living 
the  power  of  Christ's  transforming  love? 

"Do  Thou,  O  Christ,  our  dearest  Saviour,  Thyself 
kindle  our  lamps,  that  they  may  evermore  shine  in 
Thy  temple;  that  they  may  receive  unquenchable 
light  from  Thee,  that  will  lighten  our  darkness,  and 
lessen  the  darkness  of  the  world." 


•William  Paton  in  International  Review  of  Missions^  October,  1919,  p.  530. 


§  -^ 

H  ■£•  = 

g    ^  o 

5  5^ 


Islam  121 

VI.     ISLAM  AND  THE  NEAR  EAST 

Does  the  Crescent  The  lands  where  millions  face  toward 
Wax  or  Wane?  Mecca  in  prayer  and  hold  Mohammed 
the  true  prophet  of  God  stretch  across  two  continents 
and  out  into  the  islands  of  the  sea  like  a  vast  horn  or 
crescent.  The  horn's  tip  end  is  far  out  in  the  South 
Sea  Islands,  among  the  Moros  in  the  Philippines,  and 
in  the  Dutch  East  Indies,  where  in  Java  alone  there 
are  30,000,000  Mohammedans.  Thence  it  curves 
through  British  Malaysia  where  there  are  some 
2,000,000,  past  China,  where  there  are,  it  is  es- 
timated, not  fewer  than  10,000,000,  to  India,  where 
are  gathered  67,000,000,  the  largest  number  under 
any  one  rule.  Then  come  Afghanistan,  exclusively 
Mohammedan,  unknown  numbers  in  Central  Asia, 
part  of  Russia  (17,000,000),  Persia,  Mesopotamia, 
Asia  Minor,  European  Turkey,  Syria,  Palestine, 
Arabia,  Egypt,  Libya,  Tunis,  Algeria,  Morocco,  until 
the  great  open  end  of  the  horn  stretches  westward 
from  the  Sudan  across  Africa,  steadily  engulfing  the 
northernmost  negro  tribes.  The  races  and  the 
tongues  are  nearly  as  various  as  the  lands — Arab, 
Ottoman,  Malay,  Persian,  Afghan,  Sudanese,  Moro, 
Javanese  are  but  a  part  of  "the  Faithful." 

Owing  much  to  Christianity,  but  even  that  becloud- 
ed by  imperfections  and  by  a  mass  of  legal  and  his- 
torical tradition,  Islam  has  for  fourteen  centuries 
been  Christianity's  most  active  and  most  bitter  rival. 
How  does  it  stand  now?  Does  Islam  gain  or  lose? 
Does  the  Crescent  wax  or  wane?  Unfortunately  for 
numerical  comparisons  there  are  few  data  on  which  to 
go.     Even  the  present  Mohammedan  population  of 


122  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

many  areas  is  unknown.  It  seems  probable  that 
with  one  considerable  exception  the  number  of  con- 
versions to  Islam  is  decreasing.  The  exception  is 
the  northern  border  of  negro  Africa.  There  Moslem 
traders,  missionaries  of  their  faith,  with  their  energy 
and  superior  culture  have  been  steadily  winning 
towns  and  tribes  along  the  trade  routes  and  pressing 
southward.  Other  information  is  even  more  impor- 
tant than  figures  for  revealing  the  present  state  of 
Islam.  The  war  has  disturbed  Islam^s  outlook  upon 
the  world  and  upon  life  as  it  has  never  been  disturbed 
before.     Does  it  mean  decay  or  revival? 

The  Political  In  one  important  respect  the  author!- 
Collapse  of  Islam,  ty  of  Islam  has  collapsed.  Originally 
and  in  the  mind  of  all  true  Moslems  through  the 
centuries  Islam  has  been  a  unit  politically  whenever 
contrasted  with  the  Christian  world.  War  between 
Moslem  states  was  sinful;  war  against  Christian 
states  holy.  The  true  allegiance  of  a  Moslem,  next 
to  his  conscience,  was  not  to  any  government  under 
which  he  might  live,  but  to  the  Caliph,  the  successor 
to  Mohammed  as  the  political  leader  of  Islam.  And 
for  centuries  Moslems  lived,  not  without  dissensions, 
of  course,  under  Moslem  political  as  well  as  Moslem 
religious  rule  from  southern  Spain  across  North 
Africa  even  to  India.  It  was  this  unity  of  Islam  in 
political  as  well  as  religious  feeling  that  Sultan  Abdul 
Hamid  of  evil  memory  capitalized  to  keep  European 
statesmen  in  restraint,  that  has  caused  British  states- 
men to  deal  gingerly  with  those  responsible  for  Ar- 
menian massacres  lest  Indian  Moslems  make  trou- 
ble, and  that  the  Kaiser  tried  to  kindle  into  flame 
against  the  Allies  in  1914. 


Islam  123 

Yet  even  before  the  war  it  had  begun  to  break  up. 
All  of  North  Africa  was  under  the  control  of  one 
European  power  or  another;  Russia  and  Great  Britain 
were  making  the  independence  of  Persia  a  fiction  and 
from  a  third  to  a  fourth  of  all  Mohammedans  were 
under  British  rule  in  Egypt.  In  the  war  itself, 
stimulated  by  German  influence,  the  Caliph  in  Con- 
stantinople proclaimed  a  "jahad"  or  holy  war  of  all 
Islam,  a  threat  against  all  of  Islam's  non-Moslem 
rulers.  It  was  a  total  failure.  Moslems  from  India 
and  Algeria,  from  Arabia  and  Egypt  fought  loyally 
beside  French  and  British  against  Germans  and  Turk- 
ish Moslems.  Moreover,  the  Turkish  Empire,  the 
one  major  symbol  of  Moslem  political  authority,  is 
being  parceled  out  to  non-Moslem  rulers — in  Pales- 
tine and  Mesopotamia  the  British,  in  Syria  the 
French,  in  Constantinople  and  the  Straits  an  inter- 
national commission,  in  the  region  about  Smyrna, 
Greece.  Italy  has  acquired  a  "sphere  of  interest" 
in  Anatolia;  Christian  Armenia  is  promised  inde- 
pendence; Italy,  France,  and  Great  Britain  join  in 
directing  the  destinies  of  what  remains  of  the  Turk- 
ish Empire  in  Asia  Minor;  Arabia,  unified  by  British 
money  and  Colonel  Lawrence's  amazing  skill  during 
the  war,  has  broken  up  into  its  many  tribes.  Egypt, 
eleven-twelfths  Moslem,  alone  has  come  out  of  the 
war,  thanks  to  the  nationalist  insurrection  of  191 9 
and  Great  Britain's  excess  of  overseas  responsibihties, 
with  a  genuine  measure  of  independence.  Thus,  in 
spite  of  rumblings  of  protest  in  India  and  elsewhere 
against  the  West's  displacement  of  the  Caliph,  the 
political  ideals  of  Islam  have  very  nearly  crashed  to 
the  ground. 


124  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Such  a  blow  to  Islam  is  fraught  with  far-reaching 
consequences  for  Islam  and  for  Christianity.  Mis- 
sionary students  of  Islam  believe  it  likely  that  politi- 
cal decline  will  mean  spiritual  revival.  The  Faithful 
will  be  forced  to  examine  their  faith  and  every  con- 
tact with  Western  material  superiority  will  under- 
mine their  scornful  pride  and  open  their  thought  to 
new  and  powerful  ideas.  Superstitious,  fanatic 
Islam  is  being  forced  to  think,  to  find  its  real  position 
in  the  human  world. 

Barriers  to  But  across  all  forward  movement  of 

Spiritual  Revival,  bewildered  Islam  lie  certain  barriers. 
For  a  faith  to  start  in  one  centre  and  spread  itself 
over  wide  area-s  is  one  thing;  for  it,  once  widespread, 
to  revolutionize  its  character,  to  weld  into  a  new 
spiritual  unity,  fitted  to  modern  instead  of  primitive 
life,  all  its  orthodox  and  heretical  sects,  its  inner 
political  and  lingual  antagonisms,  is  another  and 
vastly  harder  thing.  Political  leaders  cannot  now 
secure  the  enthusiasm  of  all  Islam.  The  Sultan  of 
Morocco,  Commander  of  the  Faithful,  will  not 
recognize  as  Caliph  the  Sherif  of  Mecca  and  King  of 
the  Hedjaz  or  his  capable  son  Emir  Feisal,  Arab 
leader  of  Syria,  nor  would  Indian  Moslems  accept 
any  of  the  three.  No  religious  leaders  in  sight  are 
able  to  do  more  than  stir  up  new  sects  of  personal 
followers.  The  Aga  Khan,  leader  of  Indian  Islam, 
and,  to  one  benighted  sect,  the  incarnation  of  deity, 
is  to  society  in  London  "a  gay  man  of  the  world,  a 
versatile  linguist,  a  haunter  of  clubs  and  races,  where, 
by  the  way,  he  drops  the  savings  of  his  humble  wor- 
shippers dwelling  on  the  fringe  of  the  Syrian  desert."* 

*Asiay  January,  1920,  p.  92. 


Islam  125 

Again,  the  genuine  religious  sentiment  of  Islam  is 
encrusted  with  an  overwhelming  mass  of  mediaeval 
superstition,  vicious  and  pitiable,  and  entangled  in  a 
vast  web  of  innumerable  traditions.  When,  as  is 
inevitable,  the  followers  of  the  Prophet  begin  to  gain 
Western  education  and  scientific  knowledge,  to  take 
part  in  modern  industry,  a  severe  reaction  will  come 
that  will  for  thousands  put  out  even  Islam's  dim 
light  in  materialism  or  religious  indifference.  Such 
a  condition  will  require  radical  changes  if  Islam  is  to 
survive  except  as  a  cult  of  illiterate  tribesmen.  The 
impact  of  the  West  will  bring  also  a  silent  but  pene- 
•trating  criticism  of  Islam's  morals,  of  its  all-pervad- 
ing sensuality,  its  treatment  of  women,  its  neglect  of 
childhood,  its  cruelty  and  deceit.  Already  some  of 
its  leaders  advocate  the  abolition  of  polygamy,  the 
removal  of  the  veil  and  the  purdah.  God  grant 
that  more  such  enlightened  men  be  found  in  Islam! 

But  every  such  movement  is  a  denial  of  Islam's 
social  heritage,  of  its  religious  tradition,  it  is  even  the 
repudiation  of  the  polygamous  Prophet  himself. 
A  truly  reformed  Islam  would  be  Mohammedanism 
with  Mohammed  left  out.  It  may  indeed  be  that 
the  Moslem  world  is  approaching  as  great  confusion 
in  its  spiritual  life  as  it  is  experiencing  in  its  political 
life.  In  any  case  the  new  unsettlement  of  the  mind 
of  Islam  brings  to  Christianity  a  great  opportunity. 
From  Malaysia,  India,  Persia,  and  Syria  come  re- 
ports of  a  new  readiness  to  consider  the  claims  of 
Christ. 


126  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

christianity  and  the  moslem  world 
What  the  Moslem  Dr.  Duncan  B.  Macdonald,  a  well- 
World  is  Learning  known  Student  of  Moslem  affairs, 
of  Christianity.  fl^ds  several  respects  in  which  the 
Moslem  world  is  being  forced  radically  to  modify  its 
ideas  about  Christianity.*  Hitherto  Christianity 
and  Christendom  have  been  to  Moslem  eyes  identical. 
Now  Moslems  are  learning  from  the  conflict  between 
the  "Christian"  powers  of  Europe  that  they  are  not 
identical  and  that  the  Christianity  which  is  to  be 
contrasted  with  Islam  is  perhaps  more  worthy  of  con- 
sideration than  they  had  supposed.  Red-blooded 
fighters  that  they  are,  their  respect  for  Christianity 
has  increased  since  they  have  seen  Christians  at  war! 
Moreover,  the  success  of  the  latter  is  evidence  that 
Allah  does  not  disapprove  of  them.  "Islam  has 
never  been  a  religion  of  lost  causes.  Allah  does  not 
chasten  the  Moslem  whom  he  loves.  His  hand  is  on 
everything  and  success  means  approval." 

Yet  most  Moslems  have  had  little  chance  to  see 
virile  Christianity  of  the  modern  type  in  action. 
Zeal  has  not  been  a  mark  of  the  Christian  churches 
native  to  Moslem  strongholds.  Dr.  James  L.  Barton 
writes: 

"The  entire  body  [of  Mohammedans  in  the  Near 
East]  is  staggered  by  the  great  outpouring  of  American 
philanthropy  towards  the  multiplied  victims  of  their 
own  misdeeds.  But  when  Moslems  and  victims  are 
treated  by  Christian  doctors  with  equal  tenderness  and 
consideration  and  for  no  ulterior  purpose  that  they  can 
discern,  it  forces  them  to  a  serious  consideration  of  the 
wide  difference  between  Christianity  and  Islam. "f 


*Missionary  Outlook  in  the  Light  of  the  War^  P«  138  ff. 
•\Moslem  Worlds  April,  1920,  p.  no. 


Islam  127 

Not  the  least  important  aspect  of  what  the  Moslem 
is  learning  of  Christianity  is  his  desire  to  learn  more. 
A  missionary  in  India  writes  of  a  more  genuine  inter- 
est of  Indian  Moslems  in  discussing  religion  with 
Christians.  Reports  from  Asia  Minor  show  greatly 
increased  enrolment  of  Moslem  boys  in  mission 
schools.  Medical  missionaries  in  Persia  find  the 
ways  opening  toward  the  western  gates  of  Afghanis- 
tan. Moslems  in  the  Netherlands  East  Indies, 
prevented  from  pilgrimages  to  Mecca  during  the 
war,  have  become  less  zealous  for  their  faith.  No 
people  has  been  hitherto  so  consistently  hard  to  win 
to  the  Gospel.  Now  it  appears  on  every  hand  that, 
in  Dr.  Macdonald's  word,  "the  shell  of  the  Moslem 
mind  has  been  cracked"  and  that  the  relation  of 
Christianity  to  'the  true  Faith*  is  "at  heart  a  sub- 
ject for  very  careful  consideration." 

Christianity's  Christianity*s  approach  to  the  Mos- 
Approach  to  the  lem  world  was  for  centuries  hardly  of 
Moslem  World.  ^  character  to  foster  understanding. 
Forced  first  to  resist  the  inflowing  tide  of  Moslem 
conquest,  Christianity  met  Islam  on  the  battlefields 
of  North  Africa,  Spain,  and  Eastern  Europe;  then, 
in  the  struggle  of  the  Crusades  to  regain  Jerusalem, 
it  carried  war  into  the  enemy's  territory.  Ever  since 
then  Turk  and  Arab,  Egyptian,  North  African,  Per- 
sian, Indian,  and  Malay  have  faced,  to  all  appear- 
ances, a  Christian  West  bent  on  their  conquest  by 
force.  Yet  even  in  the  early  days  there  were  not 
lacking  those  like  Raymond  Lull  who  came,  with  no 
weapons  save  the  Bible  and  Christ's  spirit,  to  serve 
and  not  to  rule.  Many  as  have  been  their  successors, 
however,  one  can  hardly  say  that  the  missionary 


128  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

forces  have  yet  been  able  to  occupy  in  strength  the 
chief  strategic  points.  Desperate  efforts  are  being 
made  to  establish  strong  missions  and  native  churches 
in  the  African  trade  routes.  North  Africa  from 
Morocco  to  Egypt  is  only  sparsely  touched  by  mis- 
sionary work.  In  Egypt  one  energetic  American 
mission  is  laying  the  foundations  of  a  Christian  col- 
lege and  carrying  on  much  other  work  and  several 
British  missions  are  represented.  Arabia  is  an  al- 
most closed  door.  North  of  Palestine  missions  are 
more  strongly  settled.  Robert  College  in  Constan- 
tinople, Syrian  Protestant  College  in  Beirut,  and 
other  colleges  and  schools  have  done  much  in  gaining 
helpful  contact  with  Moslems  as  well  as  others  of 
the  Near  East.  Missionary  hospitals  have  been 
particularly  successful.     Basil  Mathews  writes: 

"I  discovered  little  by  little  that  in  all  that  city  of 
Damascus,  the  most  ancient  city  now  standing  in  the 
world,  there  was  one  man  who  had  universal  authority 
not  by  official  position  nor  by  wealth  but  by  the  power 
of  service  and  of  personality.  Even  the  wild  untame- 
able  Arabs  of  the  desert  would  come  in  and  lie  down 
with  complete  confidence  on  the  operating  table  of  Dr. 
Frank  Mackinnon,  saying,  in  the  phrase  that  has  be- 
come proverbial  about  that  great  Scottish  Christian  sur- 
geon throughout  the  Arab  world — *He  carries  a  blessing 
in  his  hands.'  "* 

Many  other  such  men  are  at  work  in  the  Near  East, 
in  Persia,  India,  and  Malaysia.  In  Cairo  and  Beirut 
missionary  presses  are  issuing  Scriptures,  tracts,  and 
books  in  generous,  though  inadequate  quantities  in 
most  of  the  Moslem  languages.  American  missions 
are  slowly  extending  their  lines  into  more  and  more 


*The  Riddle  of  Nearer  Asia^  p.  205. 


Islam  129 

remote  parts  of  Persia.  Afghanistan  is  sealed  to 
missionary  approach  by  the  attitude  of  its  Ameer. 
In  India  the  Moslem  problem,  complicated  by  the 
Hindu  customs  largely  adopted,  merges  into  the  vast 
task  of  Indian  missions.  In  Malaysia  Dutch  mis- 
sionary societies  and  one  American  Society  are  work- 
ing with  very  limited  forces.  Central  Asia  and  Rus- 
sia are  practically  untouched.  Chinese  Moslems  are 
only  slightly  reached  as  the  missions  slowly  extend. 

Yet  the  new  day  is  not  without  its  signs.  The  in- 
creased interest  in  Christianity  is  bearing  fruit. 
Dr.  Barton  found  in  a  recent  trip  several  instances 
where  leading  Mohammedans  had  become  Christians. 

"One  case  was  that  of  a  Hodja  of  a  large  mosque, 
himself  belonging  to  a  family  of  Hodjas  for  several 
generations.  .  .  .  When  I  talked  to  him  of  his 
new  found  faith  and  joy  he  told  me  that  he  was  besieged 
every  day  and  all  day  by  Mohammedans,  urging  him  to 
return  to  his  ancestral  faith.  He  said  the  only  argu- 
ment they  used  with  him  was  that  unless  he  did  so  every 
Mohammedan  of  that  important  city  would  become  a 
Christian."* 

To  win  such  men  as  these,  who  are  the  keys  to  their 
communities,  requires  not  simply  the  quiet  molding 
of  education  or  the  ministry  of  healing,  but  the  ster- 
ling qualities  of  robust,  genuine  Christian  friendship, 
skilled  in  the  understanding  of  religion  and  its  ex- 
periences. Men  and  women  of  such  power  are  need- 
ed by  hundreds  to  lead  the  Moslem  world  out  of  its 
blindness  and  superstition,  to  free  children  and  wom- 
en and  men  from  its  sensual  blight,  to  train  a  new 
school  of  prophets  of  Jesus  Christ.     Have  we  them? 


^Missionary  Review  of  the  World,  January,  1920,  p.  27. 


Ijo  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

THE  NEAR  EAST 

The  Near  East,  The  Strange  motley  of  lands  and  races 
the  Citadel  of  and  religions  that  reaches  from  the 
Islam.  Caspian  to  Thrace,  from  the  Persian 

Gulf  to  the  Nile  is  in  a  sense  the  citadel  of  Islam. 
In  it  lie  the  revered  cities  of  Mecca,  Medina,  Jeru- 
salem, Damascus,  Kerbela,  Constantinople.  There 
Islam  is  today  most  newly  come  to  grips  with  the 
dominance  of  the  West,  there  will  most  deeply  feel 
the  shock  of  new  industrialism,  new  agriculture, 
new  ways  of  government,  new  schools.  Already 
there  is  a  Mohammedan  republic,  Azerbaidjan,  under 
Soviet  influence,  on  the  shores  of  the  Caspian  Sea. 
Nor  will  the  followers  of  the  Prophet  be  the  only 
group  to  be  stimulated  and  disturbed.  At  the  far 
end  of  the  Black  Sea  is  the  Georgian  Republic;  just 
below  it  is  the  new  Armenia  rising  slowly  from  her 
massacred  dead,  "a  nation  that  children  will  have  to 
build."  The  incoming  of  the  French,  the  British, 
the  Greeks,  the  Italians  as  the  overlords  of  the  Near 
East  we  have  noted  already.  Here  is  the  centre  of 
the  Zionist  hopes,  a  home  for  the  scattered  Jewish 
nation.  Here  are  ancient  Christian  churches,  the 
Greek  Orthodox,  the  Armenian  National  Church, 
the  Armenian  Roman  Catholic  Church,  the  Armenian 
Evangelical  Church,  the  Nestorian  Church,  the 
Maronites,  and  the  Copts. 

Moreover,  across  this  block  of  land,  already  com- 
plicated by  native  races,  native  religions,  and 
foreign  conquerors,  three  continents  join.  The  day  is 
in  sight  when  the  cry**  Aleppo!  Change  here  for  Jeru- 
salem, Cairo,  Cape  Town,  and  African  points;  this 
train  for  Bagdad,  Basra,  Bombay,  and  the  Far  East" 


Islam  rji 

will  sound  in  the  ears  of  passengers  who  entrained  in 
London,  Paris,  Brussels,  or  Berlin.  Such  a  bridge  as 
this,  the  meeting  place  of  three  continents,  the 
"cross  roads  of  the  world",  should  be  a  centre  of 
friendship,  of  mutual  understanding,  of  light.  But  for 
centuries  here  empires  have  clashed;  here  in  fact  is 
the  plain  called  "Armageddon."  Even  now  it  is 
scarred  by  the  campaigns  in  Palestine  and  Mesopo- 
tamia and  at  Gallipoli,  stained  by  the  blood  of  hun- 
dreds upon  hundreds  of  thousands  of  Christians 
massacred  by  their  Turkish  overlords  and  Kurdish 
brigands.  Nor  is  the  prospect  better.  The  new 
republics  in  the  north  east  are  already  in  conflict 
over  boundaries.  The  appalling  destruction  of 
Christians  has  deprived  the  populations  of  thousands 
who  were  steadying,  uplifting,  leading  the  confused 
masses.  As  this  is  written,  editorial  writers  are 
discussing  whether  the  agreements  between  Great 
Britain,  France,  and  Italy  over  the  moribund  body  of 
Turkey  are  the  consultations  of  sincere  physicians  or 
the  dickerings  of  spurious  heirs  seeking  to  forestall 
an  inevitable  conflict  among  themselves.  One  writer 
has  characterized  the  Near  East  as  the  "tinder-box" 
of  the  world,  forecasting  that  from  the  clash  of  race, 
or  faith,  or  commercial  competition  will  come  the 
spark  that  will  kindle,  as  did  the  minor  disagreement 
between  Austria  and  Serbia,  a  world  conflagration. 
Yet  in  the  Near  East  was  born  the  Prince  of  Peace! 

Christianity's  That  Prince  of  Peacc  is  still  the  only 
Task  in  the  Near  One  who  Can  put  out  the  Smoldering 
East.  fires  that  are  fanned  by  blundering 

greed  and  quench  the  flames  of  racial  hatred  and 
religious  bigotry.     War  has  not  changed  and  cannot 


132  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

change  the  character  of  diplomats  and  bankers,  of  na- 
tional leaders  and  secretaries  for  foreign  affairs,  of 
mullahs  and  chieftains.  Leaders  of  new  character 
the  Near  East  must  have. 

"The  kind  of  character  that  begets  trust,  and  is  able 
therefore  to  exercise  leadership  as  none  other  can  is 
Christian  character.  This  does  not  mean  that  no  Mos- 
lem has  some  of  the  needed  qualities,  for  Islam  has  its 
partial  knowledge  of  God's  character.  Nor  does  it 
mean  that  all  nominal  Christians  have  those  qualities, 
for  to  name  Christ  is  not  necessarily  to  obey  His  will 
or  to  be  like  Him.  //  does  mean^  however^  that  in  the 
school  of  Christy  where  justice y  truths  and  mercy  find  their 
supreme  expression^  character  reaches  at  once  its  most 
heroic  heights  and  its  most  enduring  strength.  In  Him 
we  discover  Man  on  the  scale  of  Gody  a  Leadership  that 
brings  into  all  truth  and  a  Power  that  builds  men  up  into 
the  fulness  of  the  stature  of  His  Divine  Manhood.''* 

Christ  makes  Himself  known  through  Christians. 
This,  then,  is  the  task  of  Christianity  in  the  Near 
East,  to  reveal  Him  through  consecrated  personality, 
in  medical  service,  in  education,  in  ministry  to  social 
need,  in  proclaiming  His  truth.  Nearly  four  hundred 
missionaries  are  there  at  that  task;  yet  hundreds  more 
with  equipment  and  support  must  join  them  from 
Europe  and  America.  Upon  them  the  recovery  and 
the  redemption  of  the  peoples  of  these  lands  depend. 
But  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  Near  East  is 
not  in  its  own  hands.  Western  powers  have  assumed 
responsibility.  Are  they  there  to  bless  or  to  exploit? 
There  are  no  guarantees  but  character.  Balances  of 
power  and  treaty  signatures  are  futile.  For  the  sake 
of  helpless  and  groping  peoples,  for  the  sake  of  world 


*Basil  Mathews,  The  Riddle  of  Nearer  AsiUy  p.  200. 


Islam  133 

peace,  for  the  sake  of  God's  Kingdom  in  the  world, 
His  servants  must  be  on  guard  over  the  actions  of 
governments,  the  character  of  their  political  leaders. 
Ever  since  the  life  of  our  Lord  answered  eternally 
"Yes"  to  Cain^s  "Am  I  my  brother's  keeper"?  the 
churches  of  Christ  have  had  a  divine  mandate  in 
behalf  of  weak  nations  and  weak  peoples.  Are  they 
prepared  to  fulfil  it? 


AN   IMPORTANT   ANNOUNCEMENT 

"In  the  town  of  Larpura  all  the  leather  workers  became  Christians 
at  one  time.  They  were  not  satisfied  to  have  the  news  of  this  great 
change  go  out  amongst  the  people  slowly  and  in  bits.  They  wanted  it 
known  at  once!  So  they  had  the  public  drums  beaten,  and  criers  went 
through  the  streets  with  the  drums  and  shouted,  'We,  the  Chamars  of 
Larpura,  are  all  become  the  servants  of  the  Lord!'  " — Missionary  News. 

WHAT  SHALL  THEY  READ? 

After  years  of  missionary  effort,  the  entire  list  of  Christian  publi- 
cations in  Tamil,  the  language  which  has  the  largest  Christian  literature, 
could  be  bought  for  less  than  twenty-five  dollars.  The  cost  of  a  good 
typewriter  would  buy  copies  of  all  the  Christian  books  in  Hindi,  Tamil, 
Telugu,  and  Bengali. — India  Christian  Literature  Survey. 

A    BRAHMAN    SPEAKS    OF    CHRIST 

"As  a  final  testimony  to  Christ  from  India  let  us  hear  the  witness 
of  one  of  the  leading  Erahmans  of  Western  India,  a  man  who  has 
been  knighted  by  the  British  government,  and  made  a  judge.  In  an- 
swer to  the  question,  "What  is  Jesus  Christ  to  you?"  he  said:  "There 
in  my  bedroom  hangs  the  picture  that  is  the  greatest  inspiration  of  my 
life,  the  picture  of  Christ  crucified  on  the  cross,  that  I  may  see  it  night 
and  morning.  Every  night  before  I  go  to  bed  I  read  the  Bible.  I  have 
not  only  read  it  through,  but  have  read  it  again  and  again.  My 
favorite  passages  are  John's  Gospel  and  Paul's  practical  epistles  to 
the  Corinthians.  Every  morning  from  six  to  seven  I  spend  in  medita- 
tion and  prayer  and  hymns  before  I  go  out  for  the  day,  and  I  draw  my 
inspiration  from  Jesus  Christ,  and  His  power  to  uplift  the  outcast  and 
the  depressed.  None  other  has  inspired  such  social  consciousness.  I 
am  a  Christian — though  not  baptized,  not  on  the  records  of  the  Chris- 
tian Church.  The  Kingdom  may  not  be  coming  as  you  would  like  it,  but 
it  is  coming  nevertheless.  The  ideas  that  lie  at  the  heart  of  the  Chris- 
tian Gospel  are  permeating  every  department  of  Hindu  thought  and 
society,  and  the  Kingdom  is  coming  in  India." — D.  J.  Fleming,  Marks 
of  a  World  Christian^  p.  99. 


134  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 


I 


STUDENT    VOLUNTEERS    UNDER   THE    CRESCENT 

We  were  in  the  midst  of  the  most  cruel  and  heart-rending  atroci- 
ties that  have  ever  been  committed  by  men  on  their  fellow  men,  for  the 
Turks  had  again  let  loose  their  fury  and  their  fanaticism  upon  the  Chris- 
tian races.  Yet  in  that  group  .  .  .  more  than  one  hundred  young 
people  rose  and  by  a  sentence  one  by  one  committed  their  lives  to  the 
way  of  Jesus  ...  A  young  Armenian  girl  gave  as  her  testimony,  "I 
have  learned  in  these  days  of  the  conference  that  the  great  revenge  is 
the  revenge  of  love.  I  would  have  my  revenge  upon  the  Turks  by  lead- 
ing some  of  them  to  the  knowledge  of  thelove  of  God  as  I  have  found  it  in 
Jesus."  No  wonder  the  Turkish  boy  sitting  beside  her  rose,  and  with  trem- 
bling lips  said,  "I,  too,  stand  here  in  agony  for  the  truth.  I  see  that  what 
my  people  need  is  not  fine  buildings,  nor  even  schools  where  languages  and 
mathematics  and  history  are  taught,  but  my  people  need  a  new  heart 
where  the  spirit  of  love  shall  rule."  A  young  Armenian  student  gave 
as  the  closing  declaration  of  the  evening,  "I  do  not  feel  tonight  that  we 
are  in  Turkey  with  massacre  and  bloodshed  around  us,  but  I  feel  as 
though  we  were  in  Galilee  with  Jesus  in  the  midst." — S.  Ralph  Harlow, 
Student  Witnesses  Jor  Christy  p.  €2. 

TIME    AND    CHARACTER    IN   THE    NEAR    EAST 

Standing  high  up  on  the  tower  of  the  International  College  at 
Smyrna  amid  the  meteorological  instruments,  I  discovered  that  the 
Turkish  Government  at  Smyrna  was  taking  its  diurnal  time  by  electric 
signal  from  the  College.  That  fact  stood  as  a  symbol  and  as  a  proph- 
ecy of  the  approaching  hour  when  Nearer  Asia  will  accept  from  those 
splendid  Christian  laboratories  of  character  not  simply  their  standard  of 
time,  but  their  moral  and  at  last  their  spiritual  standards  at  once  of 
aspiration  and  attainment.  The  International  College  was  able  to  set 
the  standard  of  time  because  it  had  the  most  perfect  instruments 
for  observation  of  the  heavens.  It  and  its  companions  will  similarly 
set  the  standards  of  moral  and  spiritual  life  for  the  Orient,  because  their 
human  instruments  know  the  will  of  Him  to  whom  the  heavens  are  but 
the  work  of  His  fingers,  and  whose  being  we  see  completely  in  the  face  of 
Jesus  Christ. — Basil  Mathews,  'The  Riddle  of  Nearer  Asia^  p.  203. 


CHAPTER  FOUR 
VII.     AFRICA 

The  treatment  of  African  conditions  here  is  made  somewhat  disproportionate 
by  the  omission  of  full  discussion  of  the  conditions  of  native  paganism  and  the 
transforming  impact  of  Christianity.  Miss  Mackenzie's  An  African  Trail  with 
its  wonderfully  intimate  and  successful  treatment  of  this  matter,  recently  pub- 
lished in  this  series,  should  be  used  to  supply  the  needed  information. 

The  War  in  Africa.  In  a  recent  article  Dr.  James  Dexter 
Taylor,  an  experienced  Africa  missionary,  points  out 
that  when  the  Boer  War  was  going  on  the  attention 
of  the  world  was  riveted  upon  it,  but  that  during  the 
Great  War  a  conflict  many  times  greater  than  the 
Boer  War  was  raging  in  Africa,  but  the  world,  pre- 
occupied with  Europe,  hardly  realized  it.  Yet,  by 
the  fortunes  of  this  war  in  Africa,  Germany  lost 
possessions  five  times  the  extent  of  her  entire  Euro- 
pean domain  and  having  an  estimated  population  of 
twelve  millions.  Moreover,  the  war  in  Africa  was 
by  no  means  a  war  of  white  men  versus  white  men 
nor  were  the  Africans  unrepresented  on  the  battle- 
fields of  Europe. 

''France  is  said  to  have  drawn  half  a  million  native 
troops  from  her  African  possessions,  with  many  thou- 
sands more  of  laborers.  British  native  troops  from  both 
West  and  East  Africa  participated  in  the  German  East 
African  campaign.  The  Belgian  army  which  took 
Tabora  in  German  East  Africa  was  composed  almost  en- 
tirely of  natives  under  white  officers.  Portuguese  na- 
tive troops  took  part  in  the  same  campaign.  One  hun- 
dred and  sixty-seven  thousand  native  transport  carriers 
were  used  by  the  British  in  that  campaign,  besides 
stretcher  corps,  drivers,  etc.  From  South  Africa  93,000 
natives  went  forth  to  the  various  campaigns  and  20,000 


136  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

of  that  number  went  to  France  as  a  native  labor  con- 
tingent."* 

It  is  estimated  that  over  a  million  natives  of  Africa 
were  in  actual  military  service  and  with  the  conflict 
came  to  many  the  devastation  of  lands,  the  burning 
of  villages,  famine  and  death. 

New  Words  on  Thus  into  the  vast  continent  of  Africa 
the  African  Trails,  have  come,  as  into  Asia,  the  reactions 
and  changes  which  the  War  has  brought.  Even 
upon  such  simple  features  of  civilization  as  the  na- 
tives possess  the  high  cost  of  living  intruded  itself. 
Dr.  Taylor  reports  that  "advanced  natives"  had  to 
return  to  the  use  of  bark  cloth  and  other  primitive 
customs.  In  the  free  labor  markets  strikes  have  been 
fought  out  and  labor  agitators  are  at  work.  Political 
changes  have  begun  and  are  in  prospect.  Natives 
in  the  former  German  possessions  find  themselves 
under  other  governments  with  different  policies  of 
administration.  Furthermore,  new  ideas,  a  new 
consciousness  of  the  outside  world  are  filtering  along 
the  railroad  lines  as  they  penetrate  further  and  fur- 
ther in  and  new  conflicts  of  opinion  and  increased 
agitation  sift  along  the  jungle  trails.  To  those  who 
helped  the  white  man  fight  his  wars,  a  new  sense  of 
importance  has  come  that  will  range  far  beyond  the 
circle  of  actual  participants.  Africa  is  not  in  con- 
vulsion, but  far  and  wide  over  her  prodigious  area,  her 
120,000,000  of  Arabs,  Berbers,  and  Copts,  Abyssin- 
ians.  East  Indians,  Boers,  British  South  Africans, 
Liberians,  French,  Portuguese,  Italians,  and  all  the 
multiplicity  of  tribes  and  tongues,  there  are  passing 


*James  D.  Taylor  in  The  Missionary  Outlook  in  the  Light  of  the  War^  p.  127. 


v^?c   'im-  .  t 


Oi    % 

o  y' 

"I 

O    p 

g| 

CJ     HH 

m 

<    =2 


Q  2 

S     G 


Africa  137 

the  vibrations  of  a  new  energy,  of  a  new  quickening 
of  the  issues  of  Africa's  destiny. 

THE  RULERS  OF   AFRICA 

Governments  and  On  this  vast  continent,  big  enough  to 
Peoples.  contain  China,  India,  Argentina,  the 

United  States,  Sweden,  Norway,  France,  Germany, 
and  the  British  Isles,  the  nations  of  Europe  control 
huge  areas.  There  are  but  two  divisions  unruled 
by  the  white  man,  the  Republic  of  Liberia  and  the 
Kingdom  of  Abyssinia.  The  Union  of  South  Africa 
ranks  as  one  of  the  Dominions  of  the  British  Empire 
and  is  thus  practically  self-governing;  Egypt  is 
acquiring  a  large  measure  of  self-government.  All 
the  rest  is  governed  by  those  who  come  from  outside. 
France  is  responsible  for  over  4,000,000  square  miles 
and  25,000,000  people.  Great  Britain  for  2,800,000 
square  miles  and  29,000,000  people,  not  including 
South  Africa  (473,000  square  miles  and  6,000,000 
people),  Belgium  for  over  900,000  square  miles  and 
10,000,000  people,  Portugal  for  nearly  800,000  square 
miles  and  8,000,000  people,  Italy  for  600,000  square 
miles  and  1,000,000  people.*  In  addition  the  former 
possessions  of  Germany  cover  1,130,000  square  miles 
and  included  12,000,000  people.  These  have  been 
divided  between  France  and  Great  Britain  as  man- 
datories responsible  to  the  League  of  Nations. 

The  government  of  these  huge  areas  is  in  the  hands 
of  administrators  sent  out  by  their  home  govern- 
ments. France  has  gone  a  step  further  than  the 
others  in  having  native  representatives  of  some  of  the 

*].Y{..Yia.rTh,  Africa,  Slave  or  Free?  pp.  19-20.  Continental  United  States 
contains  3,567,000  square  miles. 


138  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

colonies  in  the  Chamber  of  Deputies  in  Paris  and  of 
all  on  its  Colonial  Council.  In  those  British  terri- 
tories known  as  Crown  Colonies  aminority  of  native 
representatives  sits  in  the  Governor's  Council.  Less 
representation  is  permitted  in  the  protectorates. 
It  is  nowhere  yet  possible,  except  in  the  experiment 
just  begun  in  Egypt,  to  provide  for  any  such  demo- 
cratic methods  of  government  as  are  known  in  Europe 
and  the  Americas,  not  only  because  of  ignorance  and 
inexperience,  but  because  there  is  no  such  individual- 
ism as  those  democracies  presuppose.  Within  the 
native  tribes,  there  are  many  democratic  aspects,  the 
selection  of  the  chief,  the  authority  of  the  council  of 
elders  or  chiefs  more  or  less  sensitive  to  the  opinions 
of  their  constituencies,  the  recognition  of  the  rights 
of  members  of  the  tribe,  but  there  is  no  such  rela- 
tion between  tribes,  no  such  "national''  conscious- 
ness, no  such  power  of  dealing  with  modern  nations 
as  would  make  possible  democratic  self-government. 

The  principle  supposed  to  underlie  European  colo- 
nial administration  in  Africa  as  enunciated  at  con- 
ferences in  Berlin  in  1885  and  at  Brussels  in  1890 
was  the  "protection  of  the  natives."  This  referred 
particularly  to  the  matters  of  slave-trading  and  rum 
selling,  and  in  large  areas  of  Africa  this  policy  has  been 
put  into  effect.  The  Treaty  of  Versailles,  referring 
to  the  population  of  the  former  German  territories, 
declares  "the  well-being  and  development  of  the  peo- 
ple concerned  form  a  sacred  trust  of  civilization"  and 
through  the  device  of  "mandates"  requires  the  na- 
tions concerned  to  exercise  their  trusteeship  in  the 
full  light  of  the  world's  observation.  If  the  inter- 
pretation of  this  statement  is  as  broad  as  honest  in- 


Africa  139 

terpretation  requires  and  if  administrative  and  legis- 
lative acts  adhere  faithfully  to  it,  a  new  era  is  promised 
for  Africa.  "True,"  writes  J.  H.  Harris,  a  well 
known  expert  in  African  affairs,  **the  League  of 
Nations  Covenant  is  subject  to  geographical  limita- 
tions, but  the  living  principles  which  it  enunciates 
will  either  shatter,  or  overflow,  all  arbitrary  boun- 
daries until  their  beneficent  and  heaHng  influences 
reach  the  uttermost  recesses  of  darkest  Africa. 
The  duty  of  maintaining  and  applying  them  belongs 
to  the  mandatory  Powers,  but  upon  civilization  falls 
the  task  of  watching  the  application  and  of  fostering 
the  growth  of  the  institution."* 

Watch  the  Already  there  are  rumors  that  all  is 

Mandates  1  not  going  well  in  some  of  these  man- 

dated areas.  Basil  Mathews,  writing  in  the  Metho- 
dist Times  of  London,  courageously  asserts  that  in 
the  sections  of  German  East  Africa  under  British 
mandate  "a  system  of  indentured  labor  is  in  active 
operation  in  a  way  that  constitutes  serfdom  and 
under  conditions  that,  eyewash  and  whitewash  being 
banished  for  the  moment,  practically  make  it  forced 
labor,"  that  natives  are  having  the  land  they  are 
actually  cultivating  turned  over  to  white  settlers 
without  redress,  that  an  industrial  system  is  being 
set  up  resembling  that  which  the  Bishop  of  Zanzi- 
bar characterized  under  the  title  "The  Black  Slaves 
of  Prussia."     Mr.  Mathews  adds: 

"Of  course,  we  do  not  as  a  British  people  want  to  have 
these  things  done.  We  detest  and  abhor  them.  But 
unscrupulous  financial  combines  ('without  a  soul  to  be 
saved  or  a  body  to  be  kicked')  bring  their  unseen  pres- 


*  Africa,  Slave  or  Free?  p.  230. 


140  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

sure  to  bear.  They  say  we  must  'develop  the  country/ 
by  which  they  mean  'suck  from  it  its  economic  re- 
sources' !  .  .  .  but  the  result,  in  the  only  terms 
that  matter  finally ^  the  terms  of  human  life,  is  that  in  place 
of  a  living,  loyal,  happy  community  rooted  in  the  soil, 
we  are  creating  a  disillusioned,  disappointed,  dissatis- 
fied, and  ultimately  rebellious  people."* 

THE  CONFLICT  OF  RACES 

The  Conflict  of  Undoubtedly  the  most  crucial  issue 
Races.  Africa  faces,  whether  under  manda- 

tory relationships  or  not,  is  the  conflict  between  the 
white  and  the  colored  races.  There  are  many  as- 
pects of  this  conflict.  One  of  them  is  the  whole  broad 
issue  whether  white  nations  shall  continue  to  secure 
their  profits  from  the  sale  of  liquor,  the  growing  of 
cocoa,  the  working  of  the  lands,  and  from  the  trans- 
portation of  such  goods,  as  in  many  cases  is  still  true, 
through  the  weakness  of  the  natives,  their  actual 
or  virtual  enslavement,  their  deprivation  of  their 
ancient  lands  under  the  forms  of  legal  procedure. 
"The  last  British  steamer,  conveying  a  cargo  mainly 
of  Dutch  and  German  provenance  to  West  Africa 
before  the  submarine  warfare  began,  took  from  Ham- 
burg and  Rotterdam  169,288  gallons  of  spirits,  22 
cases  of  wine,  brandy,  and  liqueurs,  all  to  be  unloaded 
in  the  Niger  Delta  for  the  mental  stupefaction  and 
bodily  ruin  of  the  negroes  of  Southern  Nigeria.^f 
In  the  year  1914-15  the  port  of  Boston,  Massachu- 
setts, shipped  to  Africa's  west  coast  more  than  a  mil- 
lion and  a  half  gallons  of  rum.  If  the  Prohibition 
Amendment   had    done    nothing   but  stop    this,   it 


*Methodist  Times y  London,  September  30,  1920,  p.  4 

tSir  H.  H.  Johnston,  Missionary  Review  of  the  Worlds  June,  191 9,  426,  429. 


Africa  141 

would  have  been  a  triumph.  Sir  Harry  H.  Johnston, 
a  noted  British  colonial  administrator,  further  says, 
"Alcohol,  distilled  of  course,  is  the  chief,  the  prepon- 
derating cause  of  native  and  inter-racial  trouble  in 
South  Africa.  Cape  brandy  is  the  main  cause  of 
attacks  of  black  men  on  white  women.  .  .  One 
never  reads  of  such  sexual  crimes  in  Cape  Colony, 
Zululand,  or  even  Natal;  presumably  because  in  those 
countries  missionary  influence  is  strong  and  has  been 
used  unswervingly  against  alcohol."* 

And  yet  how  difficult  is  the  task  of  the  missionary 
in  setting  up  higher  standards  of  family  morality, 
in  attacking  obscene  custom  and  speech  when  the 
natives  are  aware  that  far  and  wide  white  traders 
and  officials  keep  native  women  for  immoral  pur- 
poses ! 

"The  African  has  an  extraordinarily  logical  mind, 
and  is  now  questioning  why  his  women  folk  should  be 
debauched  by  white  men  whereas  such  grave  penalties 
are  attached  to  sexual  relationship  between  the  African 
and  white  women.  The  facilities  for  visiting  Europe, 
where  there  are  no  such  penalties,  but  where  actual  in- 
ducements exist  are  becoming  well-known  over  large 
areas  of  the  continent."! 

It  is  not  simply  immorality  that  shocks,  it  is  race  dis- 
crimination. In  the  areas  where  liquor  is  prohibited 
to  the  negro  it  is  admitted  for  the  use  of  white  men. 
The  white  man  by  a  moral  somersault  prohibits  it 
to  the  natives  because  of  its  terrible  effects,  but  per- 
mits it  for  his  own  use.  But  the  native  sees  that 
liquor  makes  the  white  man  as  drunk  as  the  black  and 

*Sir  H.  H.  Johnston,  Missionary  Review  of  the  Worlds  June,  1919,  426,  429. 
tJ.  H.  Harris,  Africuy  Slave  or  Free?  p.  164. 


142  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

reflects  "Why  this  hypocritical  race  discrimination?" 

Race  and  Labor.  The  attitude  of  a  large  proportion  of 
the  foreign  population  of  Africa  toward  the  native 
laborer  is  another  striking  evidence  of  this  racial 
antagonism.  When  General  Botha,  in  order  to  try  to 
settle  the  conflicts  over  land  between  the  two  races 
in  the  Union  of  South  Africa,  proposed  to  divide  the 
land  into  two  separate  allotments,  the  Beaumont 
Commission  to  fix  the  limits  of  these  allotments  re- 
commended that  the  4,000,000  natives  have  at  their 
disposal  40,000,000  acres  and  that  the  1,100,000 
whites  have  260,000,000  acres.  Protests  that  so 
much  land  was  to  be  allotted  to  the  natives  at  once 
arose!  If  the  native  has  land  that  he  can  work  for 
himself  he  cannot  be  compelled  to  work  for  the  white! 

In  British  East  Africa,  where  tracts  of  land  called 
"reserves"  are  set  apart  for  native  use,  the  plan- 
tation owners  have  urged  that  the  reserves  be  di- 
minished, that  instruction  in  agriculture  be  withheld 
from  natives,  and  other  measures  in  order  that  they 
may  be  forced  to  work  for  the  white  men.  When, 
to  meet  the  labor  shortage  in  South  Africa,  immi- 
gration from  overcrowded  India  began,  every  effort 
was  made,  in  spite  of  their  standing  as  citizens  of  the 
British  Empire,  to  prevent  their  settlement,  license 
fees  were  laid  upon  them,  legal  sanction  to  marriages 
was  refused,  property  interests  were  hampered.  Vigor- 
ous protests  by  the  natives  and  the  Government  in 
India  finally  righted  some  of  these  wrongs,  but  the 
end  is  not  yet. 

The  New  Slavery.  By  far  the  greatest  of  the  just  griev- 
ances which  the  native  Africans  have  against  white 


Africa  143 

governments  and  white  investors  is  that  unjust 
interference  with  liberty  with  or  without  forms  of 
contract  which  is  rightly  termed  slavery.  For  an- 
cient generations,  long  before  the  white  man  came, 
Africa  knew  slavery  in  its  domestic  form,  the  slavery 
of  the  patriarchal  type  and  its  variations,  holding  as 
personal  possessions  "wives  and  concubines,  men- 
servants  and  maid-servants.'*  This  still  continues. 
It  is  reported  that  German  East  Africa  alone  contains 
180,000  such  slaves. 

"Domestic  slavery  still  exists  over  wide  areas  of  the 
Continent  of  Africa,  where  it  leads  to  the  break-up  of 
families,  the  separation  of  husband  from  wife,  and  child 
from  mother,  for  no  system  of  slave-holding  is  thinkable, 
or  indeed  possible,  without  its  inevitable  concomitant 
of  slave-trading."* 

It  was,  however,  when  the  working  of  great  estates 
in  tropical  and  semi-tropical  climates  in  America, 
Africa,  and  the  islands  began  to  require  large  gangs 
of  laborers  able  to  endure  the  heat,  that  "civilization" 
became  a  participant  in  slave  trading.  The  story 
of  the  struggle  against  negro  chattel  slavery  in  the 
United  States,  England,  and  the  West  Indies  is  well 
known,  but  the  slowness  with  which  such  slavery  or 
its  camouflaged  form  has  been  eradicated  in  Africa 
is  hardly  realized.  What  was  it  but  most  horrible 
slavery  when  the  agents  of  the  notorious  Leopold  II 
and  his  financial  associates  in  Belgium,  France,  Amer- 
ica, and  Great  Britain,  first  depriving  the  natives  of 
all  right  to  their  land  and  then  to  the  produce  of  it, 
forced  the  natives  into  the  jungle  to  gather  the  profit- 
bringing  rubber,  by  floggings  and  mutilations,   by 

*J.  H.  Harris,  Africa,  Slave  or  Free?  p.  67.  ' 


144  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

holding  their  women  and  their  children  hostages  un- 
der terror  of  death  or  torture?  What  has  it  been  but 
slavery  when  men  and  women  and  young  boys  have 
been  seized  or  bought  for  rum  or  other  currency  far 
inland  in.  Angola,  Portuguese  West  Africa,  and 
brought  to  the  coast  in  shackles,  sometimes  half  of 
them  dying  by  the  wayside,  to  be  passed  through  an 
office,  asked  an  unintelligible  question,  registered  as 
having  signed  a  labor  contract,  and  shipped  to  a  sug- 
ar plantation  or  to  the  islands  of  San  Thome  and 
Principe  to  wear  out  their  lives  cultivating  cocoa 
plantations?  The  pressure  of  public  opinion  in 
Great  Britain,  Portugal's  ally,  from  1908  onward  has 
begun  to  bring  changes  and  some  10,000  of  these 
pitiable  "contract  laborers"  have  been  returned  to 
Angola  and  set  free,  but  20,000  to  30,000  still  remain 
on  the  Islands  at  an  annual  death  rate  of  120  per 
thousand.*  In  other  parts  of  Africa,  notably  in 
German  territory,  the  policy  of  forced  labor  has  been 
followed  with  similarly  disastrous  consequences  to 
the  natives.  Indeed,  it  may  be  asked  whether  the 
alienation  of  the  land  upon  which  the  native  has  for 
ages  gained  his  livelihood,  by  forcing  him  to  labor  at 
the  white  man's  price,  is  not  perilously  near  slavery 
by  wholesale. 

Foolishness  and  An  astonishing  aspect  of  all  this  sor- 
Its  Retribution,  rowful  and  horrifying  performance  is 
that  it  has  steadily  been  to  the  permanent  disadvan- 
tage of  the  white  men.  Much  underpopulated  as 
Africa  is,  the  supply  of  labor  has  been  further  re- 
duced by  the  effects  of  rum  drinking,  slave-driving 
cruelties,  and  stupid  provocation  of  native  rebellions. 

*J.  H.  Harris,  AJrica^  Slave  or  Free?  pp.  87  fF. 


Africa  145 

Moreover,  the  native  naturally  does  more  work  and 
better  when  working  freely  for  himself  than  under 
compulsion.  In  German  Kamerun  the  cocoa  plan- 
tations have  been  worked  by  forced  labor  with  white 
overseers.  In  the  British  Gold  Coast  the  native 
owns  the  land,  works  it  himself,  and  sells  his  cocoa 
product  to  British  merchants.  By  191 2  the  forced 
labor  of  the  Kamerun  had  increased  its  annual  pro- 
duction to  three  and  a  half  times  that  of  1904,  but 
the  free  landholding  labor  of  the  Gold  Coast  had  in- 
creased its  production  to  nearly  eight  times.  Why  then 
has  the  policy  of  maltreatment  of  the  labor  supply  been 
so  persisten t  .f*  Because  of  the  greed  for  immediate  and 
quick  profit,  however  secured.  This  same  force  we 
have  seen  operating  in  the  relations  of  the  Western 
world  with  the  Orient.  Is  it  not  to  be  expected  that 
from  Africa  as  well  as  Asia  should  come  signs  of  re- 
sentment.^ At  a  great  international  conference  of 
the  Negro  race  in  New  York  in  the  early  summer  of 
1920,  Mr.  Marcus  Harvey,  President  of  the  Negro 
Improvement  Association,  said,  ''The  bloodiest  of 
all  wars  is  yet  to  come,  when  Europe  will  match  its 
strength  against  Asia,  and  that  will  be  the  negro's 
opportunity  to  draw  the  sword  for  Africa's  redemp- 
tion." That  day  is  yet  far  in  the  future,  even  should 
the  Christian  conscience  of  the  world  fail  to  bring  to 
pass  cooperation  between  races.  But  how  horrible 
that  reasons,  such  reasons,  should  exist  for  saying  so 
bitter  and  terrible  a  word.  We  hear  another  Voice 
say,  ^^Depart  from  me.  .  .  .  inasmuch  as  ye 
did  it  not  unto  one  of  these  least.      .      .      .  " 


I46  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

WHAT  THE  missionary  STANDS  FOR 

Missionary  There  IS  one  group  of  white  men  in 

Champions  in  Africa  who  Seek  Africa's  redemption, 
Africa.  j^^l-  j^Q^  |3y  |-}^g  sword,  who  seek  its 

development,  but  not  by  investments  or  laws. 
These  are  the  missionaries.  What  have  they  accom- 
plished? Listen  to  Lord  Bryce  writing  of  South 
Africa:  "So  much  may  certainly  be  said:  that  the 
Gospel  and  the  mission  schools  are  at  present  the 
most  truly  civilizing  influences  which  work  upon  the 
natives,  and  that  upon  these  influences,  more  than 
on  any  other  agency,  does  the  progress  of  the  colored 
race  depend.'** 

Sir  Harry  H.  Johnston  writes  of  missionary  exer- 
tions for  prohibition:  "Missionary  influence  so  far 
swayed  European  governments  and  that  of  the 
United  States  that  in  the  Berlin  and  Brussels  con- 
ferences in  the  latter  end  of  the  nineteenth  century, 
much  of  the  interior  of  Africa  .  .  was  placed  out 
of  bounds  for  alcohol."! 

The  confidential  investigators  of  Leopold  II  re- 
ported to  him  that  in  the  Belgian  Congo  "the  mis- 
sionary becomes,  for  the  native  of  the  region,  the 
only  representative  of  equity  and  justice."!  Mr. 
Harris  writes: 

"Who  thundered  against  the  operations  of  the  British 
South  Africa  Company?  The  missionaries  of  the 
London  Missionary  Society.  Who  defended  the  Basu- 
tos?     The  Paris  missionaries.     Whom  did  the  forces 


*Cited  by  J.  H.  Harris,  Africa,  Slave  or  Free?  p.  220. 
^Missionary  Review  of  the  World,  June,  191 9,  p.  426. 
tCited  by  J.  H.  Harris,  Africa,  Slave  or  Free?  p.  255. 


Africa  147 

of  oppression  most  fear  in  East  Africa?  Bishop  Tucker. 
To  whom  did  the  oppressed  Zulus  look  in  the  day  of 
extremity?  The  Colensos.  Who  is  never  silent  to- 
day when  injustice  occurs  in  West  Africa?  Bishop 
Tugwell.  Who  laid  bare  the  existence  of  Portuguese 
slavery?  Messrs.  Shindler,  Swan,  Bowskill,  and  their 
fellow-missionaries."* 

The  Missionary's  But  it  IS  not  in  the  vIctoHes  they  have 
Joy.  won  for  the  natives  against  the  forces 

of  greed  that  the  missionaries  take  particular  delight. 
It  is  in  the  slowly  growing  numbers  of  those  who,  freed 
from  the  slavery  of  vice  and  evil  custom,  are  finding 
new  liberty  and  new  discipline  in  the  Gospel  of 
Jesus.  A  correspondent  in  the  Spectator  reported 
that  eighty  per  cent,  of  the  Basutos  and  Zulus  who 
served  in  the  war  were  the  product  of  mission  schools. 
*'They  are  Christian  men,"  he  added,  ''have  their 
own  native  padre,  and  thirty  or  forty  of  them  knew 
all  about  Donald  Hankey,  and  were  quite  familiar 
with  A  Student  in  Armsr\  When  the  missionary 
finds  his  or  her  children  in  the  Gospel  standing  fast  in 
the  faith  against  temptations  ancient  and  new,  then 
indeed,  there  is  joy  on  earth  as  well  as  in  heaven. 
What  a  sense  of  conquest  must  come  to  those  who 
can  write  as  Mrs.  R.  C.  Graham  writes! 

"The  contrast  between  the  children  of  a  Christian 
village  and  those  of  a  heathen  one  is  a  grand  testimony 
to  the  power  of  Christ  in  the  country.  The  children 
of  the  Christians  are  children  in  the  real  sense  of  the 
word,  brighter,  intelligent,  and  physically  strong,  and 
our  villages  are  full  of  them.  The  children  in  the  hea- 
then towns  are  like  little  old  men  and  women,  many  of 
them  syphilitic.     .      ,      .     Home  life  is  coming  into 


•J.  H.  Harris,  AJrlca^  Slave  or  Free?  p.  222. 
^London  Spectator,  July  14,  1917- 


148  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

many  of  our  districts,  each  little  home  being  a  centre 
of  Christian  influence.  Home  ties,  too,  are  becoming 
sacred  to  the  people  in  a  sense  unknown  to  former 
generations.  Other  virtues  essential  to  the  Christian 
life  are  becoming  more  manifest,  such  as  care  for  the 
aged  and  suffering,  kindness,  modesty  and  cleanliness."* 


MISSIONARY  RESULTS  AND    MISSIONARY  TASKS 

Foundation  Statistical  reports  to  the  Conference 

Stones  in  Place,  on  the  Christian  Occupation  of  Africa 
in  New  York  in  1917  showed  119  Protestant  societies 
at  work,  of  which  ^S  had  fewer  than  ten  missionaries 
each.  Thirty-six  of  the  societies  were  American, 
about  half  of  these  being  very  small.  The  whole 
missionary  force  numbered  over  5,300.  Communi- 
cant members  of  Protestant  churches  approached 
730,000,  while  over  a  million  more  were  baptized  ad- 
herents, children,  or  others  under  instruction.  Es- 
timates of  the  Roman  Catholic  church  membership 
indicate  over  a  million  members  and  adherents.  In 
some  districts,  such  as  Uganda,  the  Christians  now 
out-number  the  non-Christians  and  great  native 
churches  are  towers  of  strength  for  the  future  growth 
of  the  Church  in  Africa.  It  is  in  Uganda  that  the 
most  notable  steps  for  Christian  unity  have  been 
taken  in  Africa,  four  societies  working  here  having 
drawn  up  agreements  looking  toward  "the  establish- 
ment of  a  United  Church."  The  importance  of  com- 
bining education  with  the  Gospel  message  has  been 
recognized  from  the  beginning  by  the  missionaries 
and  the  educational  work  of  every  mission  is  exten- 
sive. 


*International  Review  of  Missions,  January,  1920,  pp.  102-3. 


Africa  I49 

There  is  a  great  demand  from  the  natives  for 
primary  schools,  the  native  government  of  Basuto- 
land,  for  example,  taxing  itself  more  per  capita  in 
order  to  provide  schools  for  natives  than  any  of  the 
white  governments  of  South  Africa  and  putting  more 
than  twelve  times  as  much  into  such  schools  in  pro- 
portion to  total  revenue  as  the  Orange  Free  State. 
The  missionaries  are  realizing  that  "industrial  mis- 
sions," so-called,  are  of  very  great  value,  not  only  to 
the  economic  interests  of  the  community,  but  as 
moral  training  for  the  individual.  Several  excellent 
missions  of  this  type  already  exist,  of  which  **Love- 
dale"  is  perhaps  the  most  widely  known.  More 
must  be  established.  Medical  work  is  also  of  prime 
importance  not  simply  for  its  curative  and  evan- 
gelistic value,  but  also  for  its  preventive  effects  in 
training  the  natives  in  the  ways  of  health.  Nearly 
every  missionary  renders  some  medical  service  of 
more  or  less  simple  kind. 

The  Missionary's  We  have  already  seen  some  of  the 
Task  in  Africa.  competitors  and  opponents  of  the 
missionary  in  his  African  '  task.  From  the  north, 
the  missionary  merchants  of  Islam  are  pushing  the 
frontier  of  their  faith  southward  along  the  trade 
routes,  and  from  the  sea  have  already  entered 
South  Africa.  There,  too,  not  only  Moslems  from 
India  and  Malaysia,  but  also  Hindus  are  pushing  in. 
Where  formerly  the  missionary  himself  was  the  in- 
fluence upsetting  pagan  custom,  now  the  great  in- 
dustrial centers  of  South  Africa,  the  extensive  rail- 
way lines  boring  into  the  jungles  and  demanding 
laborers  in  great  gangs,  the  strong  hands  of  energetic 
governments,  all  are  breaking  down  the  restraining 


I 

150  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations  " 

influences  of  tribal  law  and  the  headmen  without 
providing  that  new  discipline  which  the  missionary 
brings  in  the  Gospel.  Moreover,  he,  being  white, 
must  labor  against  the  baleful  antagonizing  work  of 
white  men's  effort  to  exploit  the  land  and  its  in- 
habitants, must  add  to  his  fight  against  African  hea- 
thendom a  battle  against  foreign  greed.  The  odds 
against  him  personally  are  severe.  Through  great 
sections  the  climate  is  inexpressibly  trying.  The 
work  is  largely  of  the  pioneering  type  that  means 
isolation,  loneliness,  the  testing  of  life  in  wild  pagan- 
ism. Languages  must  not  only  be  learned,  but  re- 
duced to  writing,  alphabets  invented.  Scriptures 
translated.  How  unfortunate  it  is  that  Africa  mis- 
sionaries should  ever  feel,  as  Dr.  Cornelius  H.Patton 
reports,  that  the  church  at  home  is  lacking  in  interest 
in  their  field!*  For  these  decades  are  critical  decades 
in  large  sections  of  Africa  and  not  only  do  the  mis- 
sionaries there  need  great  reinforcement  in  equipment 
and  funds,  but  many,  many  more  missionaries  are 
needed.  New  stations  must  be  extended  along  the 
trade  routes  to  check  Moslem  advance.  Industrial 
missions  must  be  established  with  sufficient  per- 
sonnel and  capital  to  render  for  Africa  such  magnifi- 
cent service  as  is  given  by  Hampton  and  Tuskegee 
here.  Vast  areas  are  totally  untouched.  For 
though  there  are  two  to  three  times  as  many  mis- 
sionaries in  Africa  as  in  India  or  China  in  proportion 
to  the  population,  the  great  distances  require  many 
more  missionaries  to  reach  the  same  number  of 
people. 


*C.  H.  Patton,  The  Lure  of  Africa,  p.  xi. 


Africa  151 

our  debt  and  our  duty 
Our  Unrealized  That  civilization  owes  Africa  for 
Debt  to  Africa.  benefits  conferred  by  her  is  not  com- 
monly realized.  We  hear  of  the  "white  man's  bur- 
den" in  "protecting"  the  natives.  What  about  the 
burden  borne  by  the  black  .f*  We  have  seen  how  ex- 
tensive his  services  were  in  the  war.  In  peace  they 
are  many  times  more  extensive.  All  of  the  cocoa 
grown  in  Africa  requires  his  cultivation.  Mr.  J.  H. 
Harris  estimates  that,  in  gathering  the  fruit  of  the  oil 
palm  from  which  much  of  the  "pure  olive  oil"  of 
commerce  as  well  as  margarines,  soaps,  and  high  ex- 
plosives are  made,  the  natives  climb  70  million 
trees — a  distance  of  a  million  miles  a  year.*  The 
diamonds  of  Kimberley,  the  gold  of  the  Rand  are 
mined  by  Negro  hands;  the  Cape  to  Cairo  railroad  and 
hundreds  of  miles  more  are  built  by  them.  What  is 
more,  the  entire  development  of  the  vast  tropical  and 
subtropical  areas  which  have  so  many  wonderful 
products  to  enrich  the  world  depends  upon  African 
labor  alone.  The  white  race  cannot  survive  there, 
much  less  carry  on  vigorous  labor.  Nor  is  the  con- 
tribution which  the  African  is  to  make  to  the  world 
a  material  one  only.  Sir  Sidney  Olivier,  formerly 
Governor  of  Jamaica,  in  answering  the  question 
why  the  white  men  who  devote  their  lives  to  the  wel- 
fare of  African  people  refuse  to  be  separated  from 
them,  writes: 

"It  is  that  those  who  have  to  do,  disinterestedly,  with 
the  negroid  races  come  to  love  them,  find  them  above 
the  average  rich  and  responsive  and  sympathetic  in 
some  of  the  most  characteristic  and  delicate  qualities 


*J.  H.  Harris,  Africa,  Slave  or  Free?  p.  29. 


152  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

of  essential  human  nature.  The  Negro  is,  of  course, 
very  far  behind  many  other  peoples  in  wide  fields,  of 
human  florescence,  but  in  some  of  the  qualities  that  are 
best  to  live  with  he  is  on  the  average  far  ahead  of  the 
average  industrialized  European.  He  is  singularly 
patient  and  forgiving,  very  delicately  sensitive  in  all 
matters  of  courtesy,  acutely  logical,  warmly  sociable, 
humorous  and  kindly;  and  in  any  physical  difficulty  or 
danger  a  most  devoted,  brave,  and  unwearied  comrade. 
Moreover,  he  is  deeply  and  fundamentally  religious, 
and  his  religious  and  affectional  temperament  responds 
exceptionally  to  the  Christian  formula."* 

Our  Unrealized  It  IS  the  Christian  opinion  of  the 
Duty  to  Africa.  world,  and  it  alone,  that  will  in  the 
last  analysis  bridge  the  evil  gap  between  race  and 
race.  Christians,  therefore,  of  every  land  must  be- 
gin by  attacking  the  race  prejudices  in  their  own 
land.  Wherever  they  acquiesce  in  or  approve  dis- 
criminations based  upon  conditions  for  which  the 
persons  discriminated  against  are  not  responsible,  as 
race  or  color,  therein  they  belie  their  faith  in  the 
Gospel  of  Christ;  therein  they  are  at  war  with  mis- 
sionary energies  overseas.  Justice,  as  well  as  charity, 
begins  at  home.  They  must  both  go  to  the  far  cor- 
ners of  the  earth.  A  moral  slum  in  Africa  is  a  moral 
danger  to  the  world,  and  the  world  cannot  afford  any 
more  such  dangers  at  present.  Upon  American 
Christian  public  opinion  and  the  channels  of  its  ex- 
pression rests  a  full  share  of  responsibility  for  point- 
ing out  such  conditions,  remedying  them  itself  so 
far  as  lies  in  its  power,  and  calling  upon  the  Christian 
public  of  the  other  nations  to  do  their  part,  too.  In 
this,  those  who  are  devoted  to  the  missionary  cause, 


*Preface  to  J-  H.  Harris,  AJrica^  Slave  or  Free?  p.  xi. 


^ 


Africa  153 

knowing  of  these  things  as  they  must,  must  take  a 
leading  part.  To  the  support  of  the  missionaries, 
to  the  increase  of  their  number,  to  the  thorough 
equipping  and  extension  of  new  and  important  in- 
stitutions full  attention  must  be  given.  There  is 
no  substitute  for  men  and  women,  no  substitute  for 
money,  when  they  and  it  are  consecrated  by  Chris- 
tian devotion  to  the  service  of  the  humanity  whom 
Christ  loves. 

When  King  Solomon  built  the  Temple  of  Jehovah 
in  Jerusalem,  he  made  it  beautiful  by  overlaying  its 
walls  and  timbers  with  fine  gold  brought  out  of 
Africa.  Shall  we  fail  to  bring  for  the  beautifying  of 
the  Kingdom  of  God  the  gold  of  African  character, 
made  fine  by  the  Gospel  of  Christ? 


154  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

VIII.     LATIN  AMERICA 

The  Empty  Latin  America,  which  includes  all  the 

Continent.  western    hemisphere    south    of    the 

United  States,  is,  even  more  truly  than  Africa  or 
Malaysia,  a  great  unfilled  reservoir  for  population. 
Into  it  during  the  coming  decades  there  will  pour  from 
the  East  and  the  West  and  eventually  from  the  North 
great  hosts  of  crowded-out  peoples.  In  its  area, 
twice  that  of  China,  it  has  only  one-fifth  as  many 
people;  more  than  twice  as  large  as  the  United 
States,  it  has  only  four-fifths  of  the  latter's  popula- 
tion. Little  Cuba  could  support  more  than  three 
times  her  fewer  than  three  million  people;  Ecuador, 
in  an  area  equal  to  New  York,  New  Jersey,  Penn- 
sylvania, and  Maryland,  could  provide  for  fifty 
million  instead  of  her  present  two  million.  Other 
countries  have  similar  possibilities.  Moreover,  every 
race  of  men  can  here  find  a  climate  suited  to  its  habit, 
and  resources  of  food  and  material  in  abundance. 
Cuba's  sugar  crop  in  1920,  one-fourth  of  the  world's 
supply,  sold  for  a  billion  dollars.  The  Argentine 
Republic  leads  the  world  in  the  exportation  of  beef 
and  wool.  Wheat,  coal,  petroleum,  nitrates,  tobac- 
co, asphalt,  precious  metals,  as  well  as  the  tropical 
products  of  rubber,  coffee,  fruits,  rare  woods,  and  the 
palm  oils  abound.  There  are  also  fewer  barriers  of 
language  and  dialect  than  in  any  other  continent  save 
its  northern  neighbor.  Although  a  large  portion  of 
the  twenty  million  Indians  speak  only  their  tribal 
dialects,  practically  all  the  remaining  sixty-five  mil- 
lion Latin  Americans  use  or  understand  Spanish  or 
its  kindre4  Portuguese. 


Latin  America  155 

The  Incoming  Tide.  Already  the  Streams  of  immigration 
have  turned  towards  this  comparatively  empty  con- 
tinent. For  many  generations  since  the  days  of 
discovery  and  conquest,  there  has  been  a  steady 
movement  from  Spain  and  Portugal.  Quite  early  in 
its  Spanish  history  large  numbers  of  Negroes  were 
brought  from  Africa  to  mitigate  the  slavery  of  the 
Indians  and  they  now  form  a  large  part  of  the  people. 
In  Colombia  many  Syrians  are  found.  The  most 
recent  large  movement  has  been  the  settlement  of 
Italians  in  Argentina  where  they  number  at  least  ten 
per  cent,  of  the  people.  It  is  reported  that  in  Buenos 
Aires  there  are  more  children  of  foreign  born  than  of 
native  parents.  In  fact,  the  Argentine  is  second  only 
to  the  United  States  as  the  goal  of  migrating  Euro- 
peans. There  is  a  large  German  colony,  and  Scan- 
dinavian, Russian,  and  British  immigrants  have  been 
coming.  Chile  has  many  Germans,  who  are  very 
influential  in  several  parts  of  the  "Splinter  Re- 
public." Oriental  immigration  has  found  its  natural 
objective  the  north  and  north-west  coast.  Peru  has 
some  35,000  Chinese.  Japanese  are  also  coming  to 
Peru,  and  into  Brazil,  Mexico,  and  Central  America. 
Japanese  statesmen  consider  South  America  a  favor- 
able place  for  their  overflowing  population.  Latin 
American  leaders  do  not  altogether  share  this  view. 
Peru  has  already  prohibited  further  inflow  of  Chinese. 
The  Argentine  has  turned  back  immigrants  from 
India. 

CLASS  AND  MASS  IN   LATIN  AMERICA 

Class  and  Mass.  When  the  first  settlers  came  to  the 
northern  part  of  the  New  World,  they  found  the 
original  inhabitants,  the  Indians,  comparatively  few 


156  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

in  number  and  living  by  hunting  rather  than  by 
agriculture.  As  the  Indians  were  thus  not  bound  to 
the  soil,  the  incoming  settlers  pushed  them  deeper  and 
deeper  into  the  forests.  In  Latin  America,  however, 
the  Spanish  and  Portuguese  came  as  conquerors 
rather  than  as  settlers  and  the  natives  whom  they 
encountered  were  largely  given  to  agriculture.  By 
their  conquests  the  Europeans  took  the  reins  of 
government  and  settled  upon  rather  than  among  the 
natives.  In  spite  of  considerable  intermarriage,  the 
results  of  this  settlement  are  found  to-day  in  the 
cleavage  of  the  population  into  two  widely  diverse 
parts.  Above  is  the  small,  educated,  well-to-do, 
mainly  white  governing  class.  Below  is  the  great 
poor,  ignorant  laboring  mass,  composed  of  Indians, 
Negroes,  and  chiefly  half-breeds  of  many  degrees  and 
combinations.  There  is  no  such  great  middle  class 
as  in  North  America  and  no  such  wide  distribution 
of  the  responsibilities  of  government  and  of  economic 
opportunities.  In  Argentina,  the  most  progressive 
of  the  republics,  there  is  a  rising  middle  class,  but  it 
is  still  very  small. 

Class  and  Mass  in  This  division  into  class  and  mass 
Government  and  manifests  itself  in  ways  which  deeply 
Education.  affect  the  life  and  happiness  of  the 

people.  In  the  first  place,  though  all  the  countries 
of  Latin  America,  except  a  few  European  possessions, 
are  self-governing  republics,  more  or  less  democratic 
in  constitution,  the  ignorance  of  the  masses  and  the 
Latin  American  habit  of  devotion  to  a  political  leader 
rather  than  to  a  political  principle  have  kept  the 
government  very  much  in  the  hands  of  a  class.  The 
shifting  of  the  government  from  one  party  to  another 


Latin  America  157 

by  election  or  revolution  is  more  often  the  effort  of 
the  office  seekers  to  oust  the  office  holders  for  the  sake 
of  political  advantage  than  a  decision  of  the  people 
upon  national  policies.  The  vote  of  the  mass,  when 
it  votes  at  all,  is  frequently  cast  at  the  direction  of 
employer  or  priest,  while  the  voter  himself  has  no 
knowledge  or  conception  of  the  issues,  if  there  are 
any.  Where  government  office  thus  becomes  a 
means  of  support  to  a  class,  administration  tends  to 
corrupt  practice  and  graft,  of  which  some  state  and 
municipal  governments  in  the  United  States  furnish 
the  nearest  examples  for  North  Americans.  The 
ignorance  of  the  masses  in  South  America  only  makes 
the  process  simpler  and  more  certain. 

Again,  the  educational  systems  are  established 
on  a  class  basis.  There  is  no  opportunity  for  the 
children  of  the  poor  to  advance  from  the  common 
primary  school  to  the  higher  schools  and  universities. 
For  this  higher  education  special  training,  out  of  the 
reach  of  the  mass  of  the  people,  is  required.  Except 
for  the  efforts  of  a  limited  number  of  enlightened  re- 
formers, there  has  been  little  interest  in  universal 
education.  Land  owners  regard  it  as  dangerous  to 
their  control  over  labor;  the  upper  class  fear  that  it 
will  disturb  their  privileges  and  position.  The  edu- 
cational tradition  of  the  dominant  Catholic  Church  is 
in  Latin  America  decidedly  weak.  The  masses 
themselves,  except  where,  as  in  the  towns,  they  be- 
come somewhat  aware  of  the  value  of  education,  are 
too  ignorant  to  understand  its  liberating  power  and 
would  resist  the  taxes  which  it  would  impose.  The 
result  is  seen  in  the  high  percentages  of  illiteracy 
quoted  for  the  various  countries,  ranging  from  forty 


158  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

per  cent,  in  Uruguay  to  ninety  per  cent,  in  Ecuador. 
The  educational  budgets  for  all  Latin  America,  with 
its  population  of  eighty-five  millions,  have  in  recent 
years  run  hardly  higher  than  that  of  New  York  City, 
with  its  five  and  a  half  miUion  people. 

Class  and  Mass  in  Though  class  government  and  limited 
Labor.  education    perpetuate    the    two-class 

condition,  its  root  is  in  the  labor  situation.  In  most 
of  Latin  America  the  land  is  held  by  the  well-to-do 
in  great  estates,  except  where  far  up  the  mountain 
valleys  Indian  tribes  still  remain  out  of  the  white 
man's  present  reach.  The  labor  supply  for  working 
these  estates  is,  owing  to  the  small  population,  not 
sufficient.  Some  method  must  be  used  to  hold  the 
laborers  to  the  land.  High  wages  and  measures  for 
the  welfare  of  the  laborer  would  cut  deeply  into  prof- 
its. Accordingly,  the  system  of  peonage,  finding 
congenial  soil  in  the  feudal  tradition  of  the  descend- 
ants of  the  conquistadores,  has  become  wide-spread. 
Its  form  varies  with  the  different  countries,  diminish- 
ing in  severity  the  further  one  goes  from  the  tropics, 
until  in  Argentina  the  laborer  is  as  free  as  in  the 
United  States.  Sometimes  the  form  is  that  of  a 
labor  contract,  signed  by  the  laborer  to  borrow 
money  for  a  festa,  the  debt  being  worked  off  gradually 
by  labor  for  the  creditor  at  some  distant  farm  or 
mine.  In  other  cases  the  creditor  provides  for  the 
physical  needs  of  the  debtor  at  charges  which,  with 
the  depressed  rate  of  wages,  he  can  never  pay  off. 
For  the  laborer  to  hope  ever  to  own  his  own  land  and 
to  live  on  its  produce  and  gain  economic  self-respect 
is  almost  impossible.  Peonage  is  a  millstone  about 
the  neck  of  the  lower  classes. 


Latin  America  159 

These  factors — class  governmentj  ignorance,  and 
exploitation  of  the  laborer — have  those  same  evil 
consequences  which  we  have  noted  in  the  lives  and 
the  character  of  the  rulers  and  the  ruled  in  other 
lands.  Eradicable  diseases  are  widely  prevalent  and 
unchecked; — Guayaquil,  for  instance,  is  one  of  the 
most  notorious  seed-beds  of  yellow  fever  known. 
The  infant  death  rate  is  extremely  high,  in  some  cities 
being  greater  than  any  recorded  in  other  parts  of  the 
world.  Except  for  the  festas  in  honor  of  some  saint, 
at  which  the  homely  merriment  of  simple-minded 
folk  is  made  vile  by  much  liquor,  the  life  of  the  work- 
er is  marked  by  squalor  and  dullness.  Under  the 
prevailing  looseness  of  marital  ties  home  life  is  for 
the  masses  made  the  more  unhappy  because  of 
economic  burdens. 

LATIN  America's  heritage 

Latin  America's  From  the  conquistador  and  the  cli- 
Heritage.  mate  have  come  to  Latin  America  not 

only  the  burden  and  blight  of  class  and  mass.  Other 
unfortunate  characteristics  have  that  same  origin. 
One  of  them  is  disdain  for  labor.  The  labor  system, 
described  already,  has  only  served  to  heighten  this 
disdain,  which  prevails  in  the  upper  class,  but  is  the 
fashion  for  all.  In  the  schools  the  method  of  learning 
the  practical  arts  and  applied  sciences  is  by  reading 
text-books  and  listening  to  lectures,  not  by  the  use 
of  hand  and  tool.  The  labor  of  housekeeping  is  done 
by  servants;  for  the  lady  of  the  house  herself  to  take 
a  hand  would  be  demeaning.  Just  so  soon  as  more 
energetic  immigration  fills  the  land,  or  the  increase 
in  population  makes  a  living  harder  to  get,  this  pride 


i6o         The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

will  have  to  yield  or  the  proud  go  to  the  wall  in  the 
competition. 

Another  heritage  which  is  even  more  unfortunate 
is  the  irregularity  common  in  the  relation  be- 
tween the  sexes.  It  is  estimated  that  in  Chile 
twenty-eight  per  cent,  of  the  births  are  illegitimate,  in 
some  cities  as  many  as  fifty-five  and  fifty-seven  per 
cent.;  in  Argentine  one  birth  in  every  five;  Lima, 
Peru,  fifty-one  per  cent.;  cities  in  Ecuador  one  in 
every  three  or  four.*  Undoubtedly  this  condition, 
especially  among  the  Indians  and  others  of  the  lower 
class,  is  partly  due  to  the  hindrances  in  the  way  of 
legal  marriage.  The  fee  required  by  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church,  not  to  mention  the  social  amenities 
of  a  wedding — is  beyond  the  income  of  the  peon. 
In  many  countries  civil  marriage  has  been  introduced 
partly  as  a  measure  to  meet  this  condition,  partly  to 
reduce  the  power  of  the  Church.  But  the  feeling  con- 
tinues even  there  that  marriage  is  only  real  when  per- 
formed by  a  priest.  Moreover,  in  some  places  where 
civil  marriage  is  required  it  is  surrounded  by  so  much 
red  tape  that  many  do  not  attempt  it.  Thus  the 
figures  for  illegitimacy  imply  more  unfaithfulness 
than  actually  exists.  As  Professor  E.  A.  Ross  puts  it: 
"Men  and  women  stand  by  one  another  better  than 
the  figures  show,  although  no  one  is  ready  to  say 
how  much  better ''\  Nevertheless,  laxity  in  the  rela- 
tions of  the  sexes  is  exceptionally  widespread.  The 
"double  standard'*  of  morality  among  the  men  of  the 
upper  classes  is  responsible  for  much  of  it.  Alcohol 
has  its  undoubted  share  of  blame.     There  is  a  lack  of 


*E.  A.  Ross,  South  of  Panama,  p.  225  S. 
tE.  A.  Ross,  South  of  Panama,  p.  230. 


WHAT   WILL    SHE    MEET   ON    THE    TRAIL    TO    CIVILIZATION? 


Latin  America  i6i 

worthwhile  activities  for  leisure  hours, — sports, 
tramping,  travel,  social  service.  The  South  Ameri- 
can is  thus  deprived  of  the  wholesome  preoccupations 
of  life  north  of  the  Rio  Grande.  Above  all,  those 
moral  restraints  which  come  from  a  vital  personal  ex- 
perience of  the  presence  of  God  are  widely  lacking  in  a 
land  where  the  educated  classes,  weary  of  superstition, 
are  largely  agnostic,  and  the  multitudes  are  under  the 
domination  of  a  religion  of  ceremony.  It  is  small 
wonder  that  in  some  parts  of  South  America  mascu- 
line mentality  shows  evidence  of  dissolute  life,  and 
that  childhood  runs  wild  because  motherhood  is  ig- 
norant, debased,  and  over-burdened. 

In  The  Least  of  These  in  Colombia^  Mrs.  Maude 
Newell  Williams  gives  several  illustrations  of  this  sad 
condition.     One  of  these  incidents  follows: 

"Yet  I  do  not  understand,  Dominga.  What  have 
you  to  do  with  the  children?  They  cannot  be  yours; 
you  are  just  a  girl  yourself." 

"Of  course,  my  Senora,  those  children  are  mine.'* 

"I  did  not  dream  that  you  had  children!  How  old 
are  they?'* 

"Who  knows?  They  are  but  tiny;  one  commences  to 
walk  a  little,  the  other  is  small,  very  small." 

"And  you  leave  them  alone  in  the  hut  all  day?  Who 
cares  for  them  while  you  are  away?" 

"Certainly  no  one,  my  Senora.  Who  is  there?  Of 
course  there  is  not  any  one." 

"Are  they  not  hungry,  cold?" 

"But  yes,  what  does  that  mean  to  say?'* 

In  my  simplicity,  for  I  had  not  been  long  in  Bogota, 
I  asked,  "Where  is  their  father,  Dominga?" 

"Who  knows  ?  I  have  not  seen  him  since  the  most  lit- 
tle one  was  born.     He  does  not  come  more." 


i62  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

The  woman  was  sent  home  through  the  descending 
floods  and  instructed  to  bring  the  children  when  she 
came  again.  The  next  morning  she  appeared,  carrying 
them  both.  Juanito,  the  elder,  with  his  sallow,  pinched 
face  and  great,  appealing  eyes,  wore  one  dirty  garment 
which  stopped  far  short  of  the  knees.  Carlito,  starved, 
dull  little  scrap  of  humanity,  was  partially  wrapped  in 
the  filthy  rag  of  a  shawl.  And  we  were  shivering  in  our 
woolens! 

Dominga  Is  one  of  the  sixty  out  of  every  hun- 
dred in  Colombia  for  whom  there  is  no  marriage. 
No  man  in  this  class  takes  the  slightest  responsibility 
for  the  upbringing  of  a  child;  that  is  for  the  mother 
alone. 

There  are  other  aspects  of  Latin  Americans  heritage 
which  are  full  of  promise.  It  is  in  them  that  the 
seeds  of  her  contribution  to  future  Christendom  lie. 
Latin  Americans  have  little,  if  any,  race-prejudice, 
in  marked  contrast  with  their  northern  neighbors. 
They  are  warmhearted,  ready  for  friendships,  stead- 
fastly courteous.  Again,  there  is  a  high  appreciation 
of  art  which  is  evident  in  their  public  buildings,  some 
of  which  have  a  world-wide  reputation  for  beauty  and 
elegance.  Parallel  to  this  are  the  fine  scholarship 
and  literary  gifts  of  many  of  the  upper  class.  Latin 
American  men  are  holding  their  place  in  international 
councils  and  many  of  them  are  recognized  as  savants 
in  numerous  branches  of  intellectual  activity. 

LATIN  AMERICA  AND  THE  WORLD  OUTSIDE 

Latin  America  Naturally  enough,  Latin  America,  in 
and  the  World  thought,  in  Culture,  in  rdigion  has 
Outside.  looked  toward  the  Latin  countries  of 

Europe  rather  than  toward  her  English-speaking 
neighbors  to  the  north.     Spain,  Portugal,  and  Italy 


Latin  America  163 

have  had  their  share  of  influence,  but  France  has  been 
especially  influential  upon  the  educational  system 
and  the  literature  of  South  America — and  less  happily 
in  the  steadily  growing  agnosticism  of  the  upper 
classes  and  the  widely  circulating  prurient  fiction. 
From  Europe  also  has  come  the  capital  to  develop  her 
marvelous  resources  and  with  Europe  has  been  by  far 
the  greater  part  of  her  foreign  trade.  Some  of  the 
smaller  republics  have  been  notoriously  unsteady  in 
their  public  finance  and  European  governments  have 
often  threatened  to  interfere.  It  is  in  this  connection 
that  the  United  States  was  first,  in  a  sense,  forced 
upon  the  attention  of  Latin  America.  Determined 
that  European  colonial  rivalry  and  European  quarrels 
should  not  get  a  foothold  in  America,  the  United 
States  enunciated  the  Monroe  Doctrine  as  a  warn- 
ing to  Europe  to  keep  out  and  as  a  recognition  of 
the  responsibility  of  the  United  States  for  the  pres- 
ervation of  order  in  the  western  hemisphere.  This, 
however,  did  little  to  change  the  trend  of  Latin 
American  interest.  But  the  opening  of  the  Panama 
Canal  under  North  American  direction,  and,  in  par- 
ticular, the  recent  war  have  done  much  to  bring 
the  Americas  closer  together.  ThewarhaltedEurope^s 
ability  to  furnish  capital,  to  buy  raw  materials  and 
to  supply  manufactures  and  forced  South  America  to 
turn  to  North  America  for  help. 

Where  before  the  war  there  were  no  northern 
banks  operating  in  South  America,  there  are  now  over 
a  score  with  several  branches  each.  Similarly  where 
there  were  no  North  American  passenger  steamship 
lines  between  the  two  continents,  now  there  are 
several  and  the  time  of  the  trip  from  New  York  to 


164  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Valparaiso,  for  example,  has  been  cut  in  half.  Latin 
America  is  also  using  the  assistance  of  North  Ameri- 
can banks  to  establish  industries  of  her  own  that  will 
make  her  less  dependent  upon  the  outside  world. 
Other  bonds,  such  as  the  Pan-American  Financial 
Congress,  the  Pan-American  Scientific  Congress,  the 
Pan-American  Federation  of  Labor  are  drawing  the 
continents  of  the  western  hemisphere  together.  In 
four  years  of  the  war  the  annual  foreign  trade  of 
the  United  States  with  Latin  America  leaped  up  a 
billion  dollars  higher  than  before.  Just  as  the  whole 
world  has  been  shrinking  and  the  Far  East  become 
near,  so  the  Americas,  once  "next  door  neighbors," as 
early  settlers  might  use  the  phrase,  are  now  be- 
coming "next  door"  in  the  city  dweller's  sense. 

American  To  the  Latin  American  the  attitude 

Neighboriiness.  of  her  rich  neighbor,  the  United 
States,  is  somewhat  perplexing.  To  the  citizens  of 
the  United  States  the  determination  of  the  policy 
which  his  country  should  follow  in  Latin  American 
questions  is  equally  perplexing.  In  the  Mexican 
War  of  1846-8  the  United  States  took  from  Mexico 
the  territory  now  occupied  by  California,  Nevada, 
Utah,  Arizona,  New  Mexico,  and  part  of  Colorado. 
In  1898  the  United  States,  starting  out  in  behalf  of 
"Cuba  Libre,'*  acquired  Porto  Rico,  Guam,  and  the 
Philippine  Islands.  In  1903  through  a  convenient 
revolution  of  a  section  of  Colombia,  the  United 
States  secured  the  Canal  Zone  from  the  resulting 
Republic  of  Panama.  The  financial  instabihty  of 
several  of  the  smaller  republics  has  caused  the 
United  States  to  intervene  several  times  to  main- 
tain order,  collect  debts, — substantially  to  rule-^for 


Latin  America  165 

longer  or  shorter  periods  of  time  the  affairs  of  a  Latin 
American  nation.  During  the  United  States  Army's 
expedition  into  Mexico  after  the  bandit  Francisco 
Villa,  a  great  cry  for  military  occupation  of  Mexico 
arose.  Again  and  again  United  States  investors  in 
the  Latin  countries  have  played  local  and  interna- 
tional politics,  even  to  the  extent  of  fomenting  revolu- 
tions in  order  to  gain  additional  concessions  or  to  se- 
cure those  already  gained  against  regulation  or  con- 
trol by  the  government  of  the  exploited  country. 
Small  wonder  that  many  Latin  Americans  look  upon 
the  Monroe  Doctrine  as  a  notice  to  Europe  that  the 
United  States  desires  to  pursue  a  program  of  impe- 
rialism  in   Latin   America  undisturbed  by  Europe. 

Yet,  on  the  other  hand,  the  United  States  estab- 
lished Cuba  as  a  free  republic  and,  after  again  inter- 
vening for  three  years  to  restore  order,  has  again  with- 
drawn; the  independence  of  the  Philippines  is  a  matter 
of  the  near  future;  the  demand  to  plant  a  United 
States  Army  in  Mexico  has  never  succeeded,  and  the 
"A.  B.  C.  group" — Argentina,  Brazil,  and  Chile — 
has  been  called  in  by  the  United  States  to  consider 
the  difficulties  of  the  Mexican  situation.  Another 
element  promoting  misunderstanding  is  the  distinct 
difference  in  temperament.  The  Latin  American, 
leisurely,  romantic,  philosophical,  given  to  social  and 
cultural  pursuits,  and  the  North  American,  practical, 
hustling,  assuming  a  superiority  which  he  often  does 
not  have,  indifferent  to  social  niceties,  often  fail  to 
understand  one  another.  Whenever  to  this  difference 
is  added  a  sense  of  injustice  or  the  threat  of  power, 
ill-will  is  sure  to  be  cherished,  but,  when  mutual 
acquaintance  breeds    mutual    respect    and  genuine 


i66  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

friendliness  is  fostered,  the  foundation  of  peace  and 
progress  is  laid. 

THE  ISSUES  OF  LIFE  IN   LATIN  AMERICA 

The  Issues  of  Life  Enough  has  been  said,  even  in  so  brief 
in  Latin  America,  a  Summary,  to  show  the  conditions  of 
Latin  American  life  upon  which  a  patriotic  and 
thoughtful  Latin  American  would  look  with  concern. 
Destructive  standards  of  personal  ethics,  the  ig- 
norance and  unhappiness  of  the  mass,  the  concentra- 
tion of  wealth  and  power  in  the  hands  of  the  few 
make  the  charting  of  the  future  difficult.  Will  these 
conditions  increase  or  gradually  be  eradicated? 
What  forces  are  there  to  afford  the  needed  guidance? 
Everyone  of  these  issues — because  of  the  hero  wor- 
ship of  the  Latin — comes  back  to  the  question  of  the 
character,  the  moral  fibre  of  the  present  and  future 
leaders  of  Latin  America.  "It  is  with  great  sadness,'* 
wrote  a  college  dean  in  Brazil,  "that  I  witness  the 
steady  decrease  in  the  number  of  unselfish,  idealistic, 
genuine  men."*  And  here,  as  in  the  Near  East,  as 
anywhere,  the  supreme  force  for  the  making  of  char- 
acter is  personal  devotion  to  Jesus  Christ. 

Yet  to  thousands  in  the  student  and  educated 
classes  religion  is  only  a  superstition  to  be  discarded. 
In  some  of  the  universities  scarcely  a  score  of  students 
report  a  belief  in  God.  The  wave  of  agnosticism  and 
atheism  which  has  swept  over  the  educated  youth  in 
all  lands  where  Roman  Catholicism  is  the  predomi- 
nant creed  reached  its  apex  in  Latin  America  where 
that  Church  has  been  most  superstitious  and  bigoted. 
This  is  not  to  say  that  Roman  Catholicism  in  Latin 

*C.  S.  Cooper,  Understanding  South  America,  p.  ^61, 


1 


Latin  America  167 

America  Is  not  influential,  for  in  some  states  it  wields 
considerable  political  and  social  authority,  and  only 
lately  has  religious  freedom  for  other  faiths  been 
won  in  every  country.  But  great  cathedrals  are 
conspicuous  for  their  lack  of  worshippers  and  out- 
side the  towns  it  often  seems  as  if  a  compromise  be- 
tween the  Indian  paganism  and  Catholic  faith  had 
been  struck.  Too  often  the  Church's  monopoly  of 
alcohol  has  meant  the  degradation  of  the  common 
people  in  the  abuses  of  the  festas.  Words  written  of 
Peru  and  Argentina  might  well  be  applied  to  all  Latin 
America: 

"Although  in  Peru  the  traveler  to-day  finds  many  true 
and  worthy  adherents  to  Christianity,  the  impression 
that  deepens  in  one's  mind  as  he  goes  from  city  to  town 
and  throughout  the  rural  section,  is  that  religion  has  lost 
its  reality  and  lives  to-day  all  too  largely  in  ceremonial 
and  artificial  veneer.  It  needs  something  new  and 
strong  and  original  coming  fresh  out  of  the  hearts  and 
souls  of  men  who  have  seen  their  God  through  some 
personal  experience."  And  in  Argentina  will  be  found 
"an  exhibition  of  external  materialism  that  combines 
the  worship  of  pleasure  found  in  Paris  with  a  devotion 
to  money-getting  seen  in  the  most  utilitarian  sections 
of  the  United  States.  .  .  .  It  is  a  people  that  have 
had  their  fill  of  ceremonial  religion,  which  has  not  satis- 
fied the  cravings  of  either  the  intellect  or  the  soul.  In 
few  countries  is  there  a  more  insistent  need  for  a  religion 
that  reveals  itself  in  character.  The  reaction  from  all 
this  lust  of  the  world  and  the  pride  of  life  is  already  be- 
ginning to  be  evident  in  Argentina.  He  who  can  help 
her  in  the  discovery  of  a  new  and  satisfying  religious 
idealism  will  be  her  lasting  friend."* 


*C.  S.  Cooper,  Understanding  South  America^  pp.  348,  364. 


i68  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

The  Mission  of  ^^  IS  to  meet  just  this  need  that  Prot- 
the  Evangelical  estant  missions  are  at  work  in  Latin 
Churches.  America,  striving  by  personal  friend- 

ship, by  schools  and  churches,  to  present  Jesus  Christ 
as  its  living  Redeemer.  More  than  fifteen  hundred 
missionaries,  occupying  some  two  hundred  and  fifty 
stations,  are  the  force  in  the  field.  Nearly  all  come 
from  North  America,  two-thirds  of  the  number  from 
nine  societies  in  the  United  States.  The  fruits  of 
their  labors  are  seen  in  a  Protestant  church  member- 
ship of  nearly  150,000  and  a  school  enrolment  of 
nearly  60,000.  Missionary  cooperation  is  well  ad- 
vanced, several  theological  seminaries,  presses,  and 
periodicals  being  union  enterprises.  The  most  strik- 
ing example  of  cooperation  is  the  recent  adjustment 
of  territory  in  Mexico  where  eight  large  societies  have 
divided  up  the  field  in  such  a  way  as  to  prevent  over- 
lapping and  to  reach  untouched  districts,  two  socie- 
ties moving  their  entire  force  from  their  original  areas 
to  sections  entirely  new  to  them.  Other  cooperative 
efforts  are  being  fostered  by  a  Committee  on  Coopera- 
tion established  as  a  result  of  the  Panama  Congress. 
Good  foundations  for  higher  education  are  laid  in 
one  or  more  schools  of  high  school  grade  or  better  in 
nearly  every  Latin  American  country  and  most  of 
them  are  full  to  their  capacity.  A  modest  number 
of  periodicals  in  Spanish  and  Portuguese,  several  of 
them  "union"  enterprises,  is  published,  though  one  of 
the  most  marked  needs  of  the  field  is  Christian  litera- 
ture in  nearly  every  form. 

Indeed,  one  cannot  really  say  that  the  field  is 
thoroughly  occupied  in  any  but  the  most  limited 
sense.     Divide  up   two  hundred  and  fifty  stations 


WHAT  WILL  THEIR  NEW  HOME  BE  LIKE? 
A   South    American    Indian    bride    and    groom. 


Latin  America  169 

among  twen*:y  republics  and  six  other  states,  one 
of  the  former  being  nearly  twice  the  size  of  the 
United  States  and  another  nearly  half  as  large, 
and  they  will  not  go  very  far.  In  South  America 
there  is  vast  room  for  the  pioneer  missionary.  The 
largest  unevangelized  area  in  the  world  is  reported 
to  be  a  stretch  of  territory  two  thousand  miles  long 
and  five  hundred  to  fifteen  hundred  miles  wide  in  the 
center  of  the  continent. 

Again  there  rings  in  the  ears  of  the  church  in  North 
America  the  cry  of  the  missionary  for  reinforcements. 
Again  the  church  hears  its  Lord  saying,"  The  harvest 
truly  is  great,  but  the  laborers  are  few.*'  Scores  are 
answering  the  call,  more  must  go;  with  them  must 
go  tools.  Scriptures,  literature,  buildings.  Their  mis- 
sionary purpose  must  be  shared  to  the  full  by  the  church 
at  home.  It  too  must  become  so  neighborly — as  the 
Good  Samaritan  was  a  neighbor — that  unfriendliness, 
suspicion,  and  ill-will  in  the  western  hemisphere  shall 
be  no  more.  Vigorous  evangelical  churches  in  Latin 
America  will  arouse  to  new  and  finer  life  the  Roman 
Church  in  those  lands;  they  will  join  battle  publicly 
with  unwholesomeness,  agnosticism,  and  spiritual 
decay. 

"In  Chile,  one  of  the  richest  men  in  Santiago 
recently  came  at  night  to  the  young  pastor  of  a 
Methodist  church,  and  cried  out  for  help  in  his 
spiritual  struggles."  The  battle  is  on.  When  the 
tides  of  deep  and  unswerving  loyalty  to  Jesus  Christ 
as  the  world's  Redeemer  and  the  Saviour  of  each 
man's  soul  rise  high  in  North  America  and  South 
America  together,  their  differences  of  temperament 
will  become  complementary  and  not  divisive,  then  a 


lyo  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

dynamic  example  of  international  good-will  will  be 
set  before  the  world,  then  the  comradeship  of  North 
America  will  be  unsullied  by  suspicious  act,  and  in 
South  America  an  unshakeable  foundation  will  be 
laid  for  vast  Christian  empires  in  the  future.  But 
only  then! 

THE    DOCTOR   ON   HIS   JUNGLE    ROUNDS    IN   AFRICA 

"In  our  travels  we  were  obliged  to  ford  rivers  with  rafts,  and 
we  feared  any  moment  the  mules  would  jump  off  or  upset  them. 
We  crossed  one  river  in  a  boat  made  from  mahogany  which  be- 
longed to  a  big  Zulu  chief.  Many  of  the  rivers  were  infested 
with  hippopotami  and  crocodiles — crocodiles  we  saw  sunning 
themselves  by  the  dozen  on  the  beaches.  We  went  through 
swamps  that  were  the  home  of  the  wild  boar,  and  other  times 
through  jungles  so  entangled  that  we  had  to  dismount  and 
squeeze  the  mules  through.  On  one  road  the  lions  were  so  bold 
that  our  carriers  refused  to  take  it,  and  we  had  to  seek  another. 

"I  wish  I  could  describe  some  of  the  meetings  we  held.  These 
black  people  are  so  sincere  when  they  become  Christians,  and 
nothing  can  shake  their  faith  in  Christ  as  their  Saviour  when  they 
have  accepted  Him.  Many  of  the  meetings  were  held  in  the 
open  air  at  night.  In  the  distance  dozens  of  camp  fires  could  be 
seen,  where  Christians  had  gathered  and  were  surrounded  on  all 
sides  by  big  crowds  of  raw  heathen.  As  the  native  Christians 
began  to  sing,  it  seemed  to  me  that  the  music  mounted  higher 
than  the  stars  to  the  very  throne  of  God,  and  as  their  voices  rang 
out  in  child-like  faith  in  prayer,  God  seemed  very  near  and  real. 
When  several  hundred  would  gather  at  the  altar  service,  or  in 
the  committee  meeting  where  candidates  sought  admission  for 
church  membership,  it  was  plainly  seen  that  Jesus  meant  all  in 
all  to  them.  And  these  were  the  people  who  had  been  charm 
worshippers  and  whose  former  'altars'  had  consisted  of  a  piece 
of  cloth  tied  to  a  tree,  around  which  had  been  placed,  after  a 
clearing  had  been  made,  some  flesh,  blood,  fruit  and  beads.  On 
our  trip  153  were  taken  into  the  church,  and  many  expressed 
their  desire  to  live  a  Christian  life.  I  could  not  help  but  think 
He  reveals  Himself  to  the  babes  and  to  the  unlearned. 


Latin  America  171 

"Regarding  the  sick,  we  never  pitched  tent  where  we  ever  got 
through  with  them,  and  would  minister  away  into  the  night,  to 
persons  having  diseases  of  every  description.  As  we  left  the 
villages  the  Christian  people  would  lead  the  way  through  the 
winding  forest  paths  singing  *God  be  with  you  till  we  meet  at 
Jesus'  feet.*  " — Missionary  News. 

"the  entrance  of  thy  word" 

Near  Iquique  are  130  towns  of  from  500  to  several  thousand 
population.  Only  two  have  Gospel  services  of  any  sort.  More 
inaccessible  are  other  towns,  equally  destitute. 

Last  week  word  came  that  two  brothers  were  at  Santa  Catalina 
in  the  home  of  the  native  pastor  and  desired  to  see  us.  They  had 
come  eighty  miles  on  horseback  across  the  desert  from  Esquina. 
Their  nearest  post  office  is  distant  three  days'  journey.  No 
newspapers  can  be  bought  in  Esquina,  but  it  is  the  center  of  a  rich 
valley  and  one  of  these  men  is  the  Judge,  the  community's  high- 
est official. 

After  the  death  of  their  grandfather  they  found  a  Bible  among 
his  effects,  and  began  to  read  and  meditate.  Eight  months  ago 
they  experienced  conversion.  Their  testimony  met  with  oppo- 
sition, but  they  were  persistent  and  now  by  the  aid  of  that  old 
Bible  have  won  fifteen  others  to  Christ  and  are  having  Gospel 
services  twice  a  week.  Up  to  last  week  they  had  never  seen 
other  Christians  nor  heard  anyone  preach. — Missionary  News. 


CHAPTER  FIVE 

IX.     WHAT  THE  WORLD  NEEDS 

In  the  preceding  chapters  we  have  been  rapidly 
surveying  the  conditions  which  the  missionary  enter- 
prise faces  in  Japan  and  Korea  and  China,  in  India 
and  the  world  of  Islam,  in  the  Near  East,  in  Africa,  in 
Latin  America.  We  have  seen  something  of  the 
hopes  of  the  nations,  of  the  promising  characteristics 
of  their  people,  of  the  foundations  of  the  Kingdom  the 
world  around.  Swiftly  as  we  have  moved,  certain 
matters  stand  out  as  of  highest  significance  to  the 
future  of  Christ's  Kingdom  among  the  nations. 
**He  anointed  me  to  preach  good  tidings  to  the  poor; 
he  hath  sent  me  to  proclaim  release  to  the  captives, 
and  recovering  of  sight  to  the  blind,  to  set  at  liberty 
them  that  are  bruised,  to  proclaim  the  acceptable 
year  of  the  Lord.*'  These  words  Jesus  made  His 
own.  It  is  the  poor,  the  ignorant,  the  oppressed,  for 
whom  He  cares,  for  whom  His  church  must  care.  It 
is  the  burdens  under  which  men  stagger  that  the 
servants  of  His  Kingdom  must  lift,  if  the  Kingdom  is 
to  be  established.  What  do  these  burdens  appear  to 
be,  as  we  have  studied  the  peoples  of  the  world? 

THE   BURDENS   OF  MANKIND*.  POVERTY 

The  Burdens  of  The  first  of  these  burdens  is  poverty. 
Mankind: Poverty.  Living  in  our  comfortable  land,  we 
know  little  of  it.  Hard  times — that  is,  times  harder 
than  other  times — we  know.  But  the  poverty  of  the 
non-Christian  world  is  foreign  to  us.  Famine  is  a 
word  used  only  of  other  parts  of  the  world.      Yet 


174  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

it  is  familiar  out  yonder.  Christian  orphanages  are 
sheltering  famine  orphans  in  Japan.  As  these  lines 
are  being  written,  twenty  millions  of  human  beings  in 
North  China  are  facing  starvation  and  whole  families 
are  committing  suicide  to  escape  the  agonies  of  the 
winter.  ''Famine  in  India"  was  once  a  common 
newspaper  headline.  Thanks  to  the  skill  of  British 
engineers  and  agriculturists,  India's  periodic  famines 
are  at  the  vanishing  point,  yet  still  millions  are  ab- 
jectly poor.  Indentured  labor  in  Africa  and  its 
Latin  American  equivalent,  peonage,  bear  fruit  in 
poverty  as  well  as  in  slavery.  In  the  center  of 
Europe  itself  hundreds  upon  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  children  are  being  fed  their  one  and  only  meal  a 
day  at  relief  kitchens  and  the  gaunt  spectre  of  Death- 
by-starvation  stalks  the  streets  of  once  proud  cities. 
Yet  all  this  is  only  the  bitterest  of  poverty  where  life 
itself  is  in  daily  peril;  millions  more,  earning  daily 
bread,  are  unable  to  procure  more  than  the  bare 
necessities.  The  measure  of  the  physical  pain,  of 
the  stunted  bodies  and  stunted  minds,  of  hearts 
made  sick  by  hopes  ever  deferred,  by  powers  never 
used,  is  beyond  the  grasp  of  heart  or  mind.  If  we 
are  to  build  Christ's  Kingdom  this  awful  burden 
must  be  lifted. 

The  Sources  of  Why,inaworld  so  rich,  is  mankind  so 
Poverty.  tortured  by  utter  destitution?     The 

question  is  a  pivotal  one.  Two  answers  are  certain. 
First,  mankind  in  its  struggles  upward  has  not  yet 
learned  to  order  its  life  to  provide  at  all  points  for 
the  normal  or  for  the  emergency  needs  of  food  for 
its  enormously  increased  population.  The  channels 
through  which  commodities   flow   to  meet  human 


What  the  World  Needs  175 

needs  are  not  large  enough,  not  sufficiently  free  from 
obstructions.  Great  Britain  feeds  half  her  popula- 
tion with  imported  food  brought  by  thousands  of 
ships,  but  North  China,  in  the  hour  of  her  distress, 
has  not  the  railroads  over  which  she  may  draw  from 
West  China's  superabundance  of  grain  the  substance 
she  needs.  Under  the  pressure  of  the  need  for  food, 
engineers  in  western  North  America  and  in  India 
have  led  water  into  desert  lands.  But  in  Europe  the 
destructiveness  of  war  and  the  barriers  of  hatred  it 
erected  have  made  thousands  unable  to  produce  the 
goods  which  can  be  exchanged  for  food — they  live  in 
a   man-made   desert. 

The  second  answer  is  that  poverty  is  caused  by  the 
misuse  of  wealth,  not  only  the  wealth  of  the  weal- 
thy, but  the  wealth  of  ordinary  folks.  The  conduct  of 
trade  and  industry,  the  exploitation  of  natural  re- 
sources have  as  their  dominant  objective  maximum 
profits  and  not  maximum  service  of  the  world.  The 
advantaging  of  self  far  outweighs  the  interests  of 
others.  The  aim  of  the  opium  trade  is  not  drugged 
men,  but  profits;  the  importation  of  alcohol  into 
Africa  is  not  to  make  drunkards,  but  profits;  the 
holding  of  slaves,  whatever  the  method  of  legalizing 
it,  is  not  because  of  race  prejudice,  but  for  profits. 
Every  one  of  these  outlawed  traffics  makes  poverty. 

But  it  is  not  only  in  the  evil  trades  that  poverty  is 
a  consequence  of  the  seeking  for  profits.  One  of  the 
reasons  why  railroads  do  not  yet  join  North  China 
and  West  China  is  because  Chinese  "squeeze'*  has 
made  financing  a  road  almost  impossible.  The 
revelations  of  war  profiteers  in  the  United  States, 


176  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

whether  individuals  or  corporationSj  is  an  indication 
of  one  of  the  most  powerful  forces  for  the  preserva- 
tion of  poverty,  especially  where  the  individual  or 
the  corporation  has  control  over  some  necessary  of 
life.  It  was  the  influence  of  profit  seekers  that 
maintained  import  duties  against  the  Philippines 
and  forbade  them  to  tax  exports  to  the  United 
States  when  the  latter  first  took  charge  of  the  islands. 

It  is  the  pressure  of  investors  upon  the  Colonial 
Offices  of  the  world  that  puts  it  into  the  power  of 
"giants"  of  industry  and  finance  to  dispossess  some 
native  population  of  its  acres  and  force  it  into  a  prac- 
tical slavery.  It  is  the  demand  for  high  and  quick 
profits  that  has  caused  France  steadily  to  encroach 
upon  the  ancient  holdings  of  Siam,  that  has  brought 
European  nations  face  to  face  with  one  another  in 
China,  that  has  held  nearly  all  weaker  peoples  of  the 
world  under  subjection  to  nations  with  heavier  guns. 
One  could  count  on  the  fingers  of  one's  hands  the  in- 
stances where  the  dominant  reason  leading  any  na- 
tion to  undertake  the  control  of  a  weaker  nation's 
destinies  has  been  any  other  than  the  opportunity 
to  profit  by  its  weakness  or  to  prevent  a  scandal  over 
the  brutalities  of  its  chartered  companies.  And  all 
over  the  world  the  exploitation  of  labor — a  fearful 
cause  of  poverty — follows  modern  industry. 

All  over  the  world  the  fuse  has  been  laid  for  war — 
and  war  brings  always  poverty — by  that  policy  which 
is  called  "economic  imperialism,"  but  which  is 
nothing  but  national  greed.  A  European  war  was 
nearly  started  by  the  Kaiser's  clash  with  France  in 
the  interest  of  German  firms  in  Morocco  in  1911.     It 


What  the  World  Needs  177 

is  fundamentally  for  commercial  reasons  that  the 
Near  East  threatens  to  be  a  tinderbox.  The  German 
and  subsequently  the  Japanese  seizure  of  Kiaochow 
were  for  the  control  of  railroads  and  mines.  The 
German  nation  would  never  have  sided  with  Austria 
against  Httle  Serbia,  had  its  head  not  been  filled  with 
dreams  of  "Berlin  to  Bagdad/* 

All  this  is  not  to  say  that  inducements  to  invest 
for  profit  are  wrong.  At  this  stage  of  human  progress, 
the  capital  which  the  world  must  have  for  trade  and 
industry  or  be  immensely  more  poverty-burdened, 
can  only  be  secured  by  such  inducements.  Nor  is  it 
to  say  that  any  nation,  weak  or  strong,  should  be 
guaranteed  exclusive  control  of  the  natural  riches  of 
its  native  land,  for  in  a  world  so  closely  knit  together 
all  the  natural  wealth  of  the  world  must  be  held  in 
trust  for  all  its  inhabitants.  But  it  is  to  say  that  if 
half  of  the  brilliant  commercial  and  industrial  abili- 
ties of  the  world  were  turned  as  eagerly  upon  the 
elimination  of  poverty  as  upon  the  making  of  per- 
sonal and  corporation  fortunes,  poverty — this  biting, 
crushing  poverty — would  oppress  men  no  more. 
It  is  to  say  that,  without  knowing  it,  peoples  are 
being  educated  and  betrayed  by  their  governments 
into  supporting — as  patriotic — policies  of  national 
conduct  that  would  shame  them  beyond  words  in 
personal  affairs.  It  is  to  say  that  for  thousands  of 
powerful  men  covetousness  is  the  master  motive  and 
that  hundreds  of  thousands  more  care  little  as  to  the 
morals  of  their  corporations,  their  unions,  or  their 
government  so  long  as  dividends  come  in,  wages  are 
high,  or  prosperity  is  favoring  them. 


178  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ignorance 

The  Burdens  of  The  sccond  burden  upon  mankind  is 
Mankind:  ig-  ignorance,  the  dumb  and  helpless  ig- 
norance, norance  of  the  illiterate.  It  is  esti- 
mated that  in  two-thirds  of  the  world — the  non- 
Christian  two-thirds — only  one  man  in  twelve,  one 
woman  in  twenty-five  can  read  or  write;  to  all  the 
rest,  some  eight  hundred  and  fifty  millions,  the  doors 
to  the  storehouses  of  the  world's  wisdom  are  heavily 
barred.  In  Africa,  of  eight  hundred  and  sixty  lan- 
guages and  dialects,  five-sixths  are  not  yet  reduced 
to  writing.  This  vast  illiteracy  can  be  measured  only 
by  estimating  the  ignorance  and  superstition  which 
it  walls  in.  When  population  presses  upon  the  food 
supply,  ignorance  of  ways  of  better  agriculture,  of 
the  machines  to  reduce  the  severity  of  labor  and 
increase  output,  is  a  tremendous  factor   in  poverty. 

Unlimited  human  energies  of  mind  and  spirit  go  to 
waste,  bitter  cruelties  are  inflicted  by  men  on  them- 
selves and  their  children  in  Wind  obedience  to  ancient 
superstitions.  In  all  the  non-Christian  world  there 
is  not  yet  a  stable  democratic  government,  for  such  a 
government  cannot  survive  where  the  horizon  of  the 
citizenry  hardly  lifts  above  the  margin  of  their  village 
lands.  When  the  electorate  does  not  know  what 
responsible  government  means,  irresponsible  govern- 
ment has  free  play  to  the  peril  of  peace  and  the  op- 
pression of  the  ignorant.  As  in  the  case  of  poverty, 
this  ignorance  is  in  part  due  to  the  fact  that  progress 
has  been  faster  in  some  parts  of  the  world  than  others. 
But  it  is  also  due  to  the  fact  that  in  scarcely  any  in- 
stance where  Western  governments  have  assumed 
responsibility  for  Oriental  peoples  have  they  set  up 


What  the  World  Needs  179 

any  such  opportunities  for  popular  education  as  they 
demand  at  home.  They  have  feared  that  education 
might  make  their  dominance  less  secure,  the  attain- 
ment of  their  purposes  less  successful. 

RACE  PREJUDICE 

The  Burdens  of  ^  third  burden  which  galls  the  shoul- 
Mankind:  Race  dcrs  of  mankind  and  which  must  be 
Prejudice.  lifted  is  race  prejudice.     This  is  fun- 

damentally a  matter  between  the  white  race  and  all 
other  peoples,  for  it  is  in  the  efforts  of  other  races  to 
migrate  to  lands  held  by  the  white  race  that  conflicts 
arise.  Shiploads  of  Hindus  have  been  turned  back 
from  Canada  and  Argentina.  Chinese  are  prohibited 
from  entering  Peru.  In  Natal  in  South  Africa  native 
born  Indians  whose  parents  were  brought  in  as  labor- 
ers by  hundreds  of  thousands  cannot  vote  or  even 
ride  in  a  trolley  car.  Thinly  populated  Australia  is 
hastily  erecting  barriers  to  keep  back  the  coming 
flood  of  immigration  from  the  neighboring  continent 
and  is  asking  Great  Britain  to  help  her  to  keep  the 
Japanese  away.  The  United  States  bars  immigra- 
tion of  Chinese  labor.  Racial  discrimination  against 
Japanese  immigrants  is  a  constantly  irritating  source 
of  friction  between  Japan  and  the  United  States, 
while  the  latter  has  the  huge  race  problem  of  her 
Negro  citizens  always  present.  Even  in  far-away 
Samoa  Chinese  residents  are  forbidden  to  bring 
Chinese  wives  or  to  take  back  to  China  the  Samoan 
women  whom  they  marry. 

In  many  of  those  countries  which  are  already  well 
populated  with  white  men,  there  is  the  fear  that 
the    unlimited    admission    of    Asiatic    immigrants, 


i8o  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

whose  scale  of  living  is  low,  would  completely 
upset  the  labor  market  and  destroy  the  level  of  cul- 
ture and  comfort  to  which  those  countries  have  been 
able  to  attain.  Here  prejudice  has  a  root  in  the  in- 
stinct of  self-preservation.  Where  the  white  races 
forbid  Asiatics  to  settle  lands  not  populated  by 
white  men,  as  East  Africa  and  the  Pacific  Islands, 
there  is  not  even  such  a  basis  for  discrimination. 

What  must  be  the  thoughts  of  the  intelligent 
leaders  of  Asia  when  they  see  all  about  the  world  walls 
raised  up  to  shut  out  its  overflowing  population  and 
know  that  the  white  race  has  pushed  its  undesired 
control  over  all  Africa  except  little  Liberia  and 
Abyssinia,  over  all  the  Americas,  over  all  Southern 
Asia  save  Arabia,  Afghanistan,  and  Siam,  over  all 
Malaysia,  over  all  northern  Asia,  and,  had  not  Japan 
stood  in  the  gate,  might  even  now  hold  Eastern  Asia 
as  well!  What  are  their  feelings  when,  in  addition 
to  the  heavy  handed  rule  of  the  white  masters,  the 
latter  in  word  and  act  show  openly  that  they  despise 
them?  Small  wonder  that  men  predict  that  the 
next  world  war  will  be  "the  war  in  the  Pacific." 

Furthermore,  when  even  a  limited  number  of 
Oriental  immigrants  are  domiciled  in  a  white  man's 
land,  in  addition  to  the  inevitable  barriers  of  lan- 
guage, custom,  and  ignorance,  acts  of  prejudice  occur. 
Their  native  born  children  are  forbidden  the  public 
schools.  Attempts  are  made  to  prevent  their  women 
from  coming  with  them.  They  are  denied  the  owner- 
ship of  land  which  immigrants  from  other  lands  are 
perfectly  free  to  own.  Their  presence  is  made  an 
issue  for  politicians  to  manipulate,  with  misrepre- 


What  t:se  World  Needs  i8i 

sentations  by  the  column  in  press  and  periodical. 
How  can  the  spirit  of  brotherhood  that  is  required  to 
meet  the  stupendous  burdens  of  poverty  and  ig- 
norance be  brought  about  between  men  under  such 
conditions?  How  can  peace  come  upon  the  world 
when  half  the  world  continually  slaps  the  other  half  in 
the  face?  Race  prejudice  is  not  a  ponderous  bur- 
den, but  its  sharp  edges  cut  deeply  into  the  already 
burdened  shoulders  of  men  and  women  and  children. 

,MISGOVERNMENT 

The  Burdens  of  ^  fourth  burden  upon  mankind  is 
Mankind:  Mis-  selfish,  inefficient,  or  non-responsible 
government.  government.     Government  fixes   the 

taxes,  heavy  or  light,  which  the  people  pay;  govern- 
ment uses  its  income  from  taxes  to  the  betterment 
or  the  misfortune  of  the  people;  government  makes 
or  fails  to  make  laws  against  public  evils,  drugs, 
alcohol,  prostitution;  government  regulates  or  fails 
to  regulate  industry  and  commerce  for  the  welfare  of 
the  people;  government  usually  is  responsible  for 
public  education;  government  makes  war,  conquers 
or  surrenders,  to  the  benefit  or  detriment  of  its  own 
people  and  of  all  other  peoples.  Over  a  few  square 
miles  petty  despots  still  exercise  these  powers;  but 
the  English  Revolution  of  1688  and  the  French  Revo- 
lution of  1789  foretold  the  end  of  despotism,  of  auto- 
cracy. The  Great  War  itself  marked  that  end  in  the 
West  by  the  fall  of  the  Kaiser  and  the  Czar.  Only  in 
Japan,  of  all  the  important  nations  of  the  modern 
world,  does  a  monarch  still  rule  "by  the  divine  right 
of  kings,'*  and  even  there,  there  are  practical  limits 
upon   his    power. 


1 82  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Thus  with  few  exceptions  all  the  peoples  of  the  earth 
are  living  either  under  governments  of  a  republican 
form*  or — a  very  different  thing — under  the  rule  of 
representatives  of  republican  governments.  Save 
for  five  little  European  colonies,  all  the  governments 
of  North  and  South  America  are  republics  or  prac- 
tically so.  All  the  European  nations  are  either  re- 
publics or  democratically  controlled  monarchies. 
China  is  a  republic.  South  Africa,  Australia,  New 
Zealand  are  self-governing  dominions  with  republican 
governments.  Liberia  is  a  republic.  Whether  the 
government  of  any  one  of  these  countries  is  honorable 
or  corrupt,  peace-loving  or  war-seeking,  effective  or 
incompetent,  depends  upon  two  groups  of  people — 
the  great  mass  of  the  people,  who  by  vote  or  other  ex- 
pressions of  opinion  can  control  the  government, 
and  those  who,  in  or  out  of  the  government,  are  the 
leaders  of  the  people.  Democracy  gives  a  better 
hope  for  the  world  than  autocracy,  but  democracy  is 
not  an  automatic  cure-all.  Even  when  the  people 
are  literate  and  experienced  in  politics,  scandals 
occur  in  government  departments,  the  civil  service 
may  become  a  byword,  and  "party  workers*'  look 
with  some  certainty  to  appointment  to  well-paid 
government  positions  as  a  reward.  Moreover,  only  a 
few  issues  are  ever  decided  by  popular  vote,  only  a 
few  more  are  determined  by  an  active  public  opinion 
and  in  every  issue  where  the  people  are  indifferent, 
the  action  or  policy  of  the  entire  nation  depends  on 
the  wisdom  and  integrity  of  the  few  officials  or  repre- 
sentatives who  are  in  authority. 

In  matters  of  diplomacy,  the  people's  voice  is  heard 

•Either  republics  or  constitutional  monarchies  with  responsible  parliaments. 


What  the  World  Needs  183 

even  less,  their  consent  still  more  unsought.  We 
may  condemn  Japan's  attempt  to  force  demands  on 
China  in  secret,  but  Great  Britain  and  France  gave 
secret  assurances  that  they  would  not  interfere. 
Other  secret  agreements  were  made  concerning  the 
Near  East,  some  of  them  promising  one  thing  to  one 
group  and  its  rc^j-erse  to  another.  Practically  every 
diplomatic  problem  in  Europe  is  honeycombed  with 
secret  agreements.  By  them  statesmen  bargain  and 
combine,  guessing  at  the  next  war  or  the  next  stroke 
of  their  rivals,  seeking  some  advantage  to  their 
commercial  or  national  interests,  and  binding  the 
peoples  they  represent  to  future  courses  of  action 
without  their  knowledge  until  the  day  of  reckoning 
breaks.  Rarely  is  a  diplomat  traitor  to  his  nation, 
but  on  scores  of  occasions  the  self-seeking  of  nations 
has,  by  the  secrecy  of  diplomacy,  betrayed  the  world 
to  the  verge  of  or  even  into  war.  Democratic  control 
of  international  affairs  for  the  weal  of  the  world  and 
the  healing  of  the  breach  between  capital  and  labor 
— a  second  problem  for  democracy — are  issues  of 
life  and  death  even  to  modern  democratic  nations. 

The  Government  When  we  turn  from  those  nations 
of  Subject  Nations,  which  are  themselves  democratically 
organized  to  those  lands  which  are  subject  to  them, 
another  aspect  of  the  burden  of  misgovernment 
appears.  Here  are  most  of  Africa,  a  very  large  part 
of  Asia,  and  the  Pacific  Islands,  ruled  by  men  who  are 
not  the  choice  of  nor  responsible  to  those  whom  they 
rule.  They  hold  their  place  by  virtue  of  the  superior 
military  force  which  they  represent.  If  evil  is  done, 
responsibility  is  upon  these  colonial  governors  and 
the  governments  which  appoint  them.     The  doctrine  of 


184  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

the  League  of  Nations  Covenant,  that  control  over 
weaker  people  is  a  sacred  trust  to  be  administered  on 
their  behalf,  was  a  mighty  step  forward,  but  very 
quickly  in  the  League  Assembly  efforts  were  made  to 
prevent  effective  supervision  of  mandates.  Power- 
ful nations  did  not  wish  their  dealings  with  subject 
peoples  looked  into.  For  whatever  may  have  been 
the  method  by  which  these  weaker  peoples  became 
subject  to  the  more  powerful,  methods  of  colonial 
administration  differ  widely.  Some  are  amazingly 
brutal  and  selfish;  others  endeavor  to  combine  a 
policy  of  profit  with  such  measures  of  education  and 
economic  improvement  as  will  not  imperil  their  con- 
trol over  the  people  and  the  country^s  resources; 
very  rarely  does  any  nation  administer  the  affairs  of  a 
colony  with  a  view  to  making  it  a  self-governing  in- 
dependent nation.  Every  nation  which  is  responsible 
for  a  weaker  people  has  it  in  its  power  to  make  the 
burden  of  mankind  greater  or  less  according  to  its 
care  for  them  and  its  readiness  to  insist  on  obedience 
to  the  principle  of  the  "sacred  trust"  among  all  na- 
tions. Whether  its  own  government  and  that  of  its 
dependencies  is  selfish  or  serving,  peace-breeding  or 
war-breeding,  effective  or  careless,  depends  ultimate- 
ly upon  the  moral  ideals  of  its  people,  upon  the  moral 
character  of  its  leaders  and  officers. 

EXAGGERATED  NATIONALISM 

The  Burdens  of  ^  ^^^^  burden  upon  mankind  to-day 
Mankind:  IS      an      exaggerated      nationalism. 

Exaggerated  "Deutschland  Uber  alles"  is  paralleled 

Nationalism.  jj^  sentiment,  if  not  in  words,  in  many 

a  country  the  world  around.     It  is  not  surprising 


o    MARTE 


il'lUVlllLlWl 


IMPORTED  FROM  THE  UNITED  STATES  I 

North  American  movies  interpret  us   to  South  American   neighbors.     Shall 

we  be   understood? 


What  the  World  Needs  185 

that,  animated  by  hopes  of  freedom,  by  the  demo- 
cratic stirrings  of  the  war,  Korea,  India,  Egypt 
should  burst  into  flaming  nationalistic  aspirations 
and  demand  the  rights  of  self-government.  But 
though  this  is  nationalism  at  a  high  pitch  it  is  not  the 
kind  of  nationalism  which  is  a  burden  to  the  world. 
That  high  loyalty  to  one*s  country's  freedom,  to  her 
prosperity  and  safety,  which  is  true  patriotism  has 
held  some  of  the  most  noble  traditions  of  the  human 
race,  has  given  rise  to  much  of  its  greatest  poetry, 
to  many  of  its  greatest  deeds,  and  many  of  its  great- 
est characters. 

But  it  is  one  thing  to  fight  for  national  liberty, 
to  strive  to  make  the  laws  and  institutions  of  one's 
country  the  best  in  the  world  and  to  defend  them, 
and  another  thing  to  hold  that  other  nations  are  to 
be  despised,  that  nothing  can  be  learned  from  them, 
that  by  force — actual  or  threatened — other  nations 
should  be  compelled  to  submit  to  the  institutions  and 
government  of  one's  own.  It  is  just  this  that  Japa- 
nese imperialists  have  been  seeking  to  do  to  Korea, 
that  German  Imperialists  boasted  that  they  would  do 
everywhere,  that  In  every  land  an  active  group,  large 
or  small,  believes  in  and  promotes.  Happy  is  the 
land  that  Is  willing  to  learn  from  others,  that  it  may 
be  the  greater  for  the  world's  service;  but  every  group 
of  nationalists,  every  nation  which  Is  quick  to  believe 
evil  designs  of  others,  which  fosters  race  prejudice^ 
which  would  kill  men  of  other  lands  to  gain  wealth 
and  power  is  a  tremendous  peril  to  humanity.  There 
are  such  groups  and  such  nations.  Edith  Cavell  was 
right  when  In  her  last  hours,  facing  execution  for  her 


i86  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

patriotism  by  men  who  were  also  patriotic,  she 
wrote,  *'I  see  that  patriotism  is  not  enough." 

SPIRITUAL  BURDENS 

The  Spiritual  There  are  other  burdens  upon  man- 
Burdens  of  kind  which  might  be  discussed  here. 
Mankind.  Such  IS  disease,  now  cutting  off  a 
wage-earner  in  his  prime,  throwing  crushing  weight 
against  those  already  at  the  breaking  point,  maiming 
little  children,  causing  agony  and  loss  unrecorded 
and  unguessed,  and  again  sweeping  across  all  lands, 
scourging  and  slaying  by  hundreds  of  thousands,  as 
did  the  influenza  and  as  typhus  is  threatening  to  do.* 

But  there  is  one  other  group  of  burdens  which  can- 
not go  unnoticed  in  these  pages.  They  are  humani- 
ty's spiritual  burdens.  The  haunting  fear  of  the 
morrow  which  poverty  brings,  the  anguish  which 
follows  in  the  wake  of  war  and  disease  are  among 
them.  Such  is  the  sense  of  outrage — bitter  because 
hopeless — when  the  weak  suffer  injustice.  **The 
dark  places  of  the  earth,*'  wrote  the  psalmist,  "are 
full  of  the  habitations  of  cruelty.'*  Yet  through  all 
these  unhappinesses  and  also  in  the  life  of  multitudes 
on  whom  poverty,  disease,  injustice  have  never 
fallen  heavily  there  is  a  deeper  feeling  of  the  hopeless- 
ness of  men's  struggle  against  limitations,  of  the 
vanity  of  aspiration.  It  is  heard  among  rich  as  well 
as  among  poor,  among  the  powerful  as  well  as  among 
the  weak.  He  whose  ambition  was  wealth  attains 
it  to  find  it  unsatisfying;  he  who  was  eager  for  fame 

*The  recent  world-wide  epidemic  of  influenza,  which  counted  in  India  alone 
six  million  deaths,  had  its  origin  in  Central  Asia,  where  there  were  not  even  mis- 
sionary doctors  to  discover  and  stamp  out  the  plague  at  its  source,  as  they  had 
done  in  the  case  of  the  pneumonic  plague  in  Manchuria. 


What  the  World  Needs  187 

discovers  in  it  no  food  for  his  heart;  he  who  sought 
and  acquired  power  feels  chains  about  him.  Little 
of  such  news  reaches  the  columns  of  the  press;  little 
is  said  of  it,  but  again  and  again  in  the  conversation 
of  friend  with  friend,  in  a  will  which  some  one  has 
drafted,  there  re-echoes  Paul's  cry,  "For  the  good 
that  I  would,  I  do  not,  but  the  evil  which  I  would 
not,  that  I  do.  .  .  .  O  wretched  man  that  I  am, 
who  shall   deliver  me   from   this   body  of  death!'* 

There  is  another  burden  akin  to  this  consciousness 
of  failure,  this  sense  of  baffling  limitations,  this  cry  for 
freedom  from  moral  chains.  It  is  the  burden  of  low 
ideals,  of  moral  carelessness  and  intellectual  slovenli- 
ness. Who  can  calculate  the  drag  upon  humanity 
of  those  who  are  simply  "indifferent!"  Or  of  those 
who,  resisting  the  impulse  for  the  noble,  the  kindly,  or 
the  honest  act,  steadily  make  themselves  still  more 
incapable  of  unselfish  and  truthful  living!  One  needs 
but  to  ponder  upon  what  some  men  have  achieved 
for  humanity  to  realize  that  it  is  true  of  the  world,  as 
well  as  of  India,  that  there  are  no  undeveloped  re- 
sources to  be  compared  to  "the  neglected  and  uncul- 
tivated powers  of  the  masses."  Nor  is  there  any 
greater  tragedy  than  that  of  the  marvelous  talents  that 
have  been  blotted  out  of  the  service  of  humanity's 
need  by  selfishness,  ill-will,  and  indifference.  This 
is  the  burden  of  sin.  And  at  the  end  there  is  death, 
that  grim  and  fearful  spectre,  against  whom,  in  every 
city  and  hamlet,  in  the  open  country  and  on  tKe  high 
seas  the  world  around,  men  struggle  in  the  despera- 
tion of  the  will  to  live  or  in  the  horror  of  the  unknown 
future.  Out  of  the  griefs  of  separation  from  loved 
ones,  out   from   confused   imaginings   of  hope   and 


1 88  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

fear,  comes  the  last  cry,  ''U  a  man  die,  shall  he  live 
again?" 

WHAT  THE  WORLD  NEEDS 

What  the  World  Again  and  again  as  we  have  been  con- 
Needs,  sidering  the  burdens  of  mankind,  it 
has  stood  out  inescapably  that  the  center  of  human 
woes  lies  in  the  grip  which  covetousness  and  pride 
have  upon  men.  Laws  may  be  passed,  enforcement 
bureaus  may  be  established,  economic  forces  may  be 
controlled,  at  least  in  part,  to  the  world's  advantage, 
but  so  long  as  these  two,  or  either  of  them  have  any 
mastery  in  the  hearts  of  men  no  sure  step  forward  will 
be  made.  The  great  need  of  humanity  is  unselfish 
character. 

Slowly  across  the  changing  scene  of  history  have 
passed  men  who  have  established  new  standards  of 
conduct,  slowly  new  ideals  have  become  the  common 
heritage  of  all.  But  the  central  issue — how  shall 
these  ideals  be  attained? — steadily  persists.  Chinese 
scholars  find  in  Confucius  a  system  of  ethics  to  them 
complete.  But  they  find  in  Confucius  no  source  of 
power.  Indian  reformers  cry,  ''Back  to  the  Vedas," 
but  the  backward  look  to  a  tradition  that  is  already 
losing  its  grip  will  discover  no  adequate  character- 
making  power.  Where  shall  the  world  turn  for  that 
which  will  make  covetous  men  self-sacrificing,  which 
will  cause  men  of  proud  hearts  to  bend  low  to  serve 
humanity?  Whence  shall  come  that  which  will 
shatter  indifference  and  put  alert  consciences  in 
place  of  callousness,  which  will  establish  power  to 
overcome  where  wills  are  weak  and  wavering? 

This  is  not  all  the  world  needs.   The  longings  of  men 


Whai  the  World  Needs  189 

are  continually  toward  some  power  that  is  eternal, 
some  power  that  is  so  inwrought  into  the  very  fabric 
of  the  universe  that  they  can  lay  hold  on  it  and  know 
that  they  grasp  that  which  is  sure  and  unshakeable. 
The  deepest  hunger  of  men  is  for  a  great  companion- 
ship, a  companionship  in  which,  fearless  of  the  un- 
happy present  or  the  unknown  future,  they  may  con- 
fide, from  which  their  weakness  may  draw  strength, 
in  which  they  will  daily  be  inspired  to  rise  above 
themselves  to  new  capacities  for  joy  and  service  and 
fellowship. 

The  Supremacy  There  is  but  One  character-making  in- 
of  Christ.  fluence   in    the  world   to-day  that   is 

adequate  in  the  ideals  which  it  sets  before  men  and 
in  the  power  which  it  gives  men  to  rise  toward  those 
ideals.  That  is  the  influence  of  Jesus  Christ.  Cen- 
tury after  century  the  customs  of  men  have  been 
altered  to  meet  the  requirements  which  He  has  put 
upon  human  conduct  and  always  He  has  been  found 
to  hold  forth  a  still  higher  ideal.  Thus  men  overcame 
slavery,  only  to  find  that  the  brotherhood  of  man 
which  He  taught  forbids  the  prejudice  of  race  and 
class.  There  is  but  one  place  where  men  may  take 
hold  of  eternal  truth  and  draw  close  to  a  great 
companion.     That  is  in  the  presence  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Glance  at  any  Christian  hymnal.  See  Charles 
Wesley  writing  *'Jesus,  Lover  of  my  soul  .... 
Other  refuge  have  I  none,"  or  Newman,  "Lead, 
Kindly  Light,"  or  Matheson,  "O  Love  that  will  not 
let  me  go."  What  is  the  experience  that  leads  Mon- 
sell  to  cry 

*'Fight  the  good  fight  with  all  thy  might, 
Christ  is  thy  strength  and  Christ  thy  right." 


190  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

It  is  the  experience  of  the  supremacy  of  Christ  In 
human  life,  of  the  ability  of  Christ  to  meet  every 
human  need.  Moreover,  these  men  are  not  simply 
voicing  their  own  conviction.  They  are  expressing 
the  adoration,  the  joy,  the  devotion  of  hundreds  of 
thousands  of  men  and  women  and  children  who  love 
Christ  because  He  meets  their  inmost  need,  because 
He  is  at  once  their  keenest  critic  and  their  dearest 
friend,  because  He  loved  them  even  to  His  own  death. 

Why  this  is  so,  none  can  say,  none  can  understand 
who  do  not  know  Him.  Read  the  records  of  His 
teaching.  See  how  hypocrisy,  how  covetousness, 
how  pride  receive  an  incisive  condemnation  never 
equalled  in  written  or  spoken  word  or  in  its  impres- 
sion on  the  minds  of  men.  See  how  good-will,  the 
spirit  of  self-sacrifice  stand  out  without  any  trace  of 
the  commonplace,  as  the  supremely  desirable  ele- 
ments in  character.  Read  again  the  records  of  His 
life.  See  Him  unfailingly  gentle  and  self-giving  to 
the  poor,  the  sick,  the  sorrowing.  See  Him  un- 
swervingly true  to  His  mission,  refusing  to  let  popu- 
lar enthusiasm  turn  Him  aside  to  a  less  spiritual  lead- 
ership. See  Him  steadfastly  set  His  face  to  go  to 
Jerusalem,  though  He  foresaw  the  death  it  meant. 
See  Him  in  the  garden  praying  **Not  my  will,  but 
thine."  See  Him  on  the  cross,  interceding  for  those 
who  taunted  Him.  Then  see  how  the  humble  men 
whom  He  taught  valiantly  followed  in  His  steps, 
lived  and  died  that  yet  others  might  know  and  love 
Him,  and  on  and  on  thereafter  others  did  and  do 
now  know  Him,  count  His  service  their  highest  desire. 

Jesus  Christ  is  the  world's  Redeemer  because  in  Him 


What  the  World  Needs  191 

men  can  lay  hold  on  the  great  ever-living  Spirit,  the 
supreme  life  that  is  through  all  and  in  all — God. 
Still  more  He  is  the  world's  Redeemer,  because  in 
Him  God  has  laid  hold  upon  men.  The  "Power  that 
worketh  for  righteousness,"  to  whom  prophets  and 
reformers  and  every  man  who  hungers  after  right- 
eousness for  himself  and  for  society  have  reached 
out  for  help,  has  made  His  power  manifest  in  Christ. 
In  Him  men  find  God  to  be  like  the  father  in  the 
Parable  of  the  Prodigal  Son  longing  for  the  return  of 
his  child,  like  the  good  shepherd  seeking  his  lost 
sheep.  When  they  see  Jesus  sacrificing  Himself 
upon  the  cross  for  the  redemption  of  the  world  they 
know  that  ''God  is  in  Christ  reconciling  the  world 
unto  Himself."  They  stand  with  Philip  when  he 
cries,  ''Lord,  show  us  the  Father  and  it  sufiiceth  us," 
and  hear  the  answer  which  no  one  who  has  once 
heard  it  can  ever  forget,  *'He  that  hath  seen  me  hath 
seen  the  Father."  For  men  to  discover  God  in 
Jesus  Christ  is  to  find  the  way  from  darkness  into 
lights  from  slavery  into  freedom.  For  the  world  to 
discover  that^  to  believe  it,  to  live  by  it  is  to  feel  the 
burdens  that  crush  it  loosen  and  fall  from  its  bruised 
and  aching  shoulders ^ 

HOW  CAN    THE  WORLD  FIND    CHRIST? 

How  can  the  How  then  shall  the  world  find  Him 

World  find  Christ?  who  can  free  it  from  its  burdens.^ 
Jesus  of  Nazareth  no  longer  goes  among  the  crowds 
in  Galilee  and  Judea,  teaching  and  healing  and  re- 
vealing God  to  men.     No  pilgrimage  to  the  land 


192  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

which  His  footsteps  made  "Holy"  will  enable  men  to 
sit  at  His  feet  and  learn  of  Him.  Yet  day  by  day 
men  of  every  land  find  themselves  ashamed  in  His 
sight,  or  others  speak  of  "coming  to  Him,"  of  "being 
in  His  presence."  How  is  this  so?  It  is  because  by 
the  pages  of  the  New  Testament,  by  the  words  of 
some  friend,  by  the  life  of  some  Christian  they  have 
been  led  to  inquire  about  Christ,  to  put  their  faith  in 
Him.  And  then  they  make  the  amazing  discovery 
that  in  their  own  hearts  His  Spirit  answers  theirs, 
that  He  speaks  and  they  hear,  that  He  is  their  living, 
ever-present   Lord. 

But  notice  this  significant  fact.  Only  when  those 
who  know  Him  let  others  know — only  when  they 
set  men  to  reading  His  life,  tell  men  about  Him, 
live  before  men  as  He  would  have  them  live, — can 
men  find  out  about  Him.  The  simplest  bit  of  fact 
about  Christ  must  be  brought  to  those  who  do  not 
know  Him  by  some  person.  Even  when  He  was  in 
Galilee,  the  record  reads  that  "Andrew  findeth  his 
own  brother  Simon,  and  saith  unto  him  .  ,  .," 
that  "Philip  findeth  Nathanael  and  saith  unto 
him  ..."  Now  as  then  the  message  of  the 
good  news  of  Jesus  Christ  must  be  carried  by  His 
disciples.  There  is  no  other  plan.  It  was  for  this 
that  He  taught  the  Twelve.  It  was  this  which  He 
meant  when  He  said,  "All  authority  hath  been  given 
unto  me  in  heaven  and  on  earth.  Go  ye  therefore, 
and  make  disciples  of  all  the  nations."  The  Chris- 
tians— and  the  Christians  alone — have  it  in  their 
pov-^er  to  lift  the  burdens  of  the  world  through  the 
supremacy  of  Christ. 


A   NEW   SOUTH   AMERICAN 

What    shall    we    have    helped    the    Arrericas    to    become    by    the    time    this 
baby    grows   up? 


What  the  World  Needs  193 

The  Challenge  to  ^^  these  things  are  true  our  next  ques- 
Christians  in  the  tion  must  be  ''Where  are  the  Chris- 
Non-Christian  tians  who  are  to  do  this  and  how  far 
World.  are  they  able  to  do  it?"     The  Chris- 

tians who  are  nearest  to  the  largest  areas  of  human 
need  are  those  of  the  non-Christian  lands.  We  have 
already  seen  how  valiant  they  are,  how  their  influence 
upon  the  national  life  of  their  people  is  far  out  of 
proportion  to  their  numbers.  Their  faith  has  been 
tried  by  persecution  in  the  early  days  in  Japan,  in  the 
Boxer  rebellion  in  China,  again  and  again  recently 
in  less  spectacular  outbreaks  in  these  lands  and  in 
India  and  Africa  and  the  Near  East.  The  blood  of 
these  martyrs  has  been,  as  in  TertuUian's  day,  the 
seed  of  the  church.  There  is  no  more  hopeful  sign 
in  the  world  than  the  earnestness  and  devotion  to 
Christ  of  these,  whose  loyalty  costs  them  suffering 
and  hardship.  They  have  entered  into  the  joy  of 
their  Lord. 

Yet  the  difliculties  which  they  face  are  very,  very 
great.  No  one  can  be  quite  so  skilful  as  they  in 
presenting  Christ  to  their  own  people,  but  they  feel, 
as  workers  from  other  lands  cannot,  the  pressure  of 
the  ancient  and  well-nigh  universal  pagan  customs 
which  surround  them.  As  their  new  converts  enter 
the  church,  old  habits  of  life  and  thought  come  with 
them,  which  only  long  and  patient  teaching  can 
eradicate  and  which,  until  eradicated,  weaken  and 
damage  the  life  of  the  church. 

Yet  the  smallness  of  their  numbers  in  comparison 
with  the  vast  masses  of  non-Christians  about  them, 
together  with  the  presence  of  these  old  customs,  tends 
to  make  them  self-centered  and  exclusive.     More- 


194         The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

over,  many  of  these  native  churches  have  very  heavy 
tasks  in  educating  the  masses — largely  illiterate, 
therefore  requiring  much  more  labor  to  train — which 
have  been  coming  swiftly  into  Christian  fellowship 
in  the  latter  years.  One  would  be  tempted  to  say 
that  these  rising  churches  in  non-Christian  lands  have 
all  that  they  can  do  to  attend  to  their  own  affairs 
without  trying  to  do  missionary  work.  But  to  do  so 
would  be  to  deny  the  faith  which  they  have  accepted. 
They  are  eager  to  go  forward  and  outward!  Much 
more  responsibility  can  wisely  be  placed  upon  them. 
But  to  leave  them  to  carry  on  the  conquest  of  the 
non-Christian  world  alone  would  be  like  leaving  the 
Lost  Battalion  in  the  Argonne  Forest.  They  will 
fight  to  the  end,  but  to  leave  them  to  fight  alone  is 
not  the  way  to  defeat  the  enemy. 

The  Challenge  to  There  are  two  other  great  areas  of  the 
Christians  in  world  from  which  reinforcements  can 

Europe.  come,    two    areas    which    form    the 

greater  part  of  so-called  Christendom.  These  are 
the  homes  of  the  white  race,  Europe  and  North 
America.  Though  they  have  far  from  the  largest 
populations,  they  are  the  most  powerful  sections  of 
the  globe.  Toward  them  the  rest  of  the  world  faces. 
Latin  America  in  international  affairs  looks  toward 
Europe  and  North  America,  not  toward  Asia  and 
Africa;  Asia  is  concerned  little  with  South  America 
and  Africa  and  much  with  Europe  and  the  United 
States;  Africa  is  bound  almost  altogether  to  Europe. 
The  nations  of  Europe  which  have  colonies  and  the 
United  States,  having  together  perhaps  one-sixth  of 
the  world's  population,  are  responsible  for  the  goverr 


What  the  World  Needs  195 

ment  of  one-third  of  the  human  race,  including  five 
hundred  million  non-Christians.  This  and  more  is 
the  measure  of  their  obligation  for  the  right  leader- 
ship of  the  world.  Moreover,  in  these  two  continents 
are  found  nearly  ninety-five  per  cent,  of  all  the  Prot- 
estant Christians  of  the  world. 

Through  all  the  Christian  centuries  until  recently 
Europe  has  been  the  continent  from  which  the  great- 
est efforts  have  been  made  to  Christianize  the  world. 
However  one  may  regard  European  conduct  toward 
the  weaker  peoples  of  the  earth,  its  ambitions  for 
colonial  empire  and  a  "place  in  the  sun,"  the  words  of 
Tagore  are  true:  "In  the  heart  of  Europe  runs  the 
purest  stream  of  human  love,  of  love  of  justice,  of  the 
spirit  of  self-sacrifice,  for  higher  ideals.  The  Chris- 
tian culture  of  centuries  has  sunk  deep  in  her  life's 
core."*  Even  now  the  devotion  of  parts  of  European 
Protestantism  to  missionary  work  is  at  a  high  level. 
French  Evangelical  Churches  contribute  to  foreign 
missions  twice  as  large  a  part  of  their  total  incomes 
and  three  times  as  large  a  part  of  their  Christian 
workers  as  do  their  American  brethren.  Neverthe- 
less, the  fact  remains  that  continental  Europe,  with 
nearly  three  times  as  many  Protestants  as  the  United 
States,  gives  to  foreign  missions  about  one-twentieth 
of  the  amount  given  by  the  latter.  The  chief  reason 
for  this  is  the  long  existence,  in  all  parts  of  Europe, 
of  state  churches,  which,  drawing  their  support  from 
the  state,  were  not  accustomed  to  lay  upon  their 
members  the  duty  of  Christian  giving.  In  Germany 
and  Russia  now  the  churches,  separated  from  the 
state  by  the  recent  revolutions,  are  struggling  to  ad- 

*Rabindranath  Tagore,  Nationalisnty  p.  83. 


196  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

just  themselves  to  entirely  new  methods  of  financing. 

There  is  another  factor  which  will  for  many  years 
hmit  the  contribution  of  Europe — the  consequences 
of  the  war.  Twelve  millions  of  children  are  reported 
to  have  lost  one  or  both  parents.  All  of  central 
Europe  is  occupied  with  establishing  new  govern- 
ments. Every  European  country  feels  the  heavy 
weight  of  war  taxation.  Some  face  starvation.  In 
Russia  a  vast  experiment  in  government  is  being 
tried,  upsetting  all  the  life  and  habits  of  millions  and 
threatening  to  disturb  peoples  beyond  its  borders. 
The  presence  of  so  many  desperate  problems  and  of 
such  acute  need  will  long  keep  Europe's  Christian 
forces  preoccupied  with  putting  their  own  households 
in  order.  Great  Britain,  a  fountain-head  of  mission- 
ary energy,  through  her  great  possessions  is  kept  con- 
scious of  the  world's  problems.  She  too,  is  feeling 
the  loss  of  many  young  men  who  would  have  rendered 
missionary  service;  though  the  income  of  the  mis- 
sionary societies  during  the  war  showed  a  hopeful 
increase,  the  post-war  taxation  and  the  increased  cost 
of  missionary  work  have  made  it  necessary  for  her 
societies  to  retrench  and  even  to  withdraw  at  some 
parts  on  the  field.  Finally,  in  many  countries  in 
Europe,  especially  the  Latin  lands,  the  active  church 
forces  are  small  in  number.  Counting  a  million 
Protestants  in  France  (including  Alsace-Lorraine) 
and  estimating  the  number  of  active  Catholics  liber- 
ally at  ten  millions,  there  are  left  between  twenty- 
five  and  thirty  million  who  have  no  vital  connection 
with  any  church.  All  these  factors  combine  to  make 
it  most  difficult  to  estimate  the  future  of  Europe's 
missionary  service  to  the  world.     In  the  long  run 


What  the  World  Needs  197 

it  must  be  far  gre/zter  than  it  is  now,  but  Europe  is 
not  prepared  to  r^ieet  the  urgent  needs  and  the  ap- 
pealing opportunities  of  to-day. 

The  Challenge  of  There  remain  the  Christian  forces  of 
the  World's  Need  North  America.  Here  Protestant 
to  America.  C-hristians  form  a  larger  proportion  of 

the  population  than  anywhere  else  in  the  world.  The 
United  States  alone  contains  more  Protestant  church 
members  by  many  millions  than  does  any  other  single 
country.  To  them,  already  making  the  largest  con- 
tribution to  missions  both  in  missionaries  and  in 
money,  the  challenge  of  the  world's  need  in  these 
years  after  tie  war  comes  with  compelling  force. 
Through  all  its  history  the  land  has  been  blessed  with 
constantly  increasing  wealth.  The  per  capita  wealth 
of  the  country  in  1 917  was  two  and  a  quarter  times 
what  it  was  in  1 890.  In  no  land  in  the  world  in  recent 
years  has  prosperity  been  so  wide-spread  or  so  great. 
Although  the  war  has  brought  heavy  burdens,  they  are 
not  to  be,  compared  with  those  of  other  lands. 

There  are  still  more  important  reasons  why  the 
world's  cry  should  not  fall  upon  deaf  ears  in  America. 
More  than  any  other  great  world  power,  America  has 
refused  to  be  caught  in  the  scramble  for  colonial 
possessions.  In  the  administration  of  those  which 
she  acquired  in  the  war  with  Spain,  she  has  been 
notably  disinterested  and  generous,  and  has  sought 
to  prepare  them  for  the  freedom  which  she  has  al- 
ready granted  to  some.  Still  more  in  her  own  life 
she  has  thought  out,  worked  out,  fought  out  the 
meaning  of  liberty  and  forms  by  which  it  is  made 
effective  in  government.     All  over  the  world  a  great 


198  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

thrill  of  idealism  was  felt  when  America  entered  the 
war;  the  people  of  small  nations  and  large  looked 
upon  her  as  the  champion  of  the  rights  of  the  op- 
pressed and  the  weak.  This  means  that  in  non- 
Christian  lands  American  missionaries  occupy  a  posi- 
tion of  peculiar  influence  and  respect.  The  doors  of 
men's  minds  are  open  to  them  as  to  few  if  any  others. 
It  is  written  that  a  Japanese  woman  every  night  after 
her  conversion  slept  with  her  face  toward  the  West. 
"For  in  the  West  is  America,  and  from  America  came 
my  great  light."* 

Finally,  the  Christians  of  America  need  for  their 
own  sakes,  for  the  sake  of  their  land,  to  take  up  this 
challenge  with  great  earnestness  and  joy.  Every 
unselfish  force  going  out  from  America  makes  her 
leadership  of  the  world  the  finer,  makes  her  place 
amon^  the  nations  happier,  more  worthy  of  emula- 
tion. Her  own  outgoing  spirit  of  service  will  return 
to  bless  her  a  hundredfold.  What  is  still  more,  that 
amazing  joy,  that  abiding  peace  that  only  those 
know  who  have  committed  their  possessions  and 
themselves  to  the  complete  service  of  Christ,  will 
come  to  the  Christians  of  America,  if  they  enter  into 
the  sufferings  of  Christ  by  responding  with  all  their 
power  to  the  world's  need  of  Him. 


THE  THREAT  OF  SIN 

"A  single  case  of  smallpox,  unattended,  imperils  not  only  the 
community  and  the  city,  but  also  the  entire  nation.  The  laws 
governing  physical  sanitation  apply  also  to  moral  sanitation,  but 
with  this  exception,  that  a  defective  moral  order  can  never 
be  isolated.     It  must  be  cured.     Uncared  for,  it  will  break  every 


"Fleming,  Marks  of  a  World  Cbristiariy  p.  I43. 


What  the  World  Needs  199 

bound  and  eventually  invoke  the  direst  of  physical  as  well  as 
moral  penalties  upon  the  entire  world.  Surely  the  years  through 
which  we  are  passing  make  this  clear." 

— World  Survey y  Interchurch  World  Movement, 
Foreign  Volume,  p.  9. 

"the  iron  horde" 

I  am  starving,  barefooted,  ragged. 

Thousands  of  comrades  are  suffering,  too. 

Like  thick,  heavy  oil,  the  sweat 

Lubricates  crudely  and  roughly 

The  dark  days  of  being. 

Poverty  strikes  on  our  backs  with  its  hammers; 

Blow  after  blow,  till  our  shirts  are  in  blood, 

Our  backs  hunched,  and  our  heads  are  bowed  low. 

Yet  we  can  spit  on  it  all. 

For  the  future  is  ours  forever! 

Only  let  our  great,  mighty  army 

Stand  here  united,  unweakened  by  dreams: 

Here  in  its  strife  it  will  fashion 

The  Future's  stern  image. 

We  are  the  pilgrims  of  Labor, 

We  are  the  world's  Iron  Horde. 

— L  Filipchenko,  Moscow  Gorn^  Nov.  3,  1919. 

Translation  by  The  New  Republic. 


"We  are  in  Syria  to  guarantee  the  execution  of  the  French 
mandate,  and  we  shall  remain  in  Cilicia  just  so  long  as  the  ful- 
fillment of  the  Treaty  of  Sevres  requires  it:  so  we  shall  remai- 
in  Syria  because  if  we  weren't  there,  others  would  be  instead. 
This  would  mean  the  eclipse  of  our  prestige  and  influence  in  the 
Eastern  Mediterranean,  in  the  Levanc  and  all  the  East.  Be- 
sides,— and  this  should  be  known  it)  i<rance, — Syria  is  a  very 
rich  country 

"To  sum  it  up  in  a  word:  The  affair  will  pay  well.  That  is 
why  we  should  stay  in  Syria,  and  why  ve  are  going  to  stay  there.'* 
— General  Gouraud,  commander  of  French  Troops  in  Asia 
Minor,  cited  in  The  New  Republic, 


200  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

THE  NATIONS  AFTER  THE  WAR 

Nationalism  more  narrow,  more  bitter,  more  selfish,  than  in 
the  world  of  1914,  has  replaced  the  fleeting  hope  of  many  peoples 
that  there  might  be  a  real  League  of  Nations  in  Europe,  based 
upon  the  common  sense  of  common  folk.  There  is  no  such  com- 
mon sense. 

Within  the  nations  there  is  narrow  vision  and  candid  cyni- 
cism. Where  is  the  old  comradeship  of  trenches  which  promised 
CO  break  down  divisions  between  classes?  It  has  gone,  and  those 
who  fought  together  are  now  separated  by  jealousies  and  en- 
mities and  selfishness.  They  are  regrouping  themselves  for  class 
warfare 

There  is  only  one  cure  for  the  woes  of  Europe  and  our  own — 
not  easy,  but  bound  to  come  unless  we  are  looking  for  downfall. 
It  is  the  reconciliation  of  peoples,  burying  of  old  hatchets,  wiping 
out  of  old  villanies  and  co-operating  in  a  much  closer  union  of 
mutual  help  under  the  direction  of  a  league  of  nations,  made  dem- 
ocratic and  powerful  by  the  free  consent  and  ardent  impulses  of 
the  common  folk. 

Before  that  can  happen  there  must  come  new  leaders,  new  en- 
thusiasm for  the  ideals  of  life,  a  new  spirit  of  unselfishness  and 
service  for  the  common  weal — and  just  now  we  do  not  see  them 
coming. — Sir  Philip  Gibbs,in  New  York  Times,  Sept.,  1920. 

THE  CHALLENGE 

Then,  pledged  upon  a  happier  covenant 
Than  furnished  old  crusades,  with  none  to  fear 
Of  arms  or  treasons,  having  for  our  faith 
To  covet  not  an  acre  of  the  world. 
Shall  we  not  be  the  new  adventurers? 
Come — let  us  get  our  gospel  now  by  heart — 
One  man  in  grief  sets  a  whole  world  in  tears; 
No  man  is  free  while  one  for  freedom  fears. 

— From   BeaconSy  John   Drinkwater. 


CHAPTER  SIX 
X.     WHAT  IS  REQUIRED  OF  US 

What  are  You  The  dlscovery  of  a  responsibility  is 
Going  to  Do  always  followed  by  a  plain  and  home- 

About  it?  ly  question: — "What  are  you  going  to 

do  about  it?"  When  to  the  disclosure  of  the  pov- 
erty, ignorance,  and  sin  of  the  world  is  added  the 
knowledge  of  a  power  that  will  eradicate  them  for- 
ever, the  answer  to  the  question  becomes  a  matter  of 
life  and  death.  We  know  with  what  anxious  hearts 
men  of  all  nations  waited  for  America's  answer  to 
the  challenge  of  the  war.  Those  who  were  concerned 
in  that  decision  remember  well  the  seriousness  of 
that  hour.  But  how  much  more  momentous  is  the 
decision  which  every  Church  and  every  Christian  has 
daily  to  make!  Will  the  Church  fully  accept  the  com- 
mand of  its  Lord  to  disciple  all  the  nations?  Will  we, 
the  Christians  of  this  land,  blest  beyond  the  citizens 
of  any  other  nation  with  freedom,  wealth,  and  op- 
portunity for  influence,  do  our  full  part  to  make 
every  man,  woman,  and  child  His  ardent  follower,  to 
make  every  business  house,  every  organization  of 
workers,  every  institution  of  mankind  genuinely 
His  ?  For  those  who  know  the  need  of  the  world  and 
the  power  of  Christ  there  is  but  one  answer — we 
will! 

But  that  answer  involves  many  practical  problems 
of  highest  importance.  Just  what  are  the  ways  by 
which  His  Kingdom  is  advanced  among  the  nations 
and  just  how  can  each  of  us  render  the  most  definite 
and  effective  service  in  its  promotion?  What  specif- 


202  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ic  tasks  shall  we  set  ourselves,  or,  having  already 
such  tasks,  how  shall  we  accomplish  them?  Before 
answering  these  questions  let  us  follow  the  example 
of  the  king  in  Jesus'  parable,  who,  before  he  goes  to 
encounter  another  king  in  war,  sits  down  and  takes 
counsel  "whether  he  be  able  with  ten  thousand  to 
meet  him  that  cometh  against  him  with  twenty 
thousand."  Let  us  again  face  our  task  as  a  whole. 

FACING    THE    WHOLE    TASK 

The  Barrier  of  Here  are  more  than  eight  hundred 
Ignorance.  million  human  beings  on  two  conti- 

nents and  the  nearby  islands  who  are  unable  to  read 
for  themselves  the  little  Book  that  brings  them  the 
good  news  of  the  Gospel.  There  are  in  the  other  con- 
tinents millions  more  likewise  unable  to  read.  Where 
are  the  teachers  to  be  found  who  will  instruct  them 
in  even  the  first  of  "the  three  R's"?  Again,  many  of 
these  millions  speak  languages  which  have  never  yet 
been  written  down;  many  more  there  are  in  whose 
tongues  no  part  of  the  Bible  has  yet  been  translated; 
for  many  the  written  language,  though  thousands  of 
years  old,  is  so  complicated  that  it  is  not  only  im- 
possible for  him  who  runs  to  read,  but  even  he  who 
sits  down  and  studies  for  years  can  read  only 
haltingly.  The  literary  classes,  for  cultural  or  na- 
tionalistic reasons,  vigorously  resist  efforts  to  reform 
the  scripts.  How  shall  their  prejudices  be  broken 
through,  the  scripts  be  simplified,  the  unwritten 
tongues  be  recorded,  translations  be  made  and  pub- 
lished and  put  within  reach  of  the  people.^  How  shall 
this  be  done  for  so  many  millions  in  so  many  differ- 
ent countries? 


What  is  Required  of  Us  203 

Again,  not  only  are  masses  of  the  people  too  poor 
to  afford  the  time  necessary  to  learn  the  difficult 
scripts,  but  in  many  groups  where  scripts  are  simpler 
they  are  too  poor  to  support  the  elementary  schools 
which  might  teach  their  children.  One  of  the  chief 
foundation  stones  of  democracy  and  of  that  public 
intelligence  which  is  the  foe  of  evil  custom  and  super- 
stition is  public  education.  How  shall  colonial  and 
national  Governments  become  so  willing,  so  deter- 
mined to  work  for  the  benefit  of  the  people  that  they 
will  find  ways  of  financing  general  education  and  then 
of  convincing  the  people  that  it  is  indispensable?  All 
the  prejudices  and  all  the  limitations  of  viewpoint 
of  the  governing  classes,  of  officialdom,  even  of  the 
educated  classes  stand  solidly  in  the  way  of  such 
a  transformation.  How  can  Christian  forces  come 
close  to  those  who  hold  the  power  and  convert  them 
to  a  new  ideal? 

Evil  Customs  ^  problem  of  similar  magnitude,  both 
and  Evil  in  extent  and  in  difficulty,  is  the  erad- 

Spirits.  ication  of  evil  customs  and  debasing 

social  institutions.  In  India,  even  where  some  en- 
lightened native  states  prohibit  marriages  of  boys 
younger  than  sixteen  and  girls  younger  than  twelve, 
the  commissioners  in  charge  have  authority  to  grant 
permissions  for  marriages  of  girls  as  young  as  nine 
years.  Even  at  that  violations  of  the  act  are  in- 
creasing. A  leading  Chinese  Christian  said  to  a 
missionary,  ''Don't  ask  us  to  break  with  our  family 
system  yet,  not  yet!  We  will  come  to  it  some  day, 
but  it  is  too  hard  for  us  now!" 

In  the  belief  of  half  of  mankind  the  world  is  filled 
with  an  invisible  population  of  spirits  in  the  rivers. 


204  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

in  the  air,  concealed  in  trees  and  rocks,  ready  to  bring 
disease  and  drought  and  calamity  upon  those  who 
neglect  them.  There  are  trees  in  Japan,  to  the  spirits 
of  which  childless  women  pray.  In  Foochow,  China, 
the  hammers  of  the  hundreds  who  beat  out  metal 
leaf  into  idol  paper  never  stop  day  or  night.  A 
Chinese  lad  in  an  American  college  was  greatly 
bewildered  because  his  professor  took  it  for  granted 
that  demons  do  not  exist.  ''But,  professor,"  he  said, 
"I've  seen  them!"  The  people  of  city  after  city, in- 
cluding merchants,  tradesmen,  and  other  reputedly 
hardheaded  folk,  spend  millions  of  dollars  annually 
in  offerings  of  grain,  or  oil,  or  idol  paper,  or  incense 
to  spirits,  evil  and  good.  Just  as  happened  when 
Paul's  preaching  in  Ephesus  set  the  silversmiths  in  an 
uproar,  so  the  vested  interests  of  makers  and  mer- 
chants of  images  and  idol  paper  and  shrines  stir  up 
hostility  against  the  Christians.  What  a  tremen- 
dously difficult  task  it  is  to  uproot  these  customs, 
which  are  not  simply  the  notions  of  individuals,  but 
the  convictions  of  whole  races,  the  habits  which  are 
wrought  into  the  very  texture  of  their  life! 

The  Statistics  of  Again,  look  at  it  from  the  cold  view- 
the  Task.  point    of   Statistics.  The    annual    in- 

crease of  population  in  China — outside  of  years  of 
exceptional  famine — is  not  only  many  times  the  in- 
crease in  the  number  of  Christians,  it  is  many  times 
the  total  number  of  Christians.  In  spite  of  the  in- 
crease of  the  Christian  population  by  natural 
processes  and  by  their  energies  in  bringing  in  thou- 
sands of  converts,  there  are  nearly  twice  as  many  non- 
Christians  in  the  world  as  there  were  when  this  cen- 
tury of  missions  began.     Here  is  another  aspect  of 


What  is  Required  of  Us  205 

the  problem.  How  large  a  force  of  missionaries  have 
the  one  hundred  and  twenty-odd  millions  or  more 
Protestants  of  Europe  and  North  America  now  on 
the  field,  to  help  the  native  Christians  of  the  non- 
Christian  world  conquer  that  world  for  Christ? 
About  twenty  thousand.  The  twenty-six  million 
Protestant  church  members  of  the  United  States  pro- 
vide about  ten  thousand  missionaries.  This  means 
that  in  the  non-Christian  world  every  ten  mission- 
aries face  as  their  task  a  city  more  populous  than 
Pittsburgh,  or  a  state  as  populous  as  North  Dakota. 

The  actual  population,  however,  which  such  a 
missionary  group  seeks  to  bring  to  the  knowledge  of 
Christ  is  smaller  than  this,  but  that  is  because 
vast  areas  of  the  non-Christian  world  are  without 
Christian  missionaries. 

According  to  the  most  conservative  estimate  there 
are  at  least  160,000,000  people  of  the  non-Christian 
world  utterly  untouched  by  missionary  effort.  This 
figure  does  not  include  the  peoples  of  localities — and 
there  are  many  such — where  there  are  merely  not  enough 
missionaries  to  handle  the  work;  it  includes  only  the 
peoples  living  in  areas  where  there  are  no  mission- 
aris  at  all. 

There  are  still  480,000  square  miles  of  territory  in 
China  proper  with  thirty-five  million  to  forty  million 
inhabitants  utterly  unclaimed  by  any  missionary  agency, 
and  in  Turkestan,  Tibet,  and  Mongolia  there  are  eleven 
or  twelve  million  more  forgotten  non-Christians. 

At  least  twenty-six  million  of  the  natives  of  Central 
Africa  have  no  missions  among  them  or  near  them.  Of 
the  remaining  twelve  million  over  one-half  are  practi- 
cally untouched  by  the  influence  of  the  missions. 

Afghanistan,  with  a  population  of  6,380,500;  Nepal, 
with  a  population  of  5,639^92  and  Bhutan,  with  about 
300,000  inhabitants,  are  without  missionaries.* 

*World  Survey y  Interchurch  World  Movement,  Foreign  Volume,  p.  48. 


2o6  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

When  one  sums  up  the  misunderstanding,  the  preju- 
dice, the  determined  opposition,  the  general  igno- 
rance which  each  of  the  twenty  thousand  mission- 
aries encounters  and  then  adds  to  that  the  far 
reaches  where  there  are  no  missionaries  at  all,  the 
problem  of  the  non-Christian  world  seems  appalling. 

THE    TASK    in    THE    CHRISTIAN    WORLD 

Christianizing  ^ut  one  must  go  further  and  con- 
International  front  the  need  of  bringing  to  pass  a 
Relations.  "right-about-face"    on    the    part    of 

of  strong  nations  in  dealing  with  weaker  peoples,  of 
transforming  the  motives  of  those  men,  those  corpo- 
rations, those  nations  whose  policy  seeks  a  selfish 
gain  with  no  regard  to  the  common  good.  ''My  little 
experience  in  helping  set  up  Feisal,"  wrote  Colonel 
Lawrence,  ''showed  me  that  the  art  of  government 
wants  more  character  than  brains."  To  unravel  all 
the  immense  net-work  of  commercial  and  political 
scheming  for  advantage,  to  expose  the  hidden  man- 
ipulations of  men's  minds  by  other  men  of  power  in 
finance  or  government,  to  teach  the  people  swiftly 
to  distinguish  between  right  and  wrong  in  the  tangled 
issues  of  campaigns,  to  stimulate  them  to  hold 
steadily  to  policies  of  good-will  and  inspire  them  to 
make  sacrifices  for  the  common  good  of  mankind,  to 
pick  out  of  the  confusion  of  deeds  of  selfish  or  mixed 
motives  those  which  are  genuinely  Christlike  and 
hold  them  up  for  the  world  to  see  and  emulate — 
this  is  a  task  requiring  a  skill  and  a  patience  and  a 
risk  of  self  that  may  well  cause  men  to  hesitate 
before  undertaking  it.  The  Western  world  has  in 
the  main  been  evangelized.  It  has  not  yet  been 
Christianized. 


!  What  is  Required  of  Us  207 

Christianizing  Filially,  how  far  are  those  who  hold 
the  "Christians."  rnembership  In  Christian  churches 
ready  to  meet  Christ's  condition  of  discipleship, — 
**If  any  man  will  come  after  me,  let  him  deny  him- 
self and  take  up  his  cross,  and  follow  me"?  Many 
have  come  into  the  churches  without  having  met 
their  Lord  face  to  face.  Upon  the  soil  of  many  hearts 
the  good  seed  of  His  word  falls  and  takes  root,  but 
the  thorns,  the  cares  and  riches  of  the  world,  spring 
up  and  choke  the  plants  before  they  bear  fruit. 

"She  used  to  go  to  church  before  she  was  married." 
"Since  they  bought  an  automobile,  they  take  John 

riding  on   Sundays   and  he  doesn't  come   to  Sunday 

School." 

"Mr.  Smith  is  trying  to  get  ahead,  you  know,  and  so 

he  doesn't  have  time  for  such  things." 

Furthermore,  even  among  those  who  are  loyal  to 
their  church  membership,  there  is  a  greater  readiness 
to  do  something  for  *'our  church"  than  for  those 
who  are  outside  of  it,  a  subtle  form  of  selfishness. 
That  curious  specimen  of  church  member  who ''does 
not  believe  in  foreign  missions"  is  still  with  us  in 
numbers.  We  have  seen  that  the  United  States  sup- 
plies only  one  foreign  missionary  for  every  twenty- 
six  hundred  Protestant  church  members.  There  is 
one  denomination  which  has  one  foreign  missionary 
on  the  field  for  every  four  hundred  and  twenty-five 
members.  JVhy  is  this  not  true  of  the  other  denomi- 
nations? Perhaps  the  reason  lies  in  what  is  another 
serious  condition  for  those  to  face  who  have  answered 
the  Master's  call  for  world  service. 

"First,  the  mass  of  our  people,  even  those  within  the 
phurch,  do  not  know  in  any  thorough  and  complete 


2o8  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

way  the  personality  and  teachings  of  Jesus  as  set  forth 
in  the  gospels.  To  many  He  is  little  more  than  an  his- 
torical name.  Investigations  made  among  students  in 
colleges  and  universities  have  shown  that  a  large  pro- 
portion of  even  these  picked  men  and  women  of  our  day 
possess  only  a  very  fragmentary  and  incidental  knowl- 
edge of  the  Christian  system.  They  are  frankly  igno- 
rant of  the  concrete  details  and  the  deeper  meanings  of 
Jesus'  message  and  life,  and  hence  cannot  but  miss 
much  of  their  dynamic. 

"Second,  much  is  still  to  be  desired  in  bringing  men 
to  such  a  deep  and  compelling  appreciation  of  the  per- 
sonality, character,  and  way  of  life  of  Jesus  as  will 
grip  the  deeper  loyalities  and  create  the  purpose  of 
making  His  life  the  personal  standard.  The  difficulty 
lies  in  the  fact  that  there  is  so  general  a  tendency  to  treat 
the  Christ  character  as  a  unique  personality,  a  beauti- 
ful, but  impracticable  ideal — something  to  wonder 
over  and  praise  in  song  and  story,  but  hardly  seriously 
to  accept  as  a  concrete  standard  and  pattern  by  which 
to  model  our  own  lives.  Much  of  the  appreciation  di- 
rected toward  the  person  of  Jesus  is  such  as  would  be 
rendered  toward  a  remarkable  picture  or  statue,  the 
work  of  a  master  artist,  with  no  thought  of  attempting 
to  copy  it."* 

ARE    WE    ABLE? 

The  enterprise  of  establishing  the  Kingdom  of 
God  among  the  non-Christian  nations  of  the  world 
requires  not  only  the  work  of  the  missionaries  and 
the  native  Christians  in  the  foreign  fields.  It  demands 
that  those  who  bear  the  name  of  Christian  in  North 
America,  in  your  state,  in  your  town,  should  gain 
the  vision  of  the  world's  great  need  and,  more  than 
that,  should  be  so  close  to  Jesus  Christ  that  the  out- 
pouring of  service  to  mankind  in  His  name  will  be 

*G.  H.  Betts,  What  does  Religious   Education  mean  to  the  Church?     Reli- 
gious Education^  June,  1920,  p.  162. 


What  is  Required  of  Us  209 

tneir  supreme  joy.  The  missionary  task  of  the  church 
is  within  as  well  as  outside  of  itself.  When,  there- 
fore, we  face  our  whole  task,  its  vastness  stuns  us. 
All  the  entrenched  wrongs  of  the  world,  all  the  false 
ideas  of  God  so  stubbornly  held,  all  the  stolid  in- 
difference of  those  who  are  supposed  to  be  alert  in 
God's  service,  rise  up  before  us  like  mighty  barriers 
to  the  progress  of  Christ's  Kingdom.  To  break  down 
these  barriers  is  the  most  terrifically  formidable  task 
of  which  men  ever  dreamed.  Already  it  counts  its 
martyrs  by  the  thousands;  already  obloquy  and  hate 
and  torture  have  come  to  those  who  undertook  it. 

The  Great  Pioneer  was  crowned  with  thorns  and 
crucified.  To  those  who  follow  Him  unreservedly  will 
come  suffering  also.  "Ye  shall  be  hated  of  all  men 
for  my  name's  sake."  Every  hamlet  and  city  in  the 
the  world  has  a  street  called  "Via  Crucis,"  upon 
which  those  who  walk  in  His  steps  must  tread.  "Are 
ye  able  to  drink  the  cup  which  I  drink?"  He  said. 
Are  we  prepared?  Are  we  able?  As  we  measure  our- 
selves and  our  weakness  against  the  vast  array  of 
poverty,  ignorance,  indifference,  and  sin,  we  are  in- 
clined to  follow  still  further  the  example  of  the  king 
of  the  parable,  who,  when  he  sees  a  great  hostile 
force  coming  against  him,  sends  an  embassage,  de- 
siring conditions  of  peace.  We  want  to  compromise, 
to  seek  peace  for  ourselves. 

But  the  Master  follows  this  parable  with  the 
solemn  words: 

"6*0  likewise,  whosoever  he  he  of  you  that  forsak- 
eth  not  all  that  he  hath^  he  cannot  be   my  disciple^ 


2IO  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations  • 

OUR    UNRECOGNIZED    ALLIES 

Thirst  for  Once  we  actually  make  the  venture  of 

Knowledge.  faith,  oncc  we  actually  undertake  to 

establish  His  kingdom  among  men,  we  find  that  all 
about  us  are  unrecognized  allies.  Elisha's  servant,  as 
he  saw  the  besieging  force  of  Syria,  cried,  *'Alas,  my 
master!  how  shall  we  do?"  And  Elisha  answered, 
**Fear  not:  for  they  that  are  with  us  are  more  than 
they  that  are  with  them  .  .  .  ."  **And  the  Lord 
opened  the  eyes  of  the  young  man  and  he  saw:  and 
behold,  the  mountain  was  full  of  horses  and  chariots 
of  fire  round  about  Elisha."  There  are  many  allies 
ready  to  aid  in  the  missionary  enterprise.  The  first 
of  these  is  mankind's  thirst  for  knowledge.  School 
buildings  are  erected  on  the  mission  fields  only  to 
overflow  with  pupils.  When  the  Women's  Medical 
College  at  Vellore,  India,  was  begun,  the  govern- 
ment advised  against  its  opening  unless  there  were 
at  least  six  pupils,  but  in  the  first  year  there  were 
sixty-nine  applicants,  in  the  second  year,  eighty-five, 
in  the  third  year,  one  hundred  and  twenty-five.  The 
recent  governor  of  the  Gold  Coast,  Africa,  Sir  Hugh 
Clifford,  wrote,  "There  can  be  no  doubt  that  there 
exists  among  the  rising  generation  throughout  the 
Gold  Coast  what  I  can  only  describe  as  genuine  hun- 
ger for  education."*  Nor  is  the  knowledge  sought 
limited  to  "school-learning."  The  Bible  is  still  the 
best  selling  book  in  the  world. 

"Some  Sikhs  leaving  Bombay  to  embark  for  Europe 
were  overheard  saying,  'Well,  we  are  going  to  fight  the 
great  Sahib's  battles,  and  we  know  that  the  great  Sahib 
is  praying  for  victory  to  his  God,  so  we   had   better 


*J.  H.  Harris,  Africa,  Stave  or  Free?  p.  185. 


\  What  is  Required  of  Us  211 

find  out  all  we  can  about  the  great  Sahib's  God.'  And 
they  entered  the  Bombay  depot  of  the  Bible  Society 
and  bought  Panjabi  Scriptures."* 

Love  of  A  second  ally  is  the  longing  of  men 

Liberty.  for  freedom.  Two  aged  Korean  Vis- 

counts wrote  an  appeal  to  the  Japanese  Government 
in  which  were  these  words; 

"Though  you  cut  down  and  kill  those  who  rise  up 
everywhere,  you  may  change  the  face  of  things,  but 
the  heart  of  it,  never.  Every  man  has  written  in  his 
soul  the  word  Independence,  and  those  who  in  the  quiet 
of  their  rooms  shout  for  it  are  beyond  the  possibility  of 
numbering."t 

Let  us  not  forget  how  the  world  vibrated  when  the 
freeing  of  the  oppressed  became  a  clearly  stated  aim 
of  the  war.  The  sharp  debates  in  the  League  of 
Nations  Assembly  in  December,  1920,  over  the 
question  of  mandates  and  the  powers  of  the  Council 
reflect  the  determination  of  the  small  nations  and  of 
liberal  leaders  in  the  strong  nations  to  supervise  and 
curb  those  who  have  great  power  over  subject  peoples. 
The  Russian  Revolution  was  a  great  contest  for 
political  freedom;  her  present  confusion  is  the  result 
of  an  insistent  demand  for  social  and  industrial  free- 
dom, a  demand  that  is  echoed  among  the  workers  in 
every  land.  For,  however  the  appeal  to  selfish  mo- 
tives may  be  used  by  leaders  of  labor  to  stir  their 
cohorts  to  action  and  however  prevalent  class  aims 
and  class  desires  may  be,  there  is  an  undercurrent  of 
pure  longing  for  liberty,  to  attain  which,  for  their 


*  International  Review  of  Missions,  April,  1920,  p.  177. 
tCynn,  The  Rebirth  of  Korea,  p.  58. 


212  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

families,  their  classes,  or  their  nations,  men  will  en- 
dure every  hardship  and  risk  life  itself.  When  men 
undertake  such  struggles,  the  Gospel  of  Christ  is  not 
only  a  message  of  courage,  but  the  plan  for  victory. 

Consciousness  Akin  to  this  longing  for  freedom  is 
of  Need.  men's  consciousness  of  the  need  for 

help  greater  than  human.  Every  shrine  and  temple 
in  the  non-Christian  world,  whether  it  be  a  little 
eight-inch  frame  where  a  Chinese  boatman  burns  a 
stick  of  incense,  as  he  guides  his  craft  into  the  rap- 
ids, or  the  beautifully  wrought  temples  in  the  groves 
of  Nikko,  is  witness  to  this  universal  need. 

Humanity's  A  similar  ally  is  the  undying  human 

Undying  Hopes,  hope  of  an  ideal  future.  The  Golden 
Age  of  which  Roman  poets  wrote,  The  Republic 
of  Plato,  Sir  Thomas  More's  Utopia,  have  their 
Oriental  equivalents  in  the  songs  of  native  ballad 
singers,  in  the  writings  of  religious  leaders,  in  strange 
notions  of  the  life  after  death  in  every  non-Christian 
religion.  The  greatest  of  these  undying  hopes  is  writ- 
ten in  the  last  chapters  of  the  New  Testament. 

The  Power  of  A  fifth  ally  of  Kingdom  builders  is 
Example.  the    response    that    comes    from    all 

parts  of  the  world  when  some  great  moral  issue  is 
decided  rightly  or  some  unwonted  deed  of  generos- 
ity is  done. 

"Whene'er  a  noble  deed  is  wrought. 
Whene'er  is  spoken  a  noble  thought, 
Our  hearts   in  glad  surprise 
To  higher  levels  rise." 

No  Other  deed  or  combination  of  deeds  has  done  so 
much  to  stir  the  world  to  end  the  opium  traffic  as 


What  is  Required  of  Us  213 

China's  valiant  attack  upon  this  curse.  The  de- 
cision of  the  American  people  that  the  liquor  traffic 
must  go  had  its  influence  around  the  world.  Never 
before  has  temperance  campaigning  in  Great  Britain 
been  so  vigorous  or  so  urgent.  In  Mexico  the  Gover- 
nor of  the  Federal  district  has  prohibited  liquor  sell- 
ing in  his  district  on  Saturday  and  Sunday,  in  order 
to  demonstrate  the  value  of  prohibition.  In  this  he 
is  said  to  be  supported  by  the  President  and  the 
Minister  of  War.* 

The  Argentine  Republic  is  the  scene  of  a  vigorous 
conflict  between  the  **Mojados"  and  the  "Secos" 
(the  *Vets"  and  the  "drys")  and  already  salesmen 
of  alcoholic  beverages  are  excluded  from  the  benefits 
of  a  Commercial  Travelers  Treaty  with  the  United 
States.  Newspaper  dispatches  have  reported  similar 
agitation  in  Brazil,  Uruguay,  Paraguay.  In  Chile, 
a  powerful  movement  led  by  President  Allessandri 
and  supported  by  the  labor  unions  is  preparing  to 
make  that  land  thoroughly  dry  within  a  few  years. 
Moslems  meeting  in  Lahore,  India,  congratulated 
President  Wilson  *'on  acting  on  the  principle  which 
was  for  the  first  time  introduced  by  the  Holy  Prophet 
of  Islam,'* ,  but  nevertheless  requested  the  Indian 
Government  that  a  prohibition  law  ''similar  to  that 
in  America"  be  passed  for  India.  An  example  of 
the  influence  of  a  generous  deed  is  seen  in  the  marked 
friendship  of  China  for  the  United  States  because  of 
the  latter's  return  of  the  Boxer  Indemnity.  The 
hearts  of  men  are  such  that  persistent  good-will  is 
well-nigh  invincible. 

*It  is  reported  that  the  latter,  when  Governor  of  Sonora,  refused  $5,000  a 
day  from  American  liquor  interests,  offered  as  an  inducement  to  permit  the  sale 
of  liquor  in  three  towns  near  the  American  border  in  1917. 


214  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

,,  ,       „  .  Another  ally  of  the  missionary  enter- 

Modem  Science.        .  .  ■^     .  .  „'^.        .^ 

prise    IS    modern    science,  bcientmc 

training  gives  the  missionary  doctor  the  skill  which 
seems  to  his  patients,  and  rightly,  a  true  gift 
from  God.  It  is  modern  science  that  makes  it  possi- 
ble for  men  and  funds  to  be  sent  swiftly  to  all  parts 
of  the  world.  The  scientific  spirit  applied  to  the 
study  of  the  scriptures  of  the  non-Christian  faiths 
and  to  the  mass  of  traditional  lore  that  has  gathered 
about  them  at  once  undermines  that  which  is  false 
and  brings  into  bolder  relief  those  elements  of  truth 
upon  which  Christianity  can  build.  In  Oriental 
schools  and  colleges  the  study  of  the  sciences  is  a 
most  powerful  factor  in  supplanting  the  benumbing 
belief  in  spirits  and  demons  with  an  understanding  of 
the  marvelous  natural  laws  of  the  one  God. 

One  of  the  most  powerful  of  all  allies 
T^^^^'^'^^P^^^''^    of  the   missionary   enterprise   is   the 

of  Christian  .  ,  •' .   .  K.     .  . 

Standards.  Widespread  recognition  or  the  stand- 

ards of  Jesus  Christ  as  the  highest 
standards  and  the  right  standards  of  life.  Clovis, 
king  of  the  Franks,  could  not  now  use  the  sword  to 
force  his  version  of  Christianity  upon  his  neighbors. 
Though  the  twentieth  century  has  instances  of  con- 
quest in  the  far  corners  of  the  earth,  no  modern 
Alexander  can  win  universal  glory  by  leading  vast 
expeditions  to  conquer  neighboring  lands.  Whatever 
may  be  the  relapse  into  selfishness  and  moral  in- 
difference since  the  War,  the  standards  of  national 
and  international  morality  which  then  rose  into  view 
and  which  were  founded  on  the  teaching  of  Christ 
have  come  to  remain.  They  will  be  ignored  by  any 
nation  at  its  peril. 


What  is  Required  of  Us  215 

Again,  watch  the  daily  press  and  hear  a  manufac- 
turer : 

"In  this  critical  readjustment  period  it  is  most 
essential  to  preserve  the  highest  standard  of  business 
ethics  in  foreign  trade  as  in  domestic  commerce.  Our 
whole  commercial  structure  rests  upon  the  sanctity  of 
contracts,  and  they  in  turn  upon  solemn  moral  and 
religious  obligations.  If  our  country  is  to  endure  it 
must  rest  upon  the  eternal  principles  of  justice,  truth, 
and  simple  honesty  in  our  dealings  with  othernations."* 

Pick  up  a  novel  and  read: 

"A  gentleman,  young  sir,  is  (I  take  it)  one  born  with 
the  God-like  capacity  to  think  and  feel  for  others  ir- 
respective of  their  rank  or  condition  ....  one  who 
possesses  an  ideal  so  lofty,  a  mind  so  delicate,  that 
it  lifts  him  above  all  things  ignoble  and  base,  yet 
strengthens  his  hands  to  raise  those  who  are  fallen  no 
matter  how  low.  This,  I  think  is  to  be  truly  a  gentle- 
man, and  of  all  gentlemen,  Jesus  of  Nazareth  was 
the  first."t 

It  was  not  in  a  land  where  the  Gospel  had  been  long 
preached  that  a  man,  summoned  to  help  another  in 
a  sinking  boat,  stood  calmly  on  the  bank  and  said, 
"He  is  not  of  my  village.''^ 

The  Spirit  of  God  That  there  are  these  and  other  allies 
in  the  Hearts  of  the  missionary  enterprise  is  because 
of  Men.  there  is  at  work  in  the  world  this  last 

and  greatest  ally — the  Spirit  of  God.  Although  the 
Kingdom  of  Christ  moves  forward  only  where  the 
Gospel  is  preached  and  His  disciples  manifest  His 

*0.  M.  Fisher  of  Boston  Boot  and  Shoe  Cluh,  New  York  Times ,  Nov.  29, 1 920. 
tJefFery  Farnol,  The  Amateur  Gentleman,  p.  291. 
tFleming,  Marks  of  a  World  Christiariy  p.  19. 


2i6  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

power  in  their  lives,  preacher  and  disciple  alike  find 
that  the  Spirit  of  God  has  been  before  them  and  is 
with  them  moving  the  hearts  of  men.  In  every  re- 
ligion of  the  non-Christian  world  there  is  some  ele- 
ment of  truth  that  the  missionary  may  enlarge  until 
the  whole  vision  of  the  glory  of  God  in  the  face  of 
Jesus  Christ  shines  upon  the  seeker.  God  has  not 
left  Himself  without  a  witness.  Not  only  are  there 
these  fragments  of  truth  in  the  ancient  faiths. 
Missionary  after  missionary  will  tell  of  incidents 
where,  unknown  to  them,  the  way  was  prepared  for 
their  coming  and  men's  minds  were  opened  to  receive 
their  message. 

The  Assurance  Again  and  again  it  is  found  that  the 
of  Victory.  words  of  Augustine,  "Thou  hast  made 

us  for  thyself  and  our  hearts  are  restless  until  they 
find  their  rest  in  Thee"  express  the  universal  hu- 
man experience  in  Orient  and  Occident,  in  South 
and  North.  The  Indian  religious  reform  societies  by 
their  conscious  or  unconscious  adoption  of  Christian 
ideals  and  Christian  points  of  view  are  bearing 
testimony  to  the  fact  that  it  is,  after  all,  all  God's 
world — all  the  world  of  the  God  and  Father  of  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ  and  that  nowhere  in  the  world 
can  one  loyally  bear  witness  to  Him  without  event- 
ually drawing  out  of  men  (rather  than  putting  into 
them)  the  realization  that  he  is  their  Father.  "He 
made  of  one  every  nation  of  men  to  dwell  on  all  the 
face  of  the  earth  .  .  .  that  they  should  seek  God 
if  haply  they  might  feel  after  Him  and  find  Him, 
though  He  is  not  far  from  every  one  of  us:  for  in 
Him  we  live  and  move,  and  have  our  being.''  It  is  this 
that  makes  our  assault  upon  our  impossible  task  not 


What  is  Required  of  Us  217 

vain  but  certain  of  victory!  It  is  this  that  makes  the 
hours  and  years  of  toil  and  sacrifice, of  pain  and  mar- 
tyrdom, the  bearing  of  the  cross  daily,  not  only  en- 
durable but  ground  for  rejoicing!  "Blessed  are 
ye  ....    !" 

WHAT    IS    REQUIRED    OF    US 

With  good  confidence  then,  yet  not  discounting  the 
difficulty  of  our  task,  let  us  see  what  practical  meas- 
ures are  required  of  us.  What  are  the  ways  in  which 
the  message  of  the  Gospel  is  brought  to  the  non- 
Christian  world?  How  can  we  do  our  share  in  estab- 
lishing His  Kingdom  among  the  nations? 

Evangelizing,  There  are  just  two  places  where 
Healing,  Teaching,  Christian  influence  can  be  brought  to 
Writing.  i^gg^j.  Qj^  ^j^g  non-Christian  world.  One 

is  in  the  foreign  land  itself.  Here  many  methods 
must  be  used.  The  district  evangelist  gathers  to- 
gether the  preachers  or  the  Bible  women,  trains 
them  in  the  message  of  the  Gospel  and  then  sends 
them  out  to  preach  and  to  teach  others.  He  him- 
self travels  over  his  district,  proclaiming  the  new  life 
in  Christ  to  little  groups  or  to  large  crowds  who  stop 
to  hear,  or  in  the  quiet  of  some  household  or  wayside 
to  some  individual  man  or  woman.  Steadily  he  and 
his  fellow  workers  are  adding  to  their  little  congre- 
gations of  new  believers  and  steadily  they  are  cor- 
recting mistaken  notions,  breaking  down  un-Christian 
habits,  teaching  the  new  Christians  to  win  others, 
to  study  the  Bible,  to  support  the  church. 

Again,  in  hospitals  or  traveling  about  the  country- 
side missionary  physicians  reveal  to  men  in  pain 
and  weakness  the  unselfish  ministry  of  Christ  to  the 


21 8  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

sick.  This  is  a  marvelous  avenue  of  approach  to 
the  hearts  of  mankind  in  non-Christian  lands,  for 
not  only  is  there  dire  need  of  such  ministry,  but  in 
it  the  skilful  physician  draws  close  to  the  sickness  of 
the  soul,  as  well  as  the  sickness  of  the  body,  and  the 
patient  finds,  in  the  care  of  the  physicians  and  nurses, 
a  personal  experience  of  God's  love. 

A  third  method  is  the  method  of  the  schools. 
Here  the  sons  and  daughters  of  Christians  are  trained, 
in  the  lower  grades,  the  high  schools,  and  colleges, 
in  the  theological  and  medical  and  normal  schools, 
for  the  future  leadership  of  the  Christian  com- 
munity and  of  the  nations.  Without  such  leader- 
ship the  churches  would  be  crippled  both  in  vigor 
and  in  skill  and  it  is  in  such  leadership,  as  we  have 
often  seen  in  these  pages,  that  the  hope  of  the  nations 
is  found.  Moreover,  it  is  in  these  schools  and  col- 
leges that  scores  who  seek  only  Western  learning, 
are  led  to  find  the  Master  Teacher,  Christ. 

All  the  varied  range  of  interests  that  are  implied 
in  the  words  ''literature"  and  ''Scriptures"  form  a 
fourth  method.  The  Bible  itself,  its  colporteurs,  the 
editors  and  publishers,  the  children's  periodicals, 
the  vagrant  but  persuasive  tract,  the  commentary, 
the  Sunday  School  leaflet,  pictures  and  posters,  even 
the  arithmetic  and  speller,  all  seek  the  mind  and 
heart  of  the  people  with  the  message  of  life.  The 
newest  method,  old  in  spirit  as  Christianity,  but 
modern  in  its  manifestations,  is  termed  "social  serv- 
ice." The  day  nursery,  the  playground,  the  babies* 
clinic,  the  Boy  Scouts,  the  home  economics  class,  and 
all  the  features  of  the  institutional  church  are  chan- 


What  is  Required  of  Us  219 

nels  for  Christian  friendliness.  To  them  are  to  be 
added  the  care  of  the  blind,  the  orphaned,  the  aged, 
the  movements  for  moral  reform  and  industrial  wel- 
fare, by  which  Christ's  spirit  is  manifested  to  all  sorts 
and  conditions  of  men. 

Persons  and  Every  one  of  these  methods  requires 

Money.  the  presence  of  a  man  or  woman  pos- 

sessed of  knowledge  and  skill.  The  missionary  must 
be  found  and  trained  and  sent.  His  support  must  be 
provided,  his  health  guarded.  Schools  and  hospi- 
tals must  have  buildings,  missionaries  must  have  res- 
idences. Scholarships  and  equipment  are  necessary. 
Literature  must  be  subsidized  and  the  editors  se- 
cured. Love  of  money  may  be  the  root  of  all  evil, 
but  the  consecration  of  money  is  a  well-spring  of 
unlimited  good.  When  to  it  is  added  a  consecrated 
person,  the  combination  is  invincible  for  the  King- 
dom. 

An  Unoccupied  The  second  place  where  Christian  in- 
Field,  fluence  is  brought  to  bear  upon  the 
non-Christian  peoples  is  in  their  international  rela- 
tions with  the  Christian  world.  How  can  policies  of 
self-interest,  the  ruthless  grasping  at  economic  re- 
sources, the  shouldering  aside  or  the  over-powering  of 
the  weak,  commend  the  supposed  religion  of  the 
powerful  to  those  who  suffer  thereby!  It  is  amazing 
testimony  to  the  work  of  the  missionaries  that  after 
the  first  shock  of  the  War  in  Europe  both  the  think- 
ing men  and  the  common  people  of  the  Orient  said, 
**We  know  that  this  is  not  Christianity,  for  you  have 
shown  us  what  that  is!"  But  what  a  pity — what  a 
crime — that  such  a  judgment  should  be  necessary! 
The  Kingdom  among  the  nations  will  not  be  built 


220  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

alone  by  the  Christianizing  of  the  people  within  a 
nation;  it  requires  also  the  Christianizing  of  the  rela- 
tions of  nation  with  nation. 

OUR    PERSONAL    SERVICE 

It  thus  appears  that  for  us  who  live  in  America 
there  are  two  lines  of  practical  service  for  building 
the  Kingdom  in  the  nations.  One  is  the  Christian- 
izing of  our  national  life  and  its  relations  with  the 
rest  of  the  world.  The  other  is  the  placing  in  the 
foreign  fields  of  consecrated  men  and  consecrated 
money  to  do  what  can  only  be  done  there  by  such 
men  and  such  money.  Let  us  see  what  these  practical 
measures  may  be,  grouping  them  under  those  related 
to  our  church  and  those  related  to  the  community 
in  which  we  live. 

The  source  of  supply  of  the  absolutely 

The  Extension  j  •        ^u 

-  -_      ,  ,  necessary    men    and    money    is    the 

of  Knowledge.  •;  •' 

twenty-Six  millions  or  Jrrotestant 
church  members  in  the  United  States.  If  the  pres- 
ent division  of  missionary  force  is  any  guide,  the 
responsibility  for  Christianizing  half  the  world  is 
upon  them.  Your  particular  part  of  that  base  is  your 
local  church  or  society  or  the  churches  in  your  town. 
No  success  in  some  other  tovv^n  elsewhere  can  com- 
pensate for  failure  in  yours.  What  then  can  you  do 
in  your  church  and  your  society?  First,  are  your 
fellow  members  informed?  Is  new  knowledge  of  the 
world  mission  of  the  church  in  all  its  phases  steadily 
coming  to  them  and  to  them  all?  Have  they,  for 
example,  caught  the  significance  to  the  Kingdom  of 
God,  of  the  written  vernacular  and  the  new  phonetic 
movement  in  China,  of  self-government  in  India,  of 
the  League  of  Nations?  If  such  knowledge  is  not 


What  is  Required  of  Us  221 

flowing  freely  through  your  church  or  your  society, 
there  is  a  task  for  you.  The  Macedonian  call  must 
be  heard  before  it  can  be  answered.  If  you  have 
gained  some  new  vision  of  the  world,  help  your 
pastor,  your  church,  your  society,  your  next  door 
neighbor  to  see  what  you  see!  Often  the  most  effec- 
tive way  of  promoting  this  is  through  a  systematic 
plan  of  missionary  education  in  your  church  or  so- 
ciety.* 

The  Investment  In  the  second  place,  is  the  invest- 
or Life.  ment  of  life  in  the  service  of  the 
church  at  home  and  abroad  being  frequently  made 
in  your  church.^  One  who  travels  widely  among 
churches  reported  that  out  from  thirty-eight  "fam- 
ily" churches,  spread  over  a  large  part  of  the  coun- 
try, had  gone  in  fifteen  years  but  three  candidates 
for  the  ministry.  Yet  there  are  single  churches  where 
in  the  same  length  of  time  two,  three,  or  four  times 
as  many  young  people  have  found  their  life-work  in 
the  pastorate  or  the  foreign  field.  Where  this  has 
happened,  it  has  been  because  the  whole  missionary 
impulse  of  the  church  was  strong  and  because  a  few 
had  the  matter  deeply  on  their  hearts.  To  influence 
young  men  and  women  toward  Christ's  service  is  a 
high  calling,  requiring  great  tact,  absolute  sincerity, 
and  a  thorough  understanding  of  the  spirit  of  youth. 
Often  the  help  given  in  sending  a  little  group  of 
young  people  to  a  summer  conference  or  a  district 
institute  will  be  a  material  factor  in  guiding  their 
lives.  The  principle  of  the  stewardship  of  life  applies 
also  to  the  work  of  the  local  church  itself  and  to  the 
activity  of  that  church  in  building  the  Kingdom  of 

*See  for  example  DifFendorfer,  Missionary  Education  in  Home  and  School. 


222  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

God  in  its  community.  Perhaps  it  is  here  that  your 
witness  to  Him  in  faithful  and  skilled  service  can  be 
given. 

Making  up  the  Again,  what  is  the  missionary  spirit 
Budget.  of  your  church  or  society  as  represent- 

ed by  its  giving  of  money?  We  have  heard  much  in 
recent  years  of  quotas  and  apportionments  and  the 
like  and  we  feel  restless  about  it.  It  would  be  so 
much  better  if  we  could  carry  on  this  great  work 
without  money !  We  are  beginning  to  phrase  the  need 
ofmoneymoresoftly,"thestewardship  of  possessions." 
But  the  plain  fact  remains  that  while  there  is  much, 
and  much  of  the  greatest  importance,  that  money 
cannot  do,  there  are  some  things  ^that  nothing  but 
money  can  do.  It  is  just  so  much  potential  energy 
which  God  has  put  into  our  hands  to  control.  For 
its  use  we  are  accountable  to  Him.  What  difference 
does  it  make  whether  your  church  or  your  society 
is  giving  more  or  less  than  the  next  or  even  whether 
it  is  giving  in  the  same  proportion  to  its  wealth  or  to 
the  income  of  its  members?  There  is  but  one  stand- 
ard, one  quota,  one  apportionment,  and  that  is 
Christ's.  ''Whosoever  .  .  .  forsaketh  not  all  that 
he  hath  cannot  be  my  disciple  J' \  Every  item  in  the 
family  budget,  every  item  in  the  personal  account 
book,  every  outgoing  coin  must  represent  some  in- 
vestment in  the  Kingdom's  work, — nay,  more,  must 
represent  the  wisest  investment  possible.  Every 
man  and  woman,  every  church,  every  society  must 
determine  this  in  the  sight  of  God. 

What  we  are  But  any  assumption  that  modern  giv- 
Giving  Now.  jng  has  applied  this  test  and  reached 

the  limit  of  its  giving  to  missions  is  incorrect. 


What  is  Required  of  Us  223 

"Last  year  (1919)  the  Protestant  churches  of  the 
United  States  reported  ;^249,778, 535  or  the  tithe  of  27 
cents  a  day,  expended  for  local  and  benevolent  work. 
As  a  total  figure  this  is  a  very  large  sum,  but  when 
looked  at  from  the  standpoint  of  an  individual  offering 

I  cents  7  mills  per  member  per  day  is  scarcely  worthy 
of  being  considered  an  offering  nor  even  a  tithe   .    .    . 

I I  is  an  amazing  statement  that  the  tithe  of  $1 .37  per  day, 
or  13  cents  7  mills  from  each  member  of  the  Protestant 
churches  of  our  country,  would  maintain  all  church 
expenses  as  per  last  year  and  provide  for  the  world's 
need  in  new  work  the  colossal  sum  of  one  billion  dol- 
lars."* 

The  receipts  of  the  foreign  missionary  agencies  of 
North  America  for  191 9  were  reported  to  reach 
$30,873,000.  This  is  less  than  three  cents  a  week  per 
member!  The  answer  of  the  churches  to  this  condi- 
tion and  to  the  tremendous  needs  of  the  world 
brought  forward  by  the  war  has  been  the  recent 
great  campaigns  and  movements.  These  are  not  arti- 
ficial devices  to  get  money.  They  are  the  normal 
efforts,  by  those  who  see  the  burdens  of  the  world, 
to  summon  their  fellow-Christians  to  fulfil  Christ's 
law  by  lifting  these  burdens.  But  no  sum  that  has 
yet  been  named  as  an  objective  has  approached 
what  is  truly  needed  and  what  the  Church  is  able  to 
do.  Let  the  Church,  let  your  church,  your  society, 
measure  its  responsibility  by  the  need  of  the  world 
and  the  commands  of  its  Lord^  and  make  and  pay  its 
pledges  on  that  basis  and  the  day  of  "drives"  will  be 
over.  Then  every  mission  field,  every  nation  in  the 
world  will  feel  the  thrill  of  a  great  hope  which  is  com- 
ing true.  For  far  more  than  the  accomplishment 
wrought  by  dollars  and  cents  will  be  the  fruits  of  the 
spirit  in  which  they  will  be  given. 

*  World  Survey,  Interchiirch  World  Movement.  Foreign  Volume,  p.  190. 


224  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Your  Christian  Many  Other  suggestions  could  be 
Influence  in  Your  made  as  to  ways  by  which  the  readers 
Community.  q£  ^.j^jg  book  may  serve  the  cause  of 
foreign  missions  in  their  church  or  society,  but  for 
these  other  easily  accessible  sources  of  information 
must  suffice.  We  have  now  to  find  out  how  we  can 
in  the  community  in  which  we  live  do  our  share  of 
building  the  Kingdom  abroad.  Every  stone  that  is 
laid  in  America  for  the  foundation  of  the  Kingdom 
buttresses  or  supports  some  other  stone  laid  in  a 
foreign  land.  Every  development  of  national  ideal- 
ism for  unselfish  ends,  every  effort  toward  making 
the  inner  character  of  this  nation  Christian  is  im- 
portant, but  the  ways  and  means  of  carrying  this  on 
are  not  in  the  scope  of  this  book.  It  is,  however,  fair 
to  remark  with  Dr.  D.  J.  Fleming  that 

"the  weight  right  here  at  home  is  such  that  a  lever  to  . 
move  it  must  be  long  enough  to  reach  to  China.  Only 
the  faith  that  dares  set  itself  to  the  purification  and 
enrichment  of  a  whole  world's  life  will  have  dynamic 
enough  to  deal  effectively  with  the  situation  at  one's 
door."* 

But  in  the  matter  of  the  relationships  of  our  na- 
tion with  others  and  in  her  leadership  in  world  af- 
fairs there  is  a  responsibility  upon  the  missionary- 
minded  person  which  can  only  be  discharged  here. 
First  of  all,  you  are  a  part  of  the  public  that  ex- 
presses "public  sentiment."  You  can  assist  the  ex- 
pression of  sound  opinion  by  refusing  to  be  stampeded 
into  believing  ill  of  some  other  nation  or  of  the  for- 
eigners who  live  among  us  and  by  being  able  to  give 
your  reasons  for  your  opinion.  Few  of  us  realize  the 
extent  to  which  opinions  are  made,  confirmed,  or 

*D.  J.  Fleming,  Marks  of  a  World  Christian,  p.  187. 


What  is  Required  of  Us  225 

changed  in  ordinary  conversation.  Again,  if  the 
editorials  in  your  local  paper  or  the  speeches  of  your 
local  politicians  are  prejudiced  or  misrepresent  the 
facts,  let  them  know  that  you  think  so.  When  they 
see  that  their  views  are  mistaken  or  unpopular,  they 
will  change  them,  and  thereby  mold  the  opinion  of 
many  more.  Perhaps  your  local  editor  will  accept  a 
well  written  missionary  news-item  or  article  from 
time  to  time. 

The  centers  of  power  in  foreign  poli- 

Christian Influence    •         •        ^i         tj    ' ^    j     Oj.    ^  ^.i. 

•    th    Nati  n        ^^^^    ^^"^  United    states    are    the 

President,  the  State  Department,  and 
the  Senate  and  its  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations- 
Two  members  of  the  Senate  represent  your  state  and 
you.  By  all  means,  when  issues  of  importance  to  the 
weal  of  the  world  are  being  considered  let  them  know 
whether  what  they  have  been  saying  or  voting  rep- 
resents your  judgment  as  to  the  wise  and  Christian 
action  to  take.  They  will  not  respond  to  public 
opinion  unless  they  know  what  public  opinion  is. 
Again,  in  the  local  political  organizations  there  will 
be  many  opportunities  to  create  sentiment,  to  en- 
large vision,  to  block  un-Christian  proposals  relating 
to  foreigners  and  foreign  affairs.  There  are  many 
other  places  where  good  citizenship  and  the  Christiani 
spirit  will  tell  for  Christianity  among  the  nations^ 
Experiment  will  discover  them. 

FELLOWSHIP  WITH    CHRIST 

We  have  now  travelled  far  in  our  studies  and 
thought  earnestly  upon  the  great  enterprise  of  es- 
tablishing the  Kingdom  of  Christ  among  the  nations. 
Perhaps,  as  we  come  to  the  conclusion,  we  may  well 


226  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ask  what  it  all  means  in  our  personal  lives.  Where 
does  it  take  hold  of  us? 

Through  Jesus'      Is  it  not  that  we  must  learn  to  look 
^y^^'  at  the  world  through  the  eyes  of  Je- 

sus? Our  thought  cannot  be  confined  to  our  town  or 
city,  if  it  is  to  be  like  His  thought.  For  our  own 
sakes  our  outlook  must  be  world-wide,  and  only  so 
can  we  widen  the  outlook  of  others.  Only  so  can  we 
illuminate  the  geography  and  history  which  our 
children  study  in  school  with  that  light  which  first 
shone  in  Bethlehem's  streets.  We  must  regard  men 
and  women  ofall  nations  as  God's  sons  and  daughters, 
our  brothers  and  sisters.  We  must  see  in  them  the 
wonderful  possibilities  which  Jesus  saw  and  which  His 
spirit  brings  to  pass.  When  He  looked  on  them,  He 
was  "moved  with  compassion  toward  them  because 
they  were  as  sheep  having  no  shepherd."  y^re  we  so 
moved? 
,    ,        ^. ,         Then,  looking  at  the  world  through 

As  Jesus  Did.  tt-  i     jj   l      •      *      J  LT 

His  eyes,  we  shall  begin  to  do  as  He 
did.  He  did  not  stop  with  the  emotion  of  compassion. 
The  very  next  phrase  in  that  verse  is  "and  he  began 
to  teach  them  many  things,"  and  then,  because 
they  were  without  food,  He  fed  them.  We  shall  fol- 
low Him  into  action.  We  shall  be  bringing  others  to 
the  sight  of  the  burdens  of  the  world  which  He  died 
to  save.  We  shall  be  making  up  our  household  budg- 
ets and  writing  at  the  top  "Seek  first  the  Kingdom 
of  God  and  his  righteousness  and  all  these  things 
shall  be  added  unto  you."  We  shall  be  thinking  of 
the  lives  which  He  has  given  us  to  guide  and  to  love 
and  we  shall  be  counting  it  high  honor  if  our  sons  or 
our  daughters  hear  the  call  to  serve  Him  in  foreign 


What  is  Required  of  Us  227 

lands  and  are  found  worthy  for  this  heroic  service. 
Indeed,  we  shall  be  the  more  joyful,  if  we  have  made 
it  easier  for  them  to  hear  the  call. 

.  When  Simon  made  the  confession  of 
of  tiieiSngdom*  ^^^  faith,  "Thou  art  the  Christ,  the 
Son  of  the  living  God,"  Jesus  named 
him  Peter,  a  rock.  It  is  upon  the  man  who  has  this 
faith  in  Him,  Jesus  declares  that  He  will  build  His 
church.  On  that  foundation  the  gates  of  hell  shall 
not  prevail  against  it.  This  is  the  foundation  which 
the  missionary  enterprise  is  seeking  to  lay  in  every 
land — men  and  women  who  have  that  faith  in 
Christ. 

Our  part  in  the  laying  of  that  foundation  requires 
that  we  too  have  that  faith.  If  we  do  our  share,  we 
shall  put  our  lives  without  reserve  into  His  hands. 
Steadfastly  seeking  to  learn  His  will  and  to  do  it, 
we  shall  become  more  and  more  skilful  in  minister- 
ing to  others  in  His  name,  in  bearing  our  part  in 
transforming  the  nations  of  this  world  into 

THE  KINGDOM  OF  OUR  LORD. 


'For  the  kingdom  is  the  Lord's;  and 
he  is  the  governor  among  the  nations^ 


228  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

idolatry's  waste  of  life 

Not  long  ago,  a  teacher  in  the  city  of  Foochow  began  to  in- 
vestigate the  relation  of  idolatry  to  the  industries  of  that  city. 
Foochow  contains  approximately  700,000  inhabitants.  Such  a 
survey  as  has  been  possible,  using  student  investigators,  has 
shown  that  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the  population  is,  to  some  de- 
gree, dependent  for  its  livelihood  upon  the  popularity  of  idol 
worship.  Thirty  per  cent,  of  the  people  were  found  to  be  en- 
tirely dependent  upon  it.  Some  day  the  manifold  ramifications 
of  idolatry  through  Chinese  society  will  be  adequately  discussed. 
Here  it  can  only  be  said  that  it  has  economic  stakes  set  where 
even  many  of  the  missionaries  never  suspect  them  to  be.  Mo- 
hammedanism and  Christianity  combined  have  scarcely  begun 
to  affect  idolatry. — Paul  Hutchinson,  "The  Future  of  Religion 
in  China,"  Atlantic  Monthly ^  January,  1921,  p.  123. 

OUR    UNITED    STATES 

Let  us  not  forget,  however,  that  our  own  Congress  passed  a 
law  for  discriminating  dues  on  foreign  shipping  in  the  Panama 
Canal,  apparently  in  violation  of  a  treaty  understanding,  and  that 
a  repeal  of  that  discrimination  was  bitterly  opposed.  We 
should  remember  that  in  our  Chinese  immigration  legislation  we 
have  disregarded  plain  provisions  of  our  treaties  with  China,  and 
that  we  have  refused  to  Japanese  in  this  country  those  equal 
fights  with  other  foreigners  that  our  treaties  with  Japan  gave 
them  every  reason  to  expect.  It  is  also  well  to  remember  that 
in  the  only  part  of  the  Orient  which  we  control  we  abandoned 
in  our  customs  tariff"  and  navigation  laws  the  principle  of  equal 
opportunity  and  established  frank  discrimination  in  favor  of 
American  goods  and  ships. — "Americus,"  in  Asia^  August, 
i9i9>P-763- 

CHRISTIANITY   AND   THE    PEACE    TREATV 

We  thought  the  Great  War  had  brought  a  moral  awakening 
in  which  the  true  relation  of  property  to  life  and  the  true  relation 
of  men  to  men  had  been  discovered.  TheTreaty  of  Peace  has 
been  a  rude  awakening,  for  in  it  property  is  frequently  ele- 
vated above  life,  and  selfishness  is  crowned  again  with  the 
sanction  of  international  law.  To  be  sure,  our  government  is 
less  responsible  for  this  than  are  some  others,  but  who  shall  say 


What  is  Required  of  Us  229 

that  our  cleaner  hands  are  not  due  more  to  geographical  location 
than  to  our  better  hearts.  We  do  not  have  a  better,  a  more 
Christian  Treaty,  because  we  do  not  have  a  more  Christian 
world.  We  shall  not  have  a  better  world  until  the  Christians 
of  the  world  return  to  the  Gospel  of  Christ  as  it  relates,  not  to 
dogmas  or  to  policies,  but  to  the  obligationo  of  living  and  the  re- 
lation of  property  to  life. — ^Tyler  Dennett,  A  Better  Worlds  p. 
166. 

WHAT   MOSLEMS    SEE    IN   AMERICA 

I  remember  once  asking  an  elderly  man,  who  came  from 
Turkey,  although  not  a  Mohammedan,  "How  do  you  like 
America?" 

"Not  at  all,"  he  answered. 

"Why?"  I  asked.  "Are  you  out  of  work,  or  what  is  the 
trouble?" 

"Oh,  no,"  he  answered,  "I  have  good  work,  making  good 
money,  too.  But  you  know  judging  from  what  I  heard  from 
American  missionaries,  I  thought  Amicrica  was  Paradise,  but 
when  I  walk  up  and  down  the  avenues  (Second  and  Third 
Avenues  in  New  York  City),  and  see  the  half  dressed  painted 
creatures  .  .  ,  oh — well  and  other  things  .  .  .  well,  I  guess,  I'll 
go  back." 

Poor  fellow,  that  was  his  Amtnco.,  he  worked  there ^  he  lived  there ^ 
he  walked  up  and  down  the  avenues  there  on  the  East  Side  of  New 
York.     That  is  w^-it  he  saw  .... 

The  street  life  in  the  so-called  "down-town"  sections  of  the 
big  American  cities  with  all  its  undesirable  aspects  will  be  the 
only  America  most  of  the  Mohammedans  see  in  this  country, 
and  that  is  what  they  will  tell,  when  they  go  back  over  there, 
where  Christian  Americans  send  their  missionaries  spending 
thousands  of  dollars  every  year. — Moslem  Worlds  January, 
1920,  p.  32. 

JOHN  Wesley's  budget 

John  Wesley  wrote  in  his  account  book,  a  few  months  before 
his  death:  "As  my  sight  fails  me  much,  I  do  not  propose  to  keep 
any  more  accounts.  (He  had  kept  them  with  great  care  for 
sixty-six  years.)  It  suffices  that  I  gain  all  I  can,  I  save  all  I  can^ 
and  I  give  all  I  cany  that  is^  all  I  have.     J,  W,  " 


A  BRIEF  READING  LIST 

Practically  every  book  which  has  been  issued  in  this  series  of 
study  books  will  be  of  value  in  illustrating  and  amplifying  what 
is  said  in  this.  They  are  full  of  the  material  which  will  make 
more  vivid  the  conditions  (necessarily  only  briefly  referred  to 
in  this  book) — social,  industrial,  religious — in  the  non-Christian 
world  and  outline  more  definitely  the  Christian  foundations  which 
have  there  been  established.  For  this  reason  they  are  not  listed, 
below. 

Two  other  books  and  two  periodicals  are,  in  the  writer's 
thought,  most  illuminating  and  inspiring  as  adjuncts  to  the 
pages  which  precede.     The  books  are: 

World   Survey,    Interchurch    World    Movement,     Foreign 

Volume. 
D.  J.  Fleming,  Marks  of  a  World   Christian,  Association 

Press.     1920.     X,  198  pp. 

The  periodicals  are  Missionary  Review  of  the  World  and  any 
reliable  newspaper  containing  a  large  amount  of  foreign  news. 
The  latter  must  always  be  used  with  care  to  avoid  "propaganda** 
matter. 

CHAPTER  I.     JAPAN  AND  KOREA 

ASIA.     The  American  Magavine  on  the  Orient. 

John  Foord,  Editor.  Monthly,  New  York.  Illustrated. 
Many  interesting  and  valuable  articles.  (Also  China,  In- 
dia, Near  East.) 

Brown,  Arthur  J.     The  Mastery  of  the  Far  East. 

Scribners.  1919.  x,  671  pp.  A  full  discussion  with  abun- 
dant descriptive  material  of  Korea's  fall  and  Japan's  rise 
to  power  in  the  Far  East. 

Christian  Movement  in  the  Japanese  Empire. 

Edited  by  E.  T.  Iglehart.  Conference  of  Federated  Mis- 
sions. 1919.  vi,  450,  xcii  pp.  Includes  Korea  and  For- 
mosa. This  annual  is  the  most  important  source  of  in- 
formation concerning  missionary  work  and  missionary 
problems  in  the  Empire. 


232  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

Committee  on  the  War  and  the  Religious  Outlook.     The 
Missionary  Outlook  in  the  Light  of  the  War. 

Association  Press.  1920.  xx,  329  pp.  Bibliography. 
A  very  valuable  study.  (Also  China,  India,  Islam,  Near 
East,  Africa,  Latin  America,  Chapter  V,  Chapter  VI.) 

Dennett,  Tyler.     The  Democratic  Movement  in  Asia. 

Association  Press.     191 8.    vii,  252  pp.     (Also  China,  India.) 

Fahs,  Charles  H.     Americans  Stake  in  the  Far  East. 

Association  Press,  1920.  v,  170  pp.  A  study  book  com- 
posed of  searching  questions  arranged  for  discussion  and 
abundant  quotations  from  many  authorities.     (Also  China.) 

Gibbons,  Herbert  Adams.     The  New  Map  of  Asia. 

The  Century  Co.  191 9.  xiv,  571  pp.  Fine  analysis  and 
description  of  the  workings  of  economic  imperialism  and 
the  clash  of  nations.     (Also  China,  India,  Near  East.) 

International  Review  of  Missions. 

Edited  by  J.  PL  Oldham.  London  and  New  York.  The 
most  important  quarterly  on  the  subject.  (Also  China, 
India,  Near  East,  Africa.) 

Macdonald,  a.  S.     Trade,  Politics  and  Christianity  in  Africa 
and  the  East. 

Longmans,  191 6,  xxi,  296  pp.  (Also  China,  India,  Africa, 
and  Chapter  V.) 

MooRE,  E.  C.  The  Spread  of  Christianity  in  the  Modern  World. 
University  of  Chicago.  1919.  xi,  352  pp.  Bibliography. 
(Also  China,  India,  Near  East,  Africa.) 

Moore,  E.  C.     West  and  East. 

The  Expansion  of  Christendom  and  the  Naturalization  of 
Christianity  in  theOrient  in  the  XlXth  Century.  Scribners. 
1920.     xii,  421  pp.     (Also  China,  India,  Near  East.) 

Okuma,  S.     Fifty  Years  of  New  Japan. 

Smith,  Elder  &  Co,     London^     1910.     Two  volumes, 

KOREA 

Cynn,  Hugh  H.     The  Rebirth  of  Korea. 
Abingdon  Press,     1920,     272  pp. 

The  Korean  Situation. 

Authentic  Accounts  by  Eye-witnesses.  Commission  on  Re- 
lations with  the  Orient  of  the  Federal  Council  of  the  Church- 
es of  Christ  in  America.     1919. 


A  Brief  Reading  jlist  233 

The  Korean  Situation.  Number  Two. 

By  the  same  commission. 
McKenzie,  F.  a.     Korea  s  Fight  for  Freedom. 

Revell.      1920.     320  pp. 

See  also  references  to  Korea  in  books  in  Japan  list. 


CHAPTER  II.     CHINA 

Cheng,  S.  G.     Modern  China.     A  Political  Study. 
Oxford  Univ.  Press.     1919.  vii,  380  pp. 

China  Mission  Year  Book. 

E.  C.  Lobenstine,  Editor.  China  Continuation  Committee. 
191 9.  The  most  important  single  source  of  missionary  in- 
formation for  China.  Issued  annually,  xii,  398  pp.  (Al- 
so Islam.) 

Gamevvell,  Mary  Ninde.     New  Life  Currents  in  China. 

Missionary  Education  Movement.     1919.     xii,  232  pp. 
Bibliography. 

Ross,  Edward  A.     The  Changing  Chinese. 

The  Century  Co.  1912.  xvi,  i^i^G  pp.  A  brilliant  and 
important  study  of  Chinese  character  and  conditions. 

Wheeler,  W.  R.     China  and  the  World  War. 

Macmillan.  1919.  xiii,  263  pp.  Bibliography.  (Also 
Japan.) 

See  also  books  marked  "Also  China"  in  list  for  Chapter  I, 


CHAPTER  III.     INDIA 

Farquhar,  J.  N.     Modern  Religious  Movements  in  India. 

Macmillan.     1915.     xvi,  471  pp.     (Also  Islam.) 
Fisher,  Fred  B.     India  s  Silent  Revolution. 

Macmillan.     1919.     192  pp. 
Holderness,  T.  W.     Peoples  and  Problems  of  India. 

Holt.     191 1.     256  pp.     Bibliography. 
Village  Education  in  India. 

Report    of    a   Commission.     D.    J.     Fleming,     Secretary. 

Humphrey  Milford.     1920.     xii,  210  pp. 

See  also  books  marked  "Also  India**  ui  list  for  Chapter  I, 


234  The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 

ISLAM  AND  THE  NEAR  EAST 

Hall,  William  H.     The  Near  East^  the  Crossroads  of  the  World 

Missionary  Education  Movement.     1920.     x,  230  pp. 
Mathews,  Basil.     The  Riddle  of  the  Nearer  East. 

Doran.     1919.     216  pp.     Bibliography. 
The  Moslem  World. 

Edited  by  S.  M.  Zwemer.     Missionary  Review  Publishing 

Co.     Quarterly.     (Also  Africa.) 
Zwemer,  S.  M.     The  Disintegration  of  Islam. 

Revell.     1916.     231  pp.     Bibliography. 
See  also  books  marked  **Also  Islam,  Near  East"  in  lists  for 

preceding  chapters. 

CHAPTER  IV.     AFRICA 

Cadbury,  W.  a.    Labor  in  Portuguese  West  Africa, 

Button.     1910.     xii,  187  pp. 
The  Christian  Occupation  of  Africa. 

Committee  of  Reference  and  Counsel.     1917.     185  pp. 
Gibbons,  Herbert  Adams.     The  New  Map  of  Africa. 

A  history  of  European  colonial  expansion   and  colonial   di- 
plomacy,    1 900-1 9 1 6.    The  Century  Co.  1916.  xiv,  503  pp. 
Harris,  J.  H.     Africa^  Slave  or  Free? 

Student  Christian  Movement.     London.     1919.     xix,  244 

pp.     A  most  illuminating  book. 
Nevinson,  Henry  W.     A  Modern  Slavery. 

Harpers.     1906.     xi,  216  pp. 
Patton,  Cornelius  H.     The  Lure  of  Africa. 

Missionary    Education    Movement.     1917.     xiv,    205    pp. 

Bibliography. 
See  also  books  marked   "Also  Africa'*  in   lists  for  Chapters  I 

and  III. 

LATIN  AMERICA 

Beach,  Harlan  P.     Renaissant  Latin  America. 

An  outline  and  interpretation  of  the  Panama  Congress  on 

Christian  work,  1916.     Missionary  Education  Movement. 

vi,  258  pp. 
Cooper,  C.  S.     Understanding  South  America. 

191 8.     Doran.     426  pp. 


A  Brief  Reading  List  235 

Regional  Conferences  in  Latin  America. 

Reports  of  Conferences  in  other  centers  following  the  Pan- 
ama Conference.  Missionary  Education  Movement.  1917. 
xiv,  452  pp. 

Ross,  Edward  A.     South  of  Panama. 

The  Century  Co.     191 5.     xvi,  396  pp. 

Shepherd,  William  R.     Latin  America. 

Holt.  1914.     viii,  256  pp.     Bibliography. 

See  also  book  marked  "Also  Latin  America"  in  Chapter  I. 

CHAPTER  V. 

Dennett,  Tyler.     A  Better  World. 
Doran.     1920.     173  pp. 

Macdonald,  a.  J.     Tradcy  Politics  and  Christianity  in  Africa 
and  the  East. 

Longmans.  191 6.  xxi,  296  pp.  A  fundamental  and  stim- 
ulating book.  Significant  introduction  by  Sir  H.  H.  Johns- 
ton. 

Speer,  Robert  E.     The  Gospel  and  the  New  World. 
Revell.     1919.     313  pp.     (Also  Chapter  VL) 

See  also  book  marked  "Also  Chapter  V"  in  list  for  Chapter  L 

CHAPTER  VL 

FosDiCK,  H.  E.     The  Meaning  of  Service. 

Association  Press.     1920.     ix,  225  pp. 
See  also  books  marked  "Also  Chapter  VI"  in  lists  fior  Chapters 

I  and  V. 


INDEX 


Africa,  missionary's  task,  149-50; 
our  unrealized  debt,  151;  our  duty, 

Africa  missionaries,  146-7 
African  character,  151-a 
Alphabet,  new,  in  China,  72 
America,   challenge   to,    197-8;   what 

Moslems  see  in,  229 
Anfu  Club,  67 
Aspiration,  vanity  of,  186-7 
Autocracy,  decline  of,  181,  200 

Bible,  power  of,  171 
Brotherhood,  181,  200 
Buddhism  in  Japan,  36,  38,  39 
Budget,  John  Wesley's,  229 
Bushido,  38 

Caste,  92,  96-8;  attack  on,  loo-i, 
108-9 

Caste  system,  11 8-9 

China  and  Japan,  26-7,  64-5;  re- 
sources, 61 ;  merchants,  62;  West- 
ern aggression,  62-4;  civil  war,  67-8; 
national  spirit,  68;  Christianity,  84- 
6;  our  duty,  87-8 

China's  national  consciousness,  57-8, 
73-4;  unity,  58;  missionary  survey, 
81;  humiliation,  88 

Chinese  character,  58-9 

Christian  movement,  the  unknown, 
42-3,  1 1 2-4;  unity,  45,  82-3,  iio-i, 
147, 168;  enterprise,  107-9;  stand- 
ards an  ally,  214-5;  influence  of 
individual,  224-5 

Christians,  challenge  to,  193-7;  call  to, 
201;  Christianizing,  207-8 

Christianity,  what  it  has  done,  15-7; 
borrowing  from,  38;  Japan,  40-1, 
43;  Korea,  50-2;  China,  78-80; 
Moslem  lands,  127-31 ;  Africa,  I46-8; 
Latin  America,  166-7 

Church,  foundations  of,  13 

Colonial  administration,  Africa,  138-9 

Conscience,  woman's,  Japan,  54 


j    "Consortium"  for  China,  71-2 
I    Continent,  the  empty,  154 

Continents,  meeting  of  three,  131 
j    Customs  a  barrier  to  progress,  203 

I    Democracy,  Japan,  22,  30-3,  35,  37; 
China,    58-9;  India,  104-7;  Africa, 
138;    Latin   America,    156-7;    non- 
Christian    countries,    178;    growth, 
182 
Disease,  burden  of,  186 
Doctor,  the,  in  Africa,  170-1 
"Drives"  and  stewardship,  223 
Duty,  our,  to  Latin  America,  169-70 

Economic  forces,  143-5;  effect  of,  17- 

8,  29-30,  59;  imperialism,  199 
Education,  effect,  18;  Japan,  2i,  35, 
37;  higher,  of  women,   37;   China, 
61,  72-3,   80-1;   India,  94,   117-8; 
Africa,  149;    Latin    America,    157- 
8,  163;  and  democracy,  203;  means 
of  salvation,  218 
"Elder  Statesmen,"  23,  30 
Emperor,  worship  of,  23,  54 
Europe,    challenge   to  Christians   in, 

194-7.   , 
Evangelistic  work,  217 
Example  an  ally,  212-3 
Exports  from  Latin  America,  154 
Extraterritoriality  in  China,  64-5,  67 

Factories,  China's  new,  89 
France  and  China,  71 

Gifts  to  missions,  222-3 
God,  Spirit  of,  an  ally,  215-6 
Government,    Africa,     137-9;    Latin 
America,  156-7 

Hara,  Mr.,  30-1 
Help,  need  for,  an  ally,  212 
Home  Rule  in  India,  loi,  104-6 
Hopes,  humanity's,  an  ally,  212 

Ideals,  low,  the  burden  of,  187 


238 


The  Kingdom  and  the  Nations 


Ignorance,  China,  60-1;  India,  93-4; 
burden  of  mankind,  178-9;  barrier, 
202-3 
Illiteracy,  Latin  America,  156,  157-8 
Immigration,  Latin  America,  155 
Independence  of  Korean  girls,  55 
India  the  kaleidoscopic,  92-3;  contri- 
bution to  war,  102-3;  first  foreign 
missionary  society,  11 1-2;  national 
characteristics,  114-6;  our  duty  to, 
116-20 
Industrial  conditions,  Japan,  27-30; 
India,  104;  Africa,  139-40;  and  com- 
mercial expansion,  China,  69-71 
International  relations,  63-4,  65,  87- 
8,  123-4,  131,  162-3,  182-3,  224-5, 
228;  Christianizing,  43-5,  206;  must 
be  Christianized,  219-20 
Iron  Horde,  the,  199 
Islam,  121-34;  political  collapse,  122- 
4;  barriers  to  spiritual  revival,  124- 
5;  reformed,  125 

Japan,  modern,  21-2 

Japanese  immigration,  179 

Jesus  Christ,  14;  and  Japan's  need, 
39-40;  120, 13 1-3;  Brahman  speaks, 
133;  student  witnesses,  134;  166; 
needed,  Latin  America,  169-70; 
supremacy  of,  189-91;  how  to  find, 
191-2;  fellowship  with,  225-7 

"Jihad"  or  holy  war,  123 

Kingdom,  advance  of,  20I-2;  ob- 
stacles, 208-9;  persons  and  money, 
219;  investment  of  life,  221-2; 
abroad,  building,  224-5;  foundation, 
227 

Knowledge,  an  ally,  210-1;  about 
missions,  220-1 

Korea,  militarists  in,  25—6;  material 
prosperity,  46;  new  regime,  49; 
Christianity's  task,  52—4;  Paul  and 
Silas  in,  55 

Korean  Revolution,  46-9;  and  Chris- 
tianity, 50-2;  Christian  in  jail,  55 

Labor,  Africa,  138,  142-5,  151;  Latin 
America,  158-9;  disdain  for,  159-60; 
exploitation,  176 


Latin  America,  154—71 
Leadership  in  Far  East,  24 
League  of  Nations,  184,  200 
Liberty,  love  of,  an  ally,  21 1-2 
Life,  idolatry's  waste  of,  228 
Liquor,  alcoholic,  87,  101,  146,    167; 

Korea,  53;  Africa,  140-2 
Literacy,  China,  61, 72;  increasing,  88- 

9;  India,  93-4;  Africa,  150 
Literature,    Christian,    needed,    133; 

means  of  salvation,  218-9 

Macdonald,  Dr.  Duncan  B.,  126,  127 

Man,  the  solidarity  of,  200 

Mandates,  138-9 

Marriage  in  Latin  America,  i6a-2 

Martyrs,  modern,  193 

Medical  conditions  in  Latin  America, 

159 
Merchants  in   China,  patriotism  of, 

76-8 
Militarism  in  Japan,  24-5 
Misgovernment    a    burden    of    man- 
kind, 181-4 
Missionary  enterprise,  purpose  of,  I4; 

budget,  222 
Missions,  Japan,  40-1 ;  Latin  America, 

168-71 
Mohammedans,  121-34;  India,  T07 
Monroe  Doctrine,  163 
Moral  force  in  Korea,  47-9,  51 
Moral  service  in  China,  81-2 
Morphine  in  Shantung,  27;  Korea,  53; 

and  opium,  66-7 
Moslem     ideas     about     Christianity, 

126-7 

"National     Missionary     Society     of 

China,"  84 
Nationalism,  exaggerated,  184-6;  nar- 
row, 200 
Near  East,  130-1;  our  duty  to,  131-3 
Need  of  the  world,  188-9 
Neighborliness,  American,  164-6 
"New  Culture  Movement,"  China,  76 
Non-Christian  world,  vested  interests, 
204;  statistics,  204—6 

Okuma,    Count,   situation    in   Japan, 
33-5 


Index 


239 


Ozaki,  Hon.  Yukio,  32 

Patriotism  not  enough,  185-6 
Peace  treaty  and  Christianity,  228 
Peonage,  158 

Phonetic  writing  in  China,  72 
Physician,    missionary,    makes    con- 
verts, 217-8 
Population  of  Latin  America,  155-6 
Poverty,   China,   60-1;    India,   94-6; 
striking   at,   101-2;   attack  on,  by 
Christianity,  108-9;  burden  of  man- 
kind, 173-7 
Profit,  the  right  and  wrong  of,  177 
Progress,  perils  of,  88 
Public  opinion,  shaping,  224-5 

Race  conflict,  140-1,  I42,  I44-5 
Race  prejudice,  Latin  America,  162; 

burden  of  mankind,  179-81 
Religion  in  India,  98-100 
Resources,  undeveloped,  187 
Responsibihty,  sense  of,  demands  ac- 
tion, 201 

Sadhu  Sunder  Singh,  III 
Sadler,  Sir  Michael,  18 
Saito,  Baron,  49 
Science,  modern,  an  ally,  214 
Sex  relations,  Latin  America,  160-2 
Shantung,  militarists  in,  26-7 
Shinto  cult  in  Japan,  36,  38 
Sin,  threat  of,  198 

Social  service,  China,  81-2;  means  of 
salvation,  218-9 


"Sphere  of  interest,"  123 

"Spheres  of  influence,"  22,  64 

Spirits,  belief  in  evil,  203-4 

Spiritual  burdens  of  mankind,  186-8 

"Squeeze,"  68-9 

Starvation,  174 

Student   class,   Japan,   32-3,   37;   on 

strike  in  China,  74-5 
Subject  nations,  government,  183-4 
Superstition  in   China,  60;  in  Islam, 

125 

Trade  relations,  Latin  America,  163-4 
Treaty  of  Versailles,  21,  47,  138;  of 

peace,  65 
"Twenty-one  Demands,"  64,  74 

United   States    and    China,   64;   and 

Latin  America,  163-6 
"Untouchables"  cleansed,  loo-l 

Victory,  assurance  of,  216-7 

War,  effect  of,  India,  103-4;  Africa, 
135-6;  effect  of  163;  a  source  of 
poverty,  176-7;  and  support  of 
missions,  196 

Wealth,  misuse  of,  175-6;  of  the 
United  States,  197 

White  race,  responsibility  of,  194-5 

Women,  political  power  of,  19;  in 
China,  86 

Working  classes  in  Japan,  27-30 

World,  what  it  needs,  188-9 

Yoshino,  Professor,  31-2 


Ciaylord  lird 

Makers 
Syracuse.  N. 

PAT.  JAN.  21,  1908  I      Princeton   Theological   Seminary   Libraries 


1    1012  01173  0886 


Date  Due 

' 

^ 

